US20060113054A1 - Method of making an ocular implant - Google Patents

Method of making an ocular implant Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20060113054A1
US20060113054A1 US11/107,359 US10735905A US2006113054A1 US 20060113054 A1 US20060113054 A1 US 20060113054A1 US 10735905 A US10735905 A US 10735905A US 2006113054 A1 US2006113054 A1 US 2006113054A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
mask
layer
forming
eye
patient
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/107,359
Inventor
Thomas Silvestrini
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Acufocus Inc
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US11/000,562 external-priority patent/US7491350B2/en
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US11/107,359 priority Critical patent/US20060113054A1/en
Assigned to ACUFOCUS, INC. reassignment ACUFOCUS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: SILVESTRINI, THOMAS A.
Priority to PCT/US2005/043108 priority patent/WO2006060380A2/en
Priority to EP05852395A priority patent/EP1845896A2/en
Priority to JP2007544432A priority patent/JP4746052B2/en
Priority to CA002614510A priority patent/CA2614510A1/en
Priority to US11/417,656 priority patent/US20060271184A1/en
Publication of US20060113054A1 publication Critical patent/US20060113054A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • A61F2/15Implant having one or more holes, e.g. for nutrient transport, for facilitating handling
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C23COATING METALLIC MATERIAL; COATING MATERIAL WITH METALLIC MATERIAL; CHEMICAL SURFACE TREATMENT; DIFFUSION TREATMENT OF METALLIC MATERIAL; COATING BY VACUUM EVAPORATION, BY SPUTTERING, BY ION IMPLANTATION OR BY CHEMICAL VAPOUR DEPOSITION, IN GENERAL; INHIBITING CORROSION OF METALLIC MATERIAL OR INCRUSTATION IN GENERAL
    • C23CCOATING METALLIC MATERIAL; COATING MATERIAL WITH METALLIC MATERIAL; SURFACE TREATMENT OF METALLIC MATERIAL BY DIFFUSION INTO THE SURFACE, BY CHEMICAL CONVERSION OR SUBSTITUTION; COATING BY VACUUM EVAPORATION, BY SPUTTERING, BY ION IMPLANTATION OR BY CHEMICAL VAPOUR DEPOSITION, IN GENERAL
    • C23C14/00Coating by vacuum evaporation, by sputtering or by ion implantation of the coating forming material
    • C23C14/0005Separation of the coating from the substrate
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C23COATING METALLIC MATERIAL; COATING MATERIAL WITH METALLIC MATERIAL; CHEMICAL SURFACE TREATMENT; DIFFUSION TREATMENT OF METALLIC MATERIAL; COATING BY VACUUM EVAPORATION, BY SPUTTERING, BY ION IMPLANTATION OR BY CHEMICAL VAPOUR DEPOSITION, IN GENERAL; INHIBITING CORROSION OF METALLIC MATERIAL OR INCRUSTATION IN GENERAL
    • C23CCOATING METALLIC MATERIAL; COATING MATERIAL WITH METALLIC MATERIAL; SURFACE TREATMENT OF METALLIC MATERIAL BY DIFFUSION INTO THE SURFACE, BY CHEMICAL CONVERSION OR SUBSTITUTION; COATING BY VACUUM EVAPORATION, BY SPUTTERING, BY ION IMPLANTATION OR BY CHEMICAL VAPOUR DEPOSITION, IN GENERAL
    • C23C16/00Chemical coating by decomposition of gaseous compounds, without leaving reaction products of surface material in the coating, i.e. chemical vapour deposition [CVD] processes
    • C23C16/01Chemical coating by decomposition of gaseous compounds, without leaving reaction products of surface material in the coating, i.e. chemical vapour deposition [CVD] processes on temporary substrates, e.g. substrates subsequently removed by etching
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/0059Cosmetic or alloplastic implants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2240/00Manufacturing or designing of prostheses classified in groups A61F2/00 - A61F2/26 or A61F2/82 or A61F9/00 or A61F11/00 or subgroups thereof
    • A61F2240/001Designing or manufacturing processes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2250/00Special features of prostheses classified in groups A61F2/00 - A61F2/26 or A61F2/82 or A61F9/00 or A61F11/00 or subgroups thereof
    • A61F2250/0014Special features of prostheses classified in groups A61F2/00 - A61F2/26 or A61F2/82 or A61F9/00 or A61F11/00 or subgroups thereof having different values of a given property or geometrical feature, e.g. mechanical property or material property, at different locations within the same prosthesis

Definitions

  • This application is directed to masks for improving the depth of focus of an eye of a human patient. This application also is directed to apparatuses and methods to produce masks that are resistant to corrosion, or other decay or degradation when applied to a patient.
  • Presbyopia or the inability to clearly see objects up close is a common condition that afflicts many adults over the age of 40. Presbyopia diminishes the ability to see or read up close. Near objects appear blurry and out of focus. Presbyopia may be caused by defects in the focusing elements of the eye or the inability (due to aging) of the ciliary muscles to contract and relax and thereby control the shape of the lens in the eye.
  • the human eye functions by receiving light rays from an object and bending, refracting, and focusing those rays.
  • the primary focusing elements of the human eye are the lens (also referred to as the intraocular lens) and the cornea.
  • Light rays from an object are bent by the cornea, which is located in the anterior part of the eye.
  • the light rays subsequently pass through the intraocular lens and are focused thereby onto the retina, which is the primary light receiving element of the eye. From the retina, the light rays are converted to electrical impulses, which are then transmitted by the optic nerves to the brain.
  • the cornea and lens bend and focus the light rays in such a way that they converge at a single point on the retina. Convergence of the light rays on the retina produces a focused image. However, if the cornea or the lens are not functioning properly, or are irregularly shaped, the images may not converge at a single point on the retina. Similarly, the image may not converge at a single point on the retina if the muscles in the eye can no longer adequately control the lens. This condition is sometimes described as loss of accommodation. In presbyopic patients, for example, the light rays often converge at a point behind the retina. To the patient, the resulting image is out of focus and appears blurry.
  • Eye glasses and contact lenses are shaped and curved to help bend light rays and improve focusing of the light rays onto the retina of the patient.
  • some vision deficiencies, such as presbyopia are not adequately addressed by these approaches.
  • a method for making a mask configured to improve the depth of focus of an eye of a patient.
  • a substrate is provided with a mask forming feature.
  • the mask forming feature comprises an annular surface that extends between an inner periphery and an outer periphery.
  • the annular surface is centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature.
  • the annular surface has a curved profile between the inner periphery and the outer periphery that corresponds to the curvature of a corneal layer of the eye.
  • a release layer is formed on the annular surface.
  • a mask layer of a biocompatible metal is formed such that the release layer is between the mask layer and the substrate. The mask layer is separated from the substrate.
  • a method for making a mask that is configured to improve the depth of focus of an eye of a patient.
  • a substrate is provided with a mask forming feature.
  • the mask forming feature includes a forming surface that extends from an outer periphery.
  • the forming surface can be an annular surface that extends between the outer periphery and an inner periphery.
  • the forming surface is centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature.
  • the forming surface has a curved profile corresponding to the curvature of a corneal layer of the eye.
  • a mask layer is formed of a biocompatible metal on the substrate.
  • a surface of the mask layer is configured to not corrode.
  • the mask layer is separated from the substrate.
  • a method of making a mask configured to improve the depth of focus of an eye of a patient.
  • a substrate with a mask forming feature is provided.
  • the mask forming feature comprises a forming surface that is centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature.
  • a release layer is formed on the annular surface.
  • a mask layer is formed such that the release layer is between the mask layer and the substrate.
  • the mask layer is formed of a biocompatible metal.
  • a surface of the mask layer opposite the release layer is configured to not corrode. The mask layer is separated from the substrate.
  • a method of making a mask configured be implanted in a cornea of an eye of a patient to improve the depth of focus of the patient.
  • the mask is disposed about a visual axis of the eye extending through a pupil of the eye when applied.
  • a substrate with a mask forming feature is provided.
  • the mask forming feature comprises an annular surface that extends between an inner periphery and an outer periphery. The annular surface is centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature.
  • At least a portion of the mask is formed by depositing a mask layer of a biocompatible metal on the substrate.
  • the mask is configured to be inert.
  • the mask layer is separated from the substrate.
  • a mask is configured to improve the depth of focus in an eye of a patient.
  • the mask includes a posterior layer formed of a biocompatible metal and a cosmetic layer.
  • FIG. 1 is a plan view of the human eye.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional side view of the human eye.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional side view of the human eye of a presbyopic patient wherein the light rays converge at a point behind the retina of the eye.
  • FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional side view of a presbyopic eye implanted with one embodiment of a mask wherein the light rays converge at a point on the retina.
  • FIG. 5 is a plan view of the human eye with a mask applied thereto.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 7 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a hexagon-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 8 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with an octagon-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 9 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with an oval-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 10 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a pointed oval-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 11 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a star-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 12 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture spaced above the true center of the mask.
  • FIG. 13 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture centered within the mask.
  • FIG. 14 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture spaced below the true center of the mask.
  • FIG. 15 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a square-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 16 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a kidney-shaped oval pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 17 is a side view of an embodiment of a mask having varying thickness.
  • FIG. 18 is a side view of another embodiment of a mask having varying thickness.
  • FIG. 19 is a side view of an embodiment of a mask with a gel to provide opacity to the lens.
  • FIG. 20 is frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a weave of polymeric fibers.
  • FIG. 21 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 20 .
  • FIG. 22 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask having regions of varying opacity.
  • FIG. 23 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 22 .
  • FIG. 24 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a centrally located pinhole like aperture and radially extending slots emanating from the center to the periphery of the mask.
  • FIG. 25 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 24 .
  • FIG. 26 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture, surrounded by a plurality of holes radially spaced from the pinhole like aperture and slots extending radially spaced from the holes and extending to the periphery of the mask.
  • FIG. 27 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 26 .
  • FIG. 28 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture, a region that includes a plurality of holes radially spaced from the aperture, and a region that includes rectangular slots spaced radially from the holes.
  • FIG. 29 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 28 .
  • FIG. 30 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a non-circular pinhole like aperture, a first set of slots radially spaced from the aperture, and a region that includes a second set of slots extending to the periphery of the mask and radially spaced from the first set of slots.
  • FIG. 31 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 30 .
  • FIG. 32 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture and a plurality of holes radially spaced from the aperture.
  • FIG. 33 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 32 .
  • FIG. 34 is an embodiment of a mask that includes two semi-circular mask portions.
  • FIG. 35 is an embodiment of a mask including two half-moon shaped portions.
  • FIG. 36 is an embodiment of a mask that includes a half-moon shaped region and a centrally-located pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 37 is an enlarged, diagrammatic view of an embodiment of a mask that includes particulate structure adapted for selectively controlling light transmission through the mask in a low light environment.
  • FIG. 38 is a view of the mask of FIG. 37 in a bright light environment.
  • FIG. 39 is an embodiment of a mask that includes a barcode formed on the annular region of the mask.
  • FIG. 40 is another embodiment of a mask that includes connectors for securing the mask within the eye.
  • FIG. 41 is a plan view of an embodiment of a mask made of a spiraled fibrous strand.
  • FIG. 42 is a plan view of the mask of FIG. 41 being removed from the eye.
  • FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view similar to that of FIG. 2 , but showing certain axes of the eye.
  • FIG. 44A illustrates a single-target fixation method for aligning an eye with the optical axis of an ophthalmic instrument.
  • FIG. 44B illustrates another single-target fixation method for aligning an eye with the optical axis of an ophthalmic instrument.
  • FIG. 45A shows an apparatus for projecting a target onto an optical axis at an infinite distance.
  • FIG. 45B shows an apparatus for projecting a target onto an optical axis at a finite distance.
  • FIG. 46 illustrates a dual-target fixation method.
  • FIG. 47 shows an apparatus with which two targets can be projected simultaneously by the same projection lens to provide fixation targets at a large distance (such as infinity) and a shorter (finite) distance.
  • FIG. 48 shows another embodiment of an apparatus for combining two targets to project them simultaneously at different axial distances.
  • FIG. 49A shows an example of a dual target pattern as viewed by the patient when the target patterns are aligned.
  • FIG. 49B shows the dual target pattern of FIG. 49A when the patterns are offset.
  • FIG. 50A shows an example of another dual target pattern as viewed by the patient when the target patterns are aligned.
  • FIG. 50B shows the dual target pattern of FIG. 50A when the target patterns are offset.
  • FIG. 51 shows one embodiment of an apparatus configured to locate the visual axis of an eye of a patient by aligning the axis with an axis of the apparatus.
  • FIG. 52 is a flow chart illustrating one method of screening a patient for the use of a mask.
  • FIGS. 53A-53C show a mask, similar to those described herein, inserted beneath an epithelium sheet of a cornea.
  • FIGS. 54A-54C show a mask, similar to those described herein, inserted beneath a Bowman's membrane of a cornea.
  • FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of a surgical system configured to locate the visual axis of a patient's eye by aligning the visual axis with an axis of the system.
  • FIG. 55A is a perspective view of another embodiment of a dual target fixation target.
  • FIG. 55B is a top view of the fixation target of FIG. 55A showing the first target.
  • FIG. 55C is a top view of the fixation target of FIG. 55A showing the second target.
  • FIG. 56 is a top view of another embodiment of a surgical system that includes an alignment device and a clamp configured to couple the alignment device with a surgical viewing device.
  • FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the alignment device shown in FIG. 56 .
  • FIG. 58 is a top view of the alignment device shown in FIG. 57 .
  • FIG. 59 is a schematic view of internal components of the alignment device of FIG. 57 .
  • FIG. 60 is a top view of another embodiment of a mask configured to increase depth of focus.
  • FIG. 60A is an enlarged view of a portion of the view of FIG. 60 .
  • FIG. 61A is a cross-sectional view of the mask of FIG. 60A taken along the section plane 61 - 61 .
  • FIG. 61B is a cross-sectional view similar to FIG. 61A of another embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 61C is a cross-sectional view similar to FIG. 61A of another embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 62A is a graphical representation of one arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60 .
  • FIG. 62B is a graphical representation of another arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60 .
  • FIG. 62C is a graphical representation of another arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60 .
  • FIG. 63A is an enlarged view similar to that of FIG. 60A showing a variation of a mask having non-uniform size.
  • FIG. 63B is an enlarged view similar to that of FIG. 60A showing a variation of a mask having a non-uniform facet orientation.
  • FIG. 64 is a top view of another embodiment of a mask having a hole region and a peripheral region.
  • FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of an eye illustrating a treatment of a patient wherein a flap is opened to place an implant and a location is marked for placement of the implant.
  • FIG. 65A is a partial plan view of the eye of FIG. 65 wherein an implant has been applied to a corneal flap and positioned with respect to a ring.
  • FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of an eye illustrating a treatment of a patient wherein a pocket is created to place an implant and a location is marked for placement of the implant.
  • FIG. 66A is a partial plan view of the eye of FIG. 66 wherein an implant has been positioned in a pocket and positioned with respect to a ring.
  • FIG. 67A is a schematic diagram of a substrate useful in a making an ocular implant
  • FIG. 67B is a schematic diagram illustrating a portion of a method of making an ocular implant using the substrate of FIG. 67A wherein a release layer is formed on the substrate;
  • FIG. 67C is a schematic diagram illustrating a portion of a method of making an ocular implant using the substrate of FIG. 67A wherein a release layer and a material layer are formed on the substrate;
  • FIG. 67D is a schematic diagram illustrating a portion of a method of making an ocular implant using the substrate of FIG. 67A wherein an ocular implant is released from the substrate by a suitable method.
  • FIG. 68 is a perspective view of a mask with a broken-out section, the mask being configured to not corrode.
  • This application is directed to masks for improving the depth of focus of an eye of a patient using pin-hole imaging and methods and apparatuses for making such masks.
  • the masks may be applied to the eye in any manner and in any location, e.g., as an implant in the cornea (sometimes referred to as a “corneal inlay”).
  • some methods for making such masks employ techniques that deposit thin films of material.
  • the materials used to make the mask can be metals that are selected or configured for long-term or permanent implantation. Some metals are subject to processes, such as corrosion, that can degrade a mask over time.
  • the mask can be formed of a material that is stable, e.g., one that is not subject to such processes or that substantially resists such processes.
  • the mask is formed of a material that is selected or configured to be inert, e.g., to not degrade due to physical or chemical processes such as corrosion induced by a galvanic reaction or otherwise.
  • masks can be formed that combine materials that are susceptible to corrosion with materials that reduce or eliminate the likelihood that corrosion will occur as a result of, for example, a galvanic reaction. These masks can be produced by vapor deposition, thin film sputtering, electro-depositing and other techniques amenable to batch processing.
  • a mask that has a pinhole aperture may be used to improve the depth of focus of a human eye.
  • presbyopia is a problem of the human eye that commonly occurs in older human adults wherein the ability to focus becomes limited to inadequate range.
  • FIGS. 1-6 illustrate how presbyopia interferes with the normal function of the eye and how a mask with a pinhole aperture mitigates the problem.
  • FIG. 1 shows the human eye
  • FIG. 2 is a side view of the eye 10 .
  • the eye 10 includes a cornea 12 and an intraocular lens 14 posterior to the cornea 12 .
  • the cornea 12 is a first focusing element of the eye 10 .
  • the intraocular lens 14 is a second focusing element of the eye 10 .
  • the eye 10 also includes a retina 16 , which lines the interior of the rear surface of the eye 10 .
  • the retina 16 includes the receptor cells which are primarily responsible for the sense of vision.
  • the retina 16 includes a highly sensitive region, known as the macula, where signals are received and transmitted to the visual centers of the brain via the optic nerve 18 .
  • the retina 16 also includes a point with particularly high sensitivity 20 , known as the fovea. As discussed in more detail in connection with FIG. 8 , the fovea 20 is slightly offset from the axis of symmetry of the eye 10 .
  • the eye 10 also includes a ring of pigmented tissue known as the iris 22 .
  • the iris 22 includes smooth muscle for controlling and regulating the size of an opening 24 in the iris 22 , which is known as the pupil.
  • An entrance pupil 26 is seen as the image of the iris 22 viewed through the cornea 12 (See FIG. 7 ). A central point of the entrance pupil 28 is illustrated in FIG. 7 and will be discussed further below.
  • the eye 10 resides in an eye-socket in the skull and is able to rotate therein about a center of rotation 30 .
  • FIG. 3 shows the transmission of light through the eye 10 of a presbyotic patient. Due to either an aberration in the cornea 12 or the intraocular lens 14 , or loss of muscle control, light rays 32 entering the eye 10 and passing through the cornea 12 and the intraocular lens 14 are refracted in such a way that the light rays 32 do not converge at a single focal point on the retina 16 .
  • FIG. 3 illustrates that in a presbyopic patient, the light rays 32 often converge at a point behind the retina 16 . As a result, the patient experiences blurred vision.
  • the mask 34 can be made by any suitable apparatus or method. Some advantageous methods form the mask 34 of a material that is at least partially opaque and very stable in the normal environment in which the mask 34 is deployed. For example, it is desired that the mask 34 be able to survive many years of exposure to ultraviolet (UV) light.
  • the mask is made of a UV stable material.
  • a variety of UV stable materials can be used to form the mask 34 .
  • the UV stable material has a high degree of biocompatibility because, as discussed below, the mask 34 is implanted in the eye 10 in some techniques.
  • the mask 34 is shown implanted in the cornea 12 in FIG. 4 .
  • the mask 34 can be, in various modes of application, implanted in the cornea 12 (as shown), used as a contact lens placed over the cornea 12 , incorporated in the intraocular lens 14 (including the patient's original lens or an implanted lens), or otherwise positioned on or in the eye 10 .
  • the light rays 32 that pass through the mask 34 , the cornea 12 , and the lens 14 converge at a single focal point on the retina 16 .
  • the light rays 32 that would not converge at the single point on retina 16 are blocked by the mask 34 .
  • the mask 34 preferably includes an annular region 36 surrounding a pinhole opening or aperture 38 substantially centrally located on the mask 34 .
  • the pinhole aperture 38 is generally located around a central axis 39 , referred to herein as the optical axis of the mask 34 .
  • the pinhole aperture 38 preferably is in the shape of a circle. It has been reported that a circular aperture, such as the aperture 38 may, in some patients, produce a so-called “halo effect” where the patient perceives a shimmering image around the object being viewed. Accordingly, it may be desirable to provide an aperture 38 in a shape that diminishes, reduces, or completely eliminates the so-called “halo effect.”
  • FIGS. 7-42 illustrate a variety of embodiments of masks that can improve the vision of a patient with presbyopia.
  • the masks described in connection with FIGS. 7-42 are similar to the mask 34 , except as set forth below. Accordingly, the masks described in connection with FIGS. 7-42 can be used and applied to the eye 10 of a patient in a similar fashion to the mask 34 . Also, like the mask 34 , the masks 7 - 42 can be formed by the processes disclosed in connection with FIGS. 67 a - 67 d and with variations of such processes.
  • FIG. 7 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 a that includes an aperture 38 a formed in the shape of a hexagon.
  • FIG. 8 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 b that includes an aperture 38 b formed in the shape of an octagon.
  • FIG. 9 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 c that includes an aperture 38 c formed in the shape of an oval
  • FIG. 10 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 d that includes an aperture 38 d formed in the shape of a pointed oval.
  • FIG. 11 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 e wherein the aperture 38 e is formed in the shape of a star or starburst.
  • FIGS. 12-14 illustrate further embodiments that have tear-drop shaped apertures.
  • FIG. 12 shows a mask 34 f that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 f that is located above the true center of the mask 34 f .
  • FIG. 13 shows a mask 34 g that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 g that is substantially centered in the mask 34 g .
  • FIG. 14 shows a mask 34 h that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 h that is below the true center of the mask 34 h .
  • FIGS. 12-14 illustrate that the position of aperture can be tailored, e.g., centered or off-center, to provide different effects.
  • an aperture that is located below the true center of a mask generally will allow more light to enter the eye because the upper portion of the aperture 34 will not be covered by the eyelid of the patient. Conversely, where the aperture is located above the true center of the mask, the aperture may be partially covered by the eyelid. Thus, the above-center aperture may permit less light to enter the eye.
  • FIG. 15 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 i that includes an aperture 38 i formed in the shape of a square.
  • FIG. 16 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 j that has a kidney-shaped aperture 38 j . It will be appreciated that the apertures shown in FIGS. 7-16 are merely exemplary of non-circular apertures. Other shapes and arrangements may also be provided and are within the scope of the present invention.
  • the mask 34 preferably has a constant thickness, as discussed below. However, in some embodiments, the thickness of the mask may vary between the inner periphery (near the aperture 38 ) and the outer periphery.
  • FIG. 17 shows a mask 34 k that has a gradually decreasing thickness from the inner periphery to the outer periphery.
  • FIG. 18 shows a mask 34 l that has a gradually increasing thickness from the inner periphery to the outer periphery.
  • Other cross-sectional profiles are also possible.
  • the annular region 36 is at least partially and preferably completely opaque.
  • the opacity of the annular region 36 prevents light from being transmitted through the mask 32 (as generally shown in FIG. 4 ).
  • Opacity of the annular region 36 may be achieved in any of several different ways.
  • the material used to make mask 34 may be naturally opaque.
  • the material used to make the mask 34 may be substantially clear, but treated with a dye or other pigmentation agent to render region 36 substantially or completely opaque.
  • the surface of the mask 34 may be treated physically or chemically (such as by etching) to alter the refractive and transmissive properties of the mask 34 and make it less transmissive to light.
  • the surface of the mask 34 may be treated with a particulate deposited thereon.
  • the surface of the mask 34 may be deposited with particulate of titanium, gold or carbon to provide opacity to the surface of the mask 34 .
  • the particulate may be encapsulated within the interior of the mask 34 , as generally shown in FIG. 19 .
  • the mask 34 may be patterned to provide areas of varying light transmissivity, as generally shown in FIGS. 24-33 , which are discussed in detail below.
  • FIG. 20 there is shown a mask 34 m formed or made of a woven fabric, such as a mesh of polyester fibers.
  • the mesh may be a cross-hatched mesh of fibers.
  • the mask 34 m includes an annular region 36 m surrounding an aperture 38 m .
  • the annular region 36 m comprises a plurality of generally regularly positioned apertures 36 m in the woven fabric that allow some light to pass through the mask 34 m .
  • the amount of light transmitted can be varied and controlled by, for example, moving the fibers closer together or farther apart, as desired. Fibers more densely distributed allow less light to pass through the annular region 36 m . Alternatively, the thickness of fibers can be varied to allow more or less light through the openings of the mesh. Making the fiber strands larger results in the openings being smaller.
  • FIG. 22 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 n that includes an annular region 36 n that has sub-regions with different opacities.
  • the opacity of the annular region 36 n may gradually and progressively increased or decreased, as desired.
  • FIG. 22 shows one embodiment where a first area 42 closest to an aperture 38 n has an opacity of approximately 60%.
  • a second area 44 which is outlying with respect to the first area 42 , has a greater opacity, such as 70%.
  • a third area 46 which is outlying with respect to the second area 42 , has an opacity of between 85 to 100%.
  • light blocking materials of the type described above in variable degrees may be selectively deposited on the surface of a mask to achieve a graduated opacity.
  • the mask may be formed from co-extruded rods made of material having different light transmissive properties.
  • the co-extruded rod may then be sliced to provide disks for a plurality of masks, such as those described herein.
  • FIGS. 24-33 show examples of masks that have been modified to provide regions of differing opacity.
  • FIG. 24 shows a mask 34 o that includes an aperture 38 o and a plurality of cutouts 48 in the pattern of radial spokes extending from near the aperture 38 o to an outer periphery 50 of the mask 34 o .
  • FIG. 24 shows that the cutouts 48 are much more densely distributed about a circumference of the mask near aperture 38 o than are the cutouts 48 about a circumference of the mask near the outer periphery 50 . Accordingly, more light passes through the mask 34 o nearer aperture 38 o than near the periphery 50 . The change in light transmission through the mask 34 o is gradual.
  • FIGS. 26-27 show another embodiment of a mask 34 p .
  • the mask 34 p includes an aperture 38 p and a plurality of circular cutouts 52 p , and a plurality of cutouts 54 p .
  • the circular cutouts 52 p are located proximate the aperture 38 p .
  • the cutouts 54 p are located between the circular cutouts 52 p and the periphery 50 p .
  • the density of the circular cutouts 52 p generally decreases from the near the aperture 38 p toward the periphery 50 p .
  • the periphery 50 p of the mask 34 p is scalloped by the presence of the cutouts 54 , which extend inward from the periphery 50 p , to allow some light to pass through the mask at the periphery 50 p.
  • FIGS. 28-29 show another embodiment similar to that of FIGS. 26-27 wherein a mask 34 q includes a plurality of circular cutouts 52 q and a plurality of cutouts 54 q .
  • the cutouts 54 q are disposed along the outside periphery 50 q of the mask 34 q , but not so as to provide a scalloped periphery.
  • FIGS. 30 and 31 illustrate an embodiment of a mask 34 r that includes an annular region 36 r that is patterned and an aperture 38 r that is non-circular.
  • the aperture 38 r is in the shape of a starburst.
  • Surrounding the aperture 38 r is a series of cutouts 54 r that are more densely spaced toward the aperture 38 r .
  • the mask 34 r includes an outer periphery 50 r that is scalloped to provide additional light transmission at the outer periphery 50 r.
  • FIGS. 32 and 33 show another embodiment of a mask 34 s that includes an annular region 36 s and an aperture 38 s .
  • the annular region 36 s is located between an outer periphery 50 s of the mask 34 s and the aperture 38 s .
  • the annular region 36 s is patterned.
  • a plurality of circular openings 56 s is distributed over the annular region 36 s of the mask 34 s . It will be appreciated that the density of the openings 56 s is greater near the aperture 38 s than near the periphery 50 s of the mask 34 s . As with the examples described above, this results in a gradual increase in the opacity of the mask 34 s from aperture 38 s to periphery 50 s.
  • FIGS. 34-36 show further embodiments.
  • FIG. 34 shows a mask 34 t that includes a first mask portion 58 t and a second mask portion 60 t .
  • the mask portions 58 t , 60 t are generally “C-shaped.”
  • the mask portions 58 t , 60 t are implanted or inserted such that the mask portions 58 t , 60 t define a pinhole or aperture 38 t.
  • FIG. 35 shows another embodiment wherein a mask 34 u includes two mask portions 58 u , 60 u .
  • Each mask portion 58 u , 60 u is in the shape of a half-moon and is configured to be implanted or inserted in such a way that the two halves define a central gap or opening 62 u , which permits light to pass therethrough.
  • opening 62 u is not a circular pinhole
  • the mask portions 58 u , 60 u in combination with the eyelid (shown as dashed line 64 ) of the patient provide a comparable pinhole effect.
  • FIG. 36 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 v that includes an aperture 38 v that is in the shape of a half-moon.
  • the mask 34 v may be implanted or inserted into a lower portion of the cornea 12 where, as described above, the combination of the mask 34 v and the eyelid 62 provides the pinhole effect.
  • the mask may be a gel-filled disk, as shown in FIG. 19 .
  • the gel may be a hydrogel or collagen, or other suitable material that is biocompatible with the mask material and can be introduced into the interior of the mask.
  • the gel within the mask may include particulate 66 suspended within the gel. Examples of suitable particulate are gold, titanium, and carbon particulate, which, as discussed above, may alternatively be deposited on the surface of the mask.
  • the material of the mask 34 may be any biocompatible polymeric material. Where a gel is used, the material is suitable for holding a gel. Examples of suitable materials for the mask 34 include the preferred polymethylmethacrylate or other suitable polymers, such as polycarbonates and the like. Of course, as indicated above, for non-gel-filled materials, a preferred material may be a fibrous material, such as a Dacron mesh. Additional techniques are discussed below whereby the masks discussed herein can be formed of processes that deposit metal layers.
  • the mask 34 may also be made to include a medicinal fluid, such as an antibiotic that can be selectively released after application, insertion, or implantation of the mask 34 into the eye of the patient. Release of an antibiotic after application, insertion, or implantation provides faster healing of the incision.
  • the mask 34 may also be coated with other desired drugs or antibiotics. For example, it is known that cholesterol deposits can build up on the eye. Accordingly, the mask 34 may be provided with a releasable cholesterol deterring drug. The drug may be coated on the surface of the mask 34 or, in an alternative embodiment, incorporated into the polymeric material (such as PMMA) from which the mask 34 is formed.
  • FIGS. 37 and 38 illustrate one embodiment where a mask 34 w comprises a plurality of nanites 68 .
  • “Nanites” are small particulate structures that have been adapted to selectively transmit or block light entering the eye of the patient. The particles may be of a very small size typical of the particles used in nanotechnology applications.
  • the nanites 68 are suspended in the gel or otherwise inserted into the interior of the mask 34 w , as generally shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 .
  • the nanites 68 can be preprogrammed to respond to different light environments.
  • the nanites 68 turn and position themselves to substantially and selectively block some of the light from entering the eye.
  • nanites may respond by turning or be otherwise positioned to allow more light to enter the eye, as shown in FIG. 38 .
  • Nano-devices or nanites are crystalline structures grown in laboratories.
  • the nanites may be treated such that they are receptive to different stimuli such as light.
  • the nanites can be imparted with energy where, in response to a low light and bright light environments, they rotate in the manner described above and generally shown in FIG. 38 .
  • Nanoscale devices and systems and their fabrication are described in Smith et al., “Nanofabrication,” Physics Today, February 1990, pp. 24-30 and in Craighead, “Nanoelectromechanical Systems,” Science, Nov. 24, 2000, Vol. 290, pp. 1532-1535, both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Tailoring the properties of small-sized particles for optical applications is disclosed in Chen et al. “Diffractive Phase Elements Based on Two-Dimensional Artificial Dielectrics,” Optics Letters, Jan. 15, 1995, Vol. 20, No. 2, pp. 121-123, also incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • FIG. 39 shows one embodiment of a mask 34 x that includes a bar code 70 or other printed indicia.
  • the masks described herein may be incorporated into the eye of a patient in different ways.
  • the mask 34 may be provided as a contact lens placed on the surface of the eyeball 10 .
  • the mask 34 may be incorporated in an artificial intraocular lens designed to replace the original lens 14 of the patient.
  • the mask 34 is provided as a corneal implant or inlay, where it is physically inserted between the layers of the cornea 12 .
  • the mask 34 When used as a corneal implant, layers of the cornea 12 are peeled away to allow insertion of the mask 34 .
  • the optical surgeon using a laser
  • the mask 34 is then inserted and the flap is placed back in its original position where, over time, it grows back and seals the eyeball.
  • the mask 34 is attached or fixed to the eye 10 by support strands 72 and 74 shown in FIG. 40 and generally described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,976,732, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • the surgeon may be required to remove additional corneal tissue.
  • the surgeon may use a laser to peel away additional layers of the cornea 12 to provide a pocket that will accommodate the mask 34 .
  • Application of the mask 34 to the cornea 12 of the eye 10 of a patient is described in greater detail in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C .
  • Removal of the mask 34 may be achieved by simply making an additional incision in the cornea 12 , lifting the flap and removing the mask 34 .
  • ablation techniques may be used to completely remove the mask 34 .
  • FIGS. 41 and 42 illustrate another embodiment of a mask 34 y that includes a coiled strand 80 of a fibrous or other material.
  • Strand 80 is coiled over itself to form the mask 34 y , which may therefore be described as a spiral-like mask.
  • This arrangement provides a pinhole or aperture 38 y substantially in the center of the mask 34 y .
  • the mask 34 y can be removed by a technician or surgeon who grasps the strand 80 with tweezers 82 through an opening made in a flap of the cornea 12 .
  • FIG. 42 shows this removal technique.
  • the various masks discussed herein can be used to improve the vision of a presbyopic patient as well as that of patients with other vision problems.
  • the masks discussed herein can be deployed in combination with a LASIK procedure, to eliminate the effects of abrasions, aberrations, and divots in the cornea. It is also believed that the masks disclosed herein can be used to treat patients suffering from macular degeneration, e.g., by directing light rays to unaffected portions of retina, thereby improving the vision of the patient. Whatever treatment is contemplated, more precise alignment of the central region of a mask with a pin-hole aperture with the visual axis of the patient is believed to provide greater clinical benefit to the patient.
  • Alignment of the central region of the pinhole aperture 38 , in particular, the optical axis 39 , of the mask 34 with the visual axis of the eye 10 may be achieved in a variety of ways. As discussed more fully below, such alignment may be achieved by imaging two reference targets at different distances and effecting movement of the patient's eye to a position where the images of the first and second reference targets appear aligned as viewed by the patient's eye. When the patient views the targets as being aligned, the patient's visual axis is located.
  • FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the eye 10 , similar to that shown in FIG. 1 , indicating a first axis 1000 and a second axis 1004 .
  • the first axis 1000 represents the visual axis, or line of sight, of the patient and the second axis 1004 indicates the axis of symmetry of the eye 10 .
  • the visual axis 1000 is an axis that connects the fovea 20 and a target 1008 .
  • the visual axis 1000 also extends through the central point 28 of the entrance pupil 26 .
  • the target 1008 is sometimes referred to herein as a “fixation point.”
  • the visual axis 1000 also corresponds to the chief ray of the bundle of rays emanating from the target 1008 that passes through the pupil 22 and reaches the fovea 20 .
  • the axis of symmetry 1004 is an axis passing through the central point 28 of the entrance pupil 26 and the center of rotation 30 of the eye 10 .
  • the cornea 12 is located at the front of the eye 10 and, along with the iris 22 , admits light into the eye 10 .
  • Light entering the eye 10 is focused by the combined imaging properties of the cornea 12 and the intraocular lens 14 (see FIGS. 2-3 ).
  • the image of the target 1008 is formed at the retina 16 .
  • the fovea 20 (the region of the retina 16 with particularly high resolution) is slightly off-set from the axis of symmetry 1004 of the eye 10 .
  • This visual axis 1000 is typically inclined at an angle ⁇ of about six (6) degrees to the axis of symmetry 1004 of the eye 10 for an eye with a centered iris.
  • FIGS. 44A and 44B illustrate single-target fixation methods for aligning an eye with an optical axis of an instrument also referred to herein as an “instrument axis.”
  • the eye 10 is shown looking into an aperture of a projection lens 1012 .
  • the lens aperture is shown as the entire lens 1012 .
  • the projection lens 1012 reimages a reference target 1016 at an infinite distance, producing a collimated beam 1020 .
  • the reference target 1016 in FIG. 44A is shown reimaged at an infinite distance, which is achieved by positioning the target object at a distance 1024 equal to the focal length f of the lens 1012 , i.e. the reference target 1016 is at the lens focal point.
  • FIG. 44A shows the eye 10 fixated on the reference target 1016 along a ray 1020 c , which appears to come from the reference target 1016 as imaged by the projection lens 1012 .
  • the eye 10 is here decentered a distance 1028 from an optical axis 1032 of the instrument, i.e., the instrument axis, which may be the central axis of the lens 1012 .
  • This decentration of the eye 10 with respect to the optical axis 1032 of the instrument does not affect fixation to an infinitely distant image because all rays projected by the lens 1012 are parallel.
  • an eye can be fixated on the target but still be off-center of the optical axis of the instrument.
  • FIG. 44B is similar to FIG. 44A , except that a reference target 1016 ′ is located somewhat closer to the projection lens 1012 than is the reference target 1016 so that an image 1036 of the reference target 1016 ′ appears at a large but finite distance 1040 behind the lens 1012 .
  • the eye 10 in FIG. 44B is fixated on the reference target 1016 ′ along a ray 1020 c ′, which is decentered a distance 1028 from an optical axis 1032 of the instrument.
  • a decentered eye fixated on a finite-distance target is not merely off-center but is also angularly offset from the optical axis 1032 of the instrument.
  • FIG. 45A shows one embodiment of a projection lens 1012 used to create an optical image at infinite distance, as was schematically shown in FIG. 44A .
  • the reference target 1016 typically is a back-illuminated pattern on a transparent glass reticle 1044 .
  • the reference target 1016 is located at a distance 1024 on the lens' optical axis 1032 at the lens' focal point, i.e. the reference target 1016 is located such that the distance 1024 is equal to the distance f.
  • a diffusing plate 1048 and a condensing lens 1052 are used to ensure full illumination of the reference target 1016 throughout the aperture of the projection lens 1012 .
  • Light rays projected by the projection lens 1012 are substantially parallel depending upon the degree of imaging perfection achieved in the optical system. Assuming a well-corrected lens with small aberrations, the image as observed through the aperture of the projection lens 1012 will appear to be at infinity.
  • FIG. 45B shows a somewhat different optical system in which a target 1016 ′ is projected so that an image 1036 appears at a large but finite distance 1040 behind the lens 1012 , as was shown schematically in FIG. 44B .
  • the diffusing plate 1048 and the condensing lens 1052 again are used to ensure that full illumination of the target reference 112 ′ is achieved throughout the aperture of the projection lens 1012 .
  • the reference target 1016 ′ is located at an object distance 1024 ′, which is inside the focal point in accordance with the aforementioned Gaussian equation.
  • the object distance 1024 ′ is a distance that is less than the focal length f of the lens 1012 ′.
  • the path of a typical light ray 1056 from the center of the reference target 1016 ′ is shown. If the eye 10 is aligned with this ray 1056 , the reference target 1016 is observed as if it were located at the location of the image 1036 , i.e. at a finite distance. The ray 1056 would then be similar to ray 1020 c ′ of FIG. 44B , and fixation of the eye 10 could be established as appropriate for the given degree of decentration from the optical axis 1032 .
  • FIG. 46 illustrates a fixation method whereby the single-target fixation methods shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B are both used simultaneously in a dual-target fixation system.
  • the eye 10 With two fixation targets 1016 and 1016 ′ at different distances, the eye 10 will see angular disparity (parallax) between the target images (i.e., they will not appear to be superimposed) if the eye is decentered.
  • the rays 1020 a to 1020 g of the infinite-distance target 1016 are parallel to one another, while the rays 1020 a ′ to 1020 g ′ of the finite distance target 1016 ′ diverge.
  • the only rays of the targets that coincide are rays 1020 d and 10204 d ′, which are collinear along the optical axis 1032 of the instrument.
  • the eye 10 can be simultaneously fixated on both targets if the visual axis, represented by the first axis 1000 of the eye 10 , is centered on the optical axis of the instrument, i.e. along the ray 1020 d (which is the same as 1020 d ′).
  • both images are fixated.
  • FIG. 47 shows schematically an apparatus with which two reticle patterns could be projected simultaneously by the same projection lens to provide fixation targets 1016 and 1016 ′ at a large distance 1024 (such as infinity) and a shorter (finite) distance 1024 ′. It is preferable that both fixation targets are at relatively large distances so that only slight focus accommodation of the eye 10 is required to compensate for these different distances.
  • a visual event e.g., angular displacement (parallax) between the images is minimized
  • alignment of the eye 10 with the optical axis 1032 of the apparatus is facilitated.
  • Providing two fixation targets at different apparent distances will simplify accurate alignment of the sighted eye with an ophthalmic apparatus in the surgical procedures disclosed herein and in other similar surgical procedures.
  • FIG. 48 shows another embodiment of an apparatus for combining two fixation targets 1016 and 1016 ′ to project them simultaneously at different axial distances.
  • a beamsplitter plate or cube 1060 is inserted between the patterns and the projection lens 1012 so each pattern can be illuminated independently.
  • the targets 1016 , 1016 ′ can be opaque lines seen against a light background, bright lines seen against a dark background, or a combination of these forms.
  • FIG. 49A shows an example of a typical dual pattern as viewed by the patient when the patterns are aligned, i.e. when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the apparatus.
  • the dual pattern set in this embodiment comprises an opaque fine-line cross 1064 seen against a broader bright cross 1068 .
  • FIG. 49B shows the same dual pattern set as shown in FIG. 49A , except the patterns are offset, indicating that the eye 10 is decentered with respect to the optical axis of the associated optical instrument.
  • FIG. 50A shows an example of another dual pattern as viewed by the patient when the patterns are aligned, i.e. when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the ophthalmic instrument.
  • the dual pattern set in this embodiment comprises an opaque circle 1072 seen against a bright circle 1076 .
  • the circle 1072 has a diameter that is greater than the diameter of the circle 1076 .
  • FIG. 50B shows the same dual pattern set as shown in FIG. 50A , except the patterns are offset, indicating that the eye 10 is decentered with respect the optical axis of the associated optical instrument. It is not necessary that the targets appear as crosses or circles; patterns such as dots, squares, and other shapes and patterns also can suffice.
  • color is used to indicate when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the apparatus.
  • a dual color set can be provided.
  • the dual color set may comprise a first region of a first color and a second region of a second color.
  • the patient visual axis is located when the first color and the second color are in a particular position relative to each other. This may cause a desired visual effect to the patient's eye, e.g., when the first region of the first color is aligned with the second region of the second color, the patient may observe a region of a third color. For example, if the first region is colored blue and the second region is colored yellow, the patient will see a region of green. Additional details concerning locating a patient's visual axis or line of sight are contained in U.S. Pat. No. 5,474,548, issued Dec. 12, 1995, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • FIG. 51 shows one embodiment of an ophthalmic instrument 1200 that can be used in connection with various methods described herein to locate the visual axis of a patient.
  • the instrument 1200 includes an optics housing 1202 and a patient locating fixture 1204 that is coupled with the optics housing 1202 .
  • the optics housing 1202 includes an optical system 1206 that is configured to project two reticle patterns simultaneously to provide fixation targets at a large distance, e.g., infinity, and a shorter, finite distance.
  • the optical system 1206 of the instrument includes a first reference target 1208 , a second reference target 1210 , and a projection lens 1212 .
  • the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 are imaged by the projection lens 1212 along an instrument axis 1213 , of the ophthalmic instrument 1200 .
  • the first reference target 1208 is formed on a first glass reticle 1214 located a first distance 1216 from the lens 1212 and the second target 1210 is formed on a second glass reticle 1218 located a second distance 1220 from the lens 1212 .
  • the second distance 1220 is equal to the focal length f of the lens 1212 , as was discussed in connection with FIG. 44A .
  • positioning the second target 1210 at the focal length f of the lens 1212 causes the second target 1210 to be imaged at an infinite distance from the lens 1212 .
  • the first distance 1216 preferably is less than the second distance 1220 .
  • the first reference target 1208 is thereby imaged at a large but finite distance from the lens 1212 .
  • the optical system 1206 preferably also includes a light source 1222 that marks the visual axis of the patient after the visual axis has been located in the manner described above.
  • the light source 1222 is positioned separately from the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 .
  • the light source 1222 is positioned at a ninety degree angle to the instrument axis 1213 and is configured to direct light toward the axis 1213 .
  • a beamsplitter plate or cube 1224 is provided between the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 and the patient to route light rays emitted by the light source 1222 to the eye of the patient.
  • the beamsplitter 1224 is an optical component that reflects light rays from the direction of the light source 1222 , but permits the light rays to pass through the beamsplitter along the instrument axis 1213 .
  • light rays form the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 and from the light source 1222 may be propagated toward the eye of the patient.
  • the beamsplitter 1224 could be replaced with a mirror that is movable into and out of the instrument axis 1213 to alternately reflect light from the light source 1222 to the eye or to permit light from the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 to reach the eye.
  • the patient locating fixture 1204 includes an elongate spacer 1232 and a contoured locating pad 1234 .
  • the contoured locating pad 1234 defines an aperture through which the patient may look along the instrument axis 213 .
  • the spacer 1232 is coupled with the optics housing 1202 and extends a distance 1236 between the housing 1202 and the contoured locating pad 1234 .
  • the spacer 1232 defines a lumen 1238 that extends between the contoured locating pads 1234 and the optics housing 1202 .
  • the magnitude of the distance 1236 may be selected to increase the certainty of the location of the patient's visual axis. In some embodiments, it is sufficient that the distance 1236 be a relatively fixed distance.
  • the patient's head When the alignment apparatus 1200 is used, the patient's head is brought into contact with the contoured locating pad 1234 , which locates the patient's eye 10 in the aperture at a fixed distance from the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 .
  • the patient may move the eye 10 as discussed above, to locate the visual axis.
  • the light source 1222 After locating the visual axis, the light source 1222 is engaged to emit light toward the eye 10 , e.g., as reflected by the beamsplitter 1224 .
  • the light emitted by the light source 1222 is reflected by the beamsplitter 1224 along the instrument axis 1213 toward the patient's eye 10 . Because the visual axis of the eye 10 was previously aligned with the instrument axis 1213 , the light from the light source 1222 reflected by the beamsplitter 1224 is also aligned with the visual axis of the eye 10 .
  • the reflected light provides a visual marker of the location of the patient's visual axis.
  • the marking function of the light source 1222 is particularly useful in connection with the methods, described below, of applying a mask. Additional embodiments of ophthalmic instruments embodying this technique are described below in connection with FIGS. 55-59 .
  • FIG. 52 shows an exemplary process for screening a patient interested in increasing his or her depth of focus.
  • the process begins at step 1300 , in which the patient is fitted with soft contact lenses, e.g., a soft contact lens is placed in each of the patient's eyes. If needed, the soft contact lenses may include vision correction.
  • the visual axis of each of the patient's eyes is located as described above.
  • a mask such as any of those described above, is placed on the soft contact lenses such that the optical axis of the aperture of the mask is aligned with the visual axis of the eye. In this position, the mask will be located generally concentric with the patient's pupil.
  • the curvature of the mask should parallel the curvature of the patient's cornea.
  • the process continues at a step 1330 , in which the patient is fitted with a second set of soft contact lenses, i.e., a second soft contact lens is placed over the mask in each of the patient's eyes. The second contact lens holds the mask in a substantially constant position.
  • the patient's vision is tested. During testing, it is advisable to check the positioning of the mask to ensure that the optical axis of the aperture of the mask is substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. Further details of testing are set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 6,554,424, issued Apr. 29, 2003, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • a mask is surgically implanted into the eye of a patient interested in increasing his or her depth of focus.
  • a patient may suffer from presbyopia, as discussed above.
  • the mask may be a mask as described herein, similar to those described in the prior art, or a mask combining one or more of these properties.
  • the mask may be configured to correct visual aberrations.
  • the mask may be pre-rolled or folded for ease of implantation.
  • the mask may be implanted in several locations.
  • the mask may be implanted underneath the cornea's epithelium sheet, beneath the cornea's Bowman membrane, in the top layer of the cornea's stroma, or in the cornea's stroma.
  • the mask When the mask is placed underneath the cornea's epithelium sheet, removal of the mask requires little more than removal of the cornea's epithelium sheet.
  • FIGS. 53 a through 53 c show a mask 1400 inserted underneath an epithelium sheet 1410 .
  • the surgeon first removes the epithelium sheet 1410 .
  • the epithelium sheet 1410 may be rolled back.
  • the surgeon creates a depression 1415 in a Bowman's membrane 420 corresponding to the visual axis of the eye.
  • the visual axis of the eye may be located as described above and may be marked by use of the alignment apparatus 1200 or other similar apparatus.
  • the depression 1415 should be of sufficient depth and width to both expose the top layer 1430 of the stroma 1440 and to accommodate the mask 1400 .
  • the mask 1400 is then placed in the depression 1415 . Because the depression 1415 is located in a position to correspond to the visual axis of the patient's eye, the central axis of the pinhole aperture of the mask 1400 will be substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. This will provide the greatest improvement in vision possible with the mask 1400 .
  • the epithelium sheet 1410 is placed over the mask 1400 . Over time, as shown in FIG. 53 c , the epithelium sheet 1410 will grow and adhere to the top layer 1430 of the stroma 1440 , as well as the mask 1400 depending, of course, on the composition of the mask 1400 . As needed, a contact lens may be placed over the incised cornea to protect the mask.
  • FIGS. 54 a through 54 c show a mask 1500 inserted beneath a Bowman's membrane 1520 of an eye.
  • the surgeon first hinges open the Bowman's membrane 1520 .
  • the surgeon creates a depression 1515 in a top layer 1530 of a stroma 1540 corresponding to the visual axis of the eye.
  • the visual axis of the eye may be located as described above and may be marked by using the alignment apparatus 1200 or other similar apparatus.
  • the depression 1515 should be of sufficient depth and width to accommodate the mask 1500 .
  • the mask 1500 is placed in the depression 1515 .
  • the central axis of the pinhole aperture of the mask 1500 will be substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. This will provide the greatest improvement in vision possible with the mask 1500 .
  • the Bowman's membrane 1520 is placed over the mask 1500 . Over time, as shown in FIG. 54 c , the epithelium sheet 1510 will grow over the incised area of the Bowman's membrane 1520 . As needed, a contact lens may be placed over the incised cornea to protect the mask.
  • a mask of sufficient thinness i.e., less than substantially 20 microns, may be placed underneath epithelium sheet 1410 .
  • an optic mark having a thickness less than about 20 microns may be placed beneath Bowman's membrane 1520 without creating a depression in the top layer of the stroma.
  • the mask may be threaded into a channel created in the top layer of the stroma.
  • a curved channeling tool creates a channel in the top layer of the stroma, the channel being in a plane parallel to the surface of the cornea.
  • the channel is formed in a position corresponding to the visual axis of the eye.
  • the channeling tool either pierces the surface of the cornea or, in the alternative, is inserted via a small superficial radial incision.
  • a laser focusing an ablative beam may create the channel in the top layer of the stroma.
  • the mask may be a single segment with a break, or it may be two or more segments.
  • the mask in this embodiment is positioned in the channel and is thereby located so that the central axis of the pinhole aperture formed by the mask is substantially collinear with the patient's visual axis to provide the greatest improvement in the patient's depth of focus.
  • the mask may be injected into the top layer of the stroma.
  • an injection tool with a stop penetrates the surface of the cornea to the specified depth.
  • the injection tool may be a ring of needles capable of producing a mask with a single injection.
  • a channel may first be created in the top layer of the stroma in a position corresponding to the visual axis of the patient. Then, the injector tool may inject the mask into the channel.
  • the mask may be a pigment, or it may be pieces of pigmented material suspended in a bio-compatible medium.
  • the pigment material may be made of a polymer or, in the alternative, made of a suture material.
  • the mask injected into the channel is thereby positioned so that the central axis of the pinhole aperture formed by the pigment material is substantially collinear with the visual axis of the patient.
  • the mask may be placed beneath the corneal flap created during keratectomy, when the outermost 20% of the cornea is hinged open.
  • a mask placed beneath the corneal flap created during keratectomy should be substantially aligned with the patient's visual axis, as discussed above, for greatest effect.
  • the mask may be aligned with the patient's visual axis and placed in a pocket created in the cornea's stroma.
  • FIG. 55 shows a surgical system 2000 that employs dual target fixation in a manner similar to that discussed above in connection with FIGS. 43-51 .
  • the surgical system 2000 enables the identification of a unique feature of a patient's eye in connection with a surgical procedure.
  • the surgical system 2000 is similar to the ophthalmic instrument 1200 except as set forth below.
  • the surgical system 2000 is configured to align an axis of the patient's eye, e.g., the patient's line of sight (sometimes referred to herein as the “visual axis”), with an axis of the system 2000 .
  • the axis of the system 2000 may be a viewing axis along which the patient may direct an eye. As discussed above, such alignment is particularly useful in many surgical procedures, including those that benefit from precise knowledge of the location of one or more structures or features of the eye on which the procedures is being performed.
  • the surgical system 2000 includes a surgical viewing device 2004 and an alignment device 2008 .
  • the surgical viewing device 2004 includes a surgical microscope.
  • the surgical viewing device 2004 may be any device or combination of devices that enables a surgeon to visualize the surgical site with sufficient clarity or that enhances the surgeon's visualization of the surgical site. A surgeon also may elect to use the alignment device 2004 without a viewing device.
  • the surgical system 2000 preferably also includes a fixture configured to conveniently mount one or more components to the surgical viewing device 2004 .
  • the alignment device 2008 includes an alignment module 2020 , a marking module 2024 , and an image capture module 2028 .
  • the marking module 2024 is eliminated. Where the marking module 2024 is eliminated, one or more of its functions may be performed by the image capture module 2028 . In another embodiment, the image capture module 2028 is eliminated.
  • the alignment device 2004 preferably also has a control device 2032 that directs one or more components of the alignment device 2004 . As discussed more fully below, the control device 2032 includes a computer 2036 and signal lines 2040 a , 2040 b , and a trigger 2042 in one embodiment.
  • the alignment module 2020 includes components that enable a patient to align a feature related to the patient's eye, vision, or sense of sight with an instrument axis, e.g., an axis of the alignment device 2008 .
  • the alignment module 2020 includes a plurality of targets (e.g., two targets) that are located on the instrument axis.
  • the alignment module 2020 includes a first target 2056 and a second target 2060 .
  • the alignment module 2020 may be employed to align the patient's line-of-sight with an axis 2052 that extends perpendicular to the faces of the targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the alignment device 2008 could be configured such that the patient is positioned relative thereto so that the eye is positioned along the axis 2052 , it may be more convenient to position the patient such that an eye 2064 of the patient is not on the axis 2052 .
  • the patient may be positioned a distance 2068 from the axis 2052 .
  • FIG. 55 shows that the gaze of the patient's eye 2064 is directed generally along a patient viewing axis 2072 .
  • the alignment device 2008 is configured such that the patient viewing axis 2072 is at about a ninety degree angle with respect to the instrument axis 2052 .
  • a path 2076 optically connecting the targets 2056 , 2060 with the patient's eye 2064 extends partially along the axis 2052 and partially along the patient viewing axis 2072 .
  • the optical path 2076 defines the path along which the images of the targets 2056 , 2060 are cast when the alignment device 2008 is configured such that the patient's eye 2064 is not on the axis 2052 .
  • the alignment device 2008 includes a beamsplitter 2080 located on the axis 2052 to direct along the patient viewing axis 2072 light rays coming toward the beamsplitter 2080 from the direction of the targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • at least a portion of the optical path 2076 is defined from the patient's eye 2064 to the beamsplitter 2080 and from the beamsplitter 2080 to the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the alignment device 2008 is configured to enable the patient viewing axis 2072 to be at about a ninety degree angle with respect to the axis 2052 , other angles are possible and may be employed as desired.
  • the arrangement of FIG. 55 is convenient because it enables a surgeon to be directly above and relatively close to the patient if the patient is positioned on his or her back on an operating table.
  • the first target 2056 is on the axis 2052 and on the optical path 2076 between the second target 2060 and the patient's eye 2064 . More particularly, light rays that are directed from the second target 2060 intersect the first target 2056 and are thereafter directed toward the beamsplitter 2080 . As discussed more fully below, the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 are configured to project a suitable pattern toward the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the patient interacts with the projected images of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 to align the line-of-sight (or other unique anatomical feature) of the patient's eye 2064 or of the patient's sense of vision with an axis of the instrument, such as the axis 2052 , the viewing axis 2072 , or the optical path 2076 .
  • the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 may take any suitable form.
  • the targets 2056 , 2060 may be similar to those hereinbefore described.
  • the targets 2056 , 2060 may be formed on separate reticles or as part of a single alignment target.
  • at least one of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 includes a glass reticle with a pattern formed thereon.
  • the pattern on the first target 2056 and the pattern on the second target 2060 may be linear patterns that are combined to form a third linear pattern when the patient's line-of-sight is aligned with the axis 2052 or optical path 2076 .
  • FIGS. 55A-55C shows one embodiment of an alignment target 2081 .
  • the alignment target 2081 can be formed of glass or another substantially transparent medium.
  • the alignment target 2081 includes a first surface 2082 and a second surface 2083 .
  • the first and second surfaces 2082 , 2083 are separated by a distance 2084 .
  • the distance 2084 is selected to provide sufficient separation between the first and second surfaces 2082 , 2083 to facilitate alignment by the patient by any of the methods described herein.
  • the alignment target 2081 includes a first pattern 2085 that may comprise a linear pattern formed on the first surface 2082 and a second pattern 2086 that may comprise a linear pattern formed on the second surface 2083 .
  • the first and second patterns 2085 , 2086 are selected so that when the patient's line-of-sight is properly aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008 , the first and second patterns 2085 , 2086 form a selected pattern (as in FIG. 55B ) but when the patient's line-of-sight is properly aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008 , the first and second patterns 2085 , 2086 do not form the selected pattern (as in FIG. 55C ).
  • the first and second pattern 2085 , 2086 each are generally L-shaped. When aligned, the first and second patterns 2085 , 2086 form a cross. When not aligned, a gap is formed between the patterns and they appear as an L and an inverted L. This arrangement advantageously exploits vernier acuity, which is the ability of the eye to keenly detect misalignment of displaced lines. Any other combination of non-linear or linear patterns (e.g., other linear patterns that exploit vernier acuity) can be used as targets, as discussed above.
  • the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 may be made visible to the patient's eye 2064 in any suitable manner.
  • a target illuminator 2090 may be provided to make the targets 2056 , 2060 visible to the eye 2064 .
  • the target illuminator 2090 is a source of radiant energy, such as a light source.
  • the light source can be any suitable light source, such as an incandescent light, a fluorescent light, one or more light emitting diodes, or any other source of light to illuminate the targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the alignment module 2020 also may include one or more optic elements, such as lenses, that relatively sharply focus the images projected from the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 to present sharp images to the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the focal length of the optic element or system of optical elements may be located at any suitable location, e.g., at the first or second targets 2056 , 2060 , between the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 in front of the first target 2056 , or behind the second target 2060 .
  • the focal length is the distance from a location (e.g., the location of an optic element) to the plane at which the optic element focuses the target images projected from the first and second target 2056 , 2060 .
  • FIG. 55 shows a series of arrows that indicate the projection of the images of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 to the patient's eye 2064 .
  • an arrow 2094 indicates the direction of light cast by the target illuminator 2090 along the axis 2052 toward the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the light strikes the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 and is absorbed by or passed through the targets to cast an image of the targets 2056 , 2060 along the axis 2052 in a direction indicated by an arrow 2098 .
  • FIG. 55 shows a series of arrows that indicate the projection of the images of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 to the patient's eye 2064 .
  • an arrow 2094 indicates the direction of light cast by the target illuminator 2090 along the axis 2052 toward the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the light strikes the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 and is absorbed by or passed through the
  • the image of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 intersects a beamsplitter 2102 that forms a part of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 .
  • the beamsplitter 2102 is configured to transmit the majority of the light conveying the images of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 toward the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by an arrow 2106 .
  • the beamsplitter 2102 will be discussed in greater detail below.
  • the light is thereafter reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 along the patient viewing axis 2072 and toward the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the beamsplitter 2080 transmits some of the incident light beyond the beamsplitter 2080 along the axis 2050 . In one embodiment, 70 percent of the light incident on the beamsplitter 2080 is reflected toward the patient's eye 2064 and 30 percent is transmitter.
  • the beamsplitter 2080 can be configured to transmit and reflect in any suitable fraction.
  • the patient may interact with those images to align a feature of the patient's eye 2064 with an axis of the alignment device 2008 .
  • the patient aligns the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 with the patient viewing axis 2072 of the alignment device 2008 .
  • the patient is positioned such that the optical path 2076 intersects the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the patient is instructed to focus on the first target 2056 .
  • Motion is provided between the patient's eye 2064 and the optical path 2076 (and therefore between the patient's eye 2064 and the targets 2056 , 2060 ).
  • the relative motion between the patient's eye 2064 and the targets 2056 , 2060 may be provided by the patient moving his or her head with respect to the patient viewing axis 2072 .
  • the patient may be enabled to move all or a portion of the surgical system 2000 while the patient remains stationary.
  • the line-of-sight of the patient is aligned with the patient viewing axis 2072 , the optical path 2076 , and the axis 2052 of the alignment module 2020 .
  • one or both of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 may be included to assist the surgeon in placing a mask after the eye 2064 has been aligned. At least one of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 may be used to correlate the line-of-sight of the patient's eye 2064 , which is not otherwise visible, with a visual cue, such as a visible physical feature of the patient's eye, a marker projected onto the eye or an image of the eye, or a virtual image of a marker visible to the surgeon, or any combination of the foregoing. As is discussed in more detail below, the virtual image may be an image that is directed toward the surgeon's eye that appears from the surgeon's point of view to be on the eye 2064 at a pre-selected location.
  • the marking module 2024 is configured to produce an image, sometimes referred to herein as a “marking image”, that is visible to the surgeon and that is assists the surgeon in placing a mask or performing another surgical procedure after the line of sight of the eye 2064 has been located.
  • the marking module 2024 of the alignment device 2008 shown includes a marking target 2120 and a marking target illuminator 2124 .
  • the marking target illuminator 2124 preferably is a source of light, such as any of those discussed above in connection with the target illuminator 2090 .
  • FIG. 55 shows that in one embodiment, the marking target 2120 is a structure configured to produce a marking image when light is projected onto the marking target 2120 .
  • the marking target 2120 may be similar to the targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the marking target 2120 is a glass reticle with a suitable geometrical pattern formed thereon.
  • the pattern formed on the marking target 2120 may be a clear two dimensional shape that is surrounded by one or more opaque regions. For example, a clear annulus of selected width surrounded by opaque regions could be provided.
  • the marking target 2120 may be a glass reticle with an opaque two dimensional shape surrounded by substantially clear regions.
  • the marking target 2120 need not be made of glass and need not have a fixed pattern.
  • the marking target 2120 may be located in any suitable location with respect to the beamsplitter 2080 or the alignment device 2008 as discussed below.
  • FIG. 55 shows that in one embodiment, the marking image is generated in a manner similar to the manner in which the images of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 are generated.
  • the marking target 2124 and the marking target illuminator 2124 cooperate to produce, generate, or project the marking image along a marking image axis 2128 .
  • the marking image is conveyed by light along the axis 2128 .
  • the marking target illuminator 2124 casts light toward the marking target 2120 in a direction indicated by an arrow 2132 .
  • the marking target 2120 interacts with the light cast by the marking target illuminator 2124 , e.g., by at least one of transmitting, absorbing, filtering, and attenuating at least a portion of the light.
  • An arrow 2136 indicates the direction along which the marking image generated by the interaction of the marking target illuminator 2124 and the marking target 2120 is conveyed.
  • the marking image preferably is conveyed along the marking axis 2128 .
  • the marking target 2120 is located off of the axis 2052 and the image of the marking target initially is cast in a direction generally perpendicular to the axis 2052 .
  • a beamsplitter 2140 is positioned on the marking axis 2128 in the embodiment of FIG. 55 .
  • the beamsplitter 2140 is configured to be substantially transparent to light being transmitted along the marking axis 2128 from the direction of the marking target 2120 .
  • the light conveying the marking image is substantially entirely transmitted beyond the beamsplitter 2140 along the marking axis 2128 toward the axis 2052 as indicated by an arrow 2144 .
  • the beamsplitter 2140 generally does not affect the marking image.
  • a surface of the beamsplitter 2102 that faces the marking target 2120 is reflective to light.
  • the light conveying the marking image is reflected and thereafter is conveyed along the axis 2052 as indicated by the arrow 2106 .
  • the surface of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the beamsplitter 2102 also is reflective to at least some light (e.g., 70 percent of the incident light, as discussed above).
  • the light conveying the marking image is reflected and thereafter is conveyed along the patient viewing axis 2072 toward the patient's eye 2064 as indicated by the arrow 2148 .
  • a marking image projected from the marking target 2120 may be projected onto the patient's eye 2064 .
  • projecting the marking image onto the patient's eye 2064 may assist the surgeon in accurately placing a mask.
  • the surgeon may be assisted in that the location of line-of-sight of the patient's eye (or some other generally invisible feature of the eye 2064 ) is correlated with a visible feature of the eye, such as the iris or other anatomical feature.
  • the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a diameter that is greater than the size of the inner periphery of the iris under surgical conditions (e.g., the prevailing light and the state of dilation of the patient's eye 2064 ).
  • the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a diameter that is less than the size of the outer periphery of the iris under surgical conditions (e.g., light and dilation of the eye 2064 ).
  • the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a size that is correlated to another feature of the eye 2064 , e.g., the limbus of the eye.
  • a marking module in one embodiment, includes a secondary marking module.
  • the secondary marking module is not routed through the optics of associated with the alignment device 2008 . Rather, the secondary marking module is coupled with the alignment device 2008 .
  • the secondary marking module includes a source of radiant energy, e.g., a laser or light source similar to any of these discussed herein.
  • the source of radiant energy is configured to direct a plurality of spots (e.g., two, three, four, or more than four spots) onto the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the spots preferably are small, bright spots.
  • the spots indicate positions on the eye 2064 that correlate with a feature of a mask, such as an edge of a mask, when the mask is in the correct position with respect to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 .
  • the spots can be aligned with the projected marking target such that they hit at a selected location on the projected marking target (e.g., circumferentially spaced locations on the inner edge, on the outer edge, or on both the inner and outer edges).
  • the marking module may give a visual cue as to the proper positioning of a mask that is correlated to the location of the line-of-sight without passing through the optics of the alignment device.
  • the visual cue of the secondary marking module may be coordinated with the marking image of the marking module 2024 in some embodiments.
  • a visual cue generated for the benefit of the surgeon e.g., the reflection of the image of the marking target 2120
  • this is due to the generally poor reflection of marking images off of the cornea. Where reflection of the marking image off of the cornea is poor, the reflection of the image may be quite dim.
  • the cornea is an off-center aspherical structure, so the corneal reflection (purkinje images) may be offset from the location of the intersection of the visual axis and the corneal surface as viewed by the surgeon.
  • One technique for increasing the visibility of a visual cue involves applying a substance to the eye that can react with the projected image of the marking target 2120 .
  • a dye such as fluorescein dye
  • the marking target illuminator 2124 may be activated to cause an image of the marking target 2120 to be projected onto the eye, as discussed above.
  • the marking target illuminator 2124 is configured to project light from all or a discrete portion of the visible spectrum of electromagnetic radiant energy, e.g., the wavelengths corresponding to blue light, to project the image of the marking target 2120 onto the eye 2064 .
  • the projected image interacts with the dye and causes the image of the marking target 2120 to be illuminated on the surface of the cornea.
  • the presence of the dye greatly increases the visibility of the image of the marking target. For example, where the marking target 2120 is a ring, a bright ring will be visible to the surgeon because the light causes the dye to fluoresce.
  • This technique substantially eliminates errors in placement of a mask due to the presence of the purkinje images and may generally increase the brightness of the image of the marking target 2120 .
  • a drape is placed over the cornea.
  • the drape may have any suitable configuration.
  • the drape may be a relatively thin structure that will substantially conform to the anterior structure of the eye.
  • the drape may be formed in a manner similar to the formation of a conventional contact lens.
  • the drape is a contact lens.
  • the visual cue enhancing device preferably has suitable reflecting properties.
  • the visual cue enhancing device diffusely reflects the light projecting the image of the marking target 2120 onto the cornea.
  • the visual cue enhancing device is configured to interact with a discrete portion of the visible spectrum of electromagnetic radiant energy, e.g., the wavelengths thereof corresponding to blue light.
  • the alignment device 2008 shown in FIG. 55 also includes an image capture module 2028 .
  • the image capture module 2028 of the surgical system 2000 is capable of capturing one or more images of the patient's eye 2064 to assist the surgeon in performing surgical procedures on the eye 2064 .
  • the image capture module 2028 preferably includes a device to capture an image, such as a camera 2200 and a display device 2204 to display an image.
  • the display device 2204 may be a liquid crystal display.
  • the image capture module 2028 may be controlled in part by the control device 2032 of the surgical system 2000 .
  • the computer 2036 may be employed to process images captured by the camera 2200 and to convey an image to the display device 2204 where it is made visible to the surgeon.
  • the computer 2036 may also direct the operation of or be responsive to at least one of the camera 2200 , the display device 2204 , the trigger 2042 , and any other component of the image capture module 2028 .
  • the camera 2200 can be any suitable camera.
  • One type of camera that can be used is a charge-coupled device camera, referred to herein as a CCD camera.
  • One type of CCD camera incorporates a silicon chip, the surface of which includes light-sensitive pixels. When light, e.g., a photon or light particle, hits a pixel, an electric charge is registered at the pixels that can be detected. Images of sufficient resolution can be generated with a large array of sensitive pixels.
  • one advantageous embodiment provides precise alignment of a selected pixel (e.g., one in the exact geometric center of the display device 2204 ) with the axis 2052 . When such alignment is provided, the marking module may not be needed to align a mask with the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 .
  • an image captured by the camera 2200 aids the surgeon attempting to align a mask, such as any of the masks described herein, with the eye 2064 .
  • the image capture module 2028 is configured to capture an image of one or more physical attributes of the eye 2064 , the location of which may be adequately correlated to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 .
  • the image of the patient's iris may be directed along the patient viewing axis 2072 to the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by the arrow 2148 .
  • a side of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the beamsplitter 2080 is reflective to light transmitted from the eye 2064 .
  • the beamsplitter 2080 is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 and is conveyed along the axis 2052 toward the beamsplitter 2102 , as indicated by the arrow 2106 .
  • the surface of the beamsplitter 2102 facing the beamsplitter 2080 is reflective to light.
  • substantially all of the light conveying the image of the iris is reflected by the beamsplitter 2102 and is conveyed along the marking axis 2128 toward the beamsplitter 2140 , as indicated by the arrow 2144 .
  • the surface of the beamsplitter 2140 facing the beamsplitter 2102 and the camera 2200 is reflective to light.
  • substantially all of the light conveying the image of the iris is reflected along an image capture axis 2212 that extends between the beamsplitter 2140 and the camera 2200 .
  • the light is conveyed along an image capture axis 2212 as indicated by an arrow 2216 .
  • the image captured by the camera 2200 is conveyed to the computer 2036 by way of a signal line 2040 a .
  • the computer 2036 processes the signal in a suitable manner and generates signals to be conveyed along a signal line 2040 b to the display device 2204 .
  • Any suitable signal line and computer or other signal processing device can be used to convey signals from the camera 2200 to the display device 2204 .
  • the signal lines 2040 a , 2040 b need not be physical lines.
  • any suitable wireless technology may be used in combination with or in place of physical lines or wires.
  • the capturing of the image by the camera 2200 may be triggered in any suitable way.
  • the trigger 2042 may be configured to be manually actuated.
  • the trigger 2042 is configured to be actuated by the patient when his or her eye 2064 is aligned (e.g., when the targets 2056 , 2060 are aligned, as discussed above).
  • the likelihood of the eye 2064 moving prior to the capturing of the image is greatly reduced.
  • another person participating in the procedure may be permitted to trigger the capturing of the image, e.g., on the patient's cue.
  • the control device 2032 may be configured to automatically capture the image of the patient's eye 2064 based on a predetermined criteria.
  • the display device 2204 is configured to be illuminated to direct an image along the axis 2052 toward the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by an arrow 2208 .
  • the surface of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the display device 2204 preferably is reflective to light directed from the location of the beamsplitter 2080 .
  • the image on the display 2052 is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 toward an eye 2212 of the surgeon as indicated by an arrow 2216 .
  • the beamsplitter 2080 preferably is transparent from the perspective of the surgeon's eye 2212 .
  • the surgeon may simultaneously view the patient's eye 2064 and the image on the display device 2204 in one embodiment.
  • the marking image may be projected at the same time that an image is displayed on the display device 2204 .
  • the marking image and the image on the display will appear to both be on the patient's eye. In one arrangement, they have the same configuration (e.g., size and shape) and therefore overlap. This can reinforce the image from the perspective of the surgeon, further increasing the visibility of the visual cue provided by the marking image.
  • the display device 2204 is located at a distance 2220 from the beamsplitter 2080 .
  • the patient is located a distance 2224 from the axis 2052 .
  • the distance 2220 is about equal to the distance 2224 .
  • both the display device 2204 and the patient's eye 2064 are at the focal length of the surgical viewing device 2004 . This assures that the image generated by the display device 2204 is in focus at the same time that the patient's eye is in focus.
  • the system 2000 is configured to track movement of the patient's eye 2064 during the procedure.
  • the trigger 2042 is actuated by the patient when the eye 2064 is aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008 .
  • the image capture module 2028 may be configured to respond to such movements by moving the image formed on the display device 2204 .
  • a ring may be formed on the display device 2204 that is similar to those discussed above in connection with the marking target 2120 .
  • the beamsplitter 2080 enables the surgeon to see the ring visually overlaid on the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the image capture module 2028 compares the real-time position of the patient's eye 2064 with the image of the eye captured when the trigger 2042 is actuated. Differences in the real-time position and the position captured by the camera 2200 are determined. The position of the ring is moved an amount corresponding to the differences in position. As a result, from the perspective of the surgeon, movements of the ring and the eye correspond and the ring continues to indicate the correct position to place a mask.
  • a first variation is substantially identical to the embodiment shown in FIG. 55 , except as set forth below.
  • the video capture module 2028 is eliminated.
  • This embodiment is similar to that set forth above in connection with FIG. 51 .
  • the marking module 2024 is configured to project the marking target onto the surface of the patient's eye. This variation is advantageous in that it has a relatively simple construction. Also, this variation projects the marking image onto the surface of the cornea, proximate the surgical location.
  • the marking module 2024 is configured to display the marking image to the surgeon's eye 2212 but not to the patient's eye 2064 . This may be provided by positioning the marking target 2120 approximately in the location of the display device 2204 .
  • the marking image may be generated and presented to the surgeon in any suitable manner.
  • the marking target 2120 and marking target illuminator 2124 may be repositioned so that they project the image of the marking target 2120 as indicated by the arrows 2208 , 2216 .
  • the marking target 2120 and the marking target illuminator 2124 may be replaced by a unitary display, such as an LCD display.
  • This implementation of the first variation is advantageous in that the marking image is visible to the surgeon but is not visible to the patient. The patient is freed from having to respond to or being subject to the marking image. This can increase alignment performance by increasing patient comfort and decreasing distractions, thereby enabling the patient to remain still during the procedure.
  • a dual marking image is presented to the eye 2212 of the surgeon.
  • this implementation has a marking module 2024 similar to that shown in FIG. 55 and discussed above, except as set forth below.
  • a virtual image is presented to the surgeon's eye 2212 .
  • a virtual image generation surface is positioned in substantially the same location as the display device 2204 . The surface may be a mirror, another reflective surface, or a non-reflective surface.
  • the display device 2204 is a white card.
  • a first fraction of the light conveying the marking image is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 to the patient's eye 2064 . The marking image is thus formed on the patient's eye.
  • a second fraction of the light conveying the marking image is transmitted to the virtual image generation surface.
  • the marking image is formed on or reflected by the virtual image generation surface.
  • the marking target thus also is visible to the surgeon's eye 2212 in the form of a virtual image of the target.
  • the virtual image and the marking image formed on the patient's eye are both visible to the surgeon.
  • This implementation of the first variation is advantageous in that the virtual image and the marking image of the marking target are visible to the surgeon's eye 2212 and are reinforced each other making the marking image highly visible to the surgeon.
  • the marking module 2024 is eliminated.
  • the image capture module 2028 provides a visual cue for the surgeon to assist in the placement of a mask.
  • an image can be displayed on the display device 2204 , as discussed above.
  • the image can be generated in response to the patient actuating the trigger 2042 .
  • the patient actuates the trigger when the targets 2056 , 2060 appear aligned, as discussed above.
  • care should be taken to determine the position of the display device 2204 in the alignment device because the image formed on the display device 2204 is to give the surgeon a visual cue indicating the location of the line-of-sight of the patient.
  • the display device 2204 is carefully coupled with the alignment module so that the axis 2052 extends through a known portion (e.g., a known pixel) thereof. Because the precise location of the axis 2052 on the display device 2204 is known, the relationship of the image formed thereon to the line-of-sight of the patient is known.
  • a known portion e.g., a known pixel
  • FIG. 56 shows a portion of a surgical system 2400 that is similar to the surgical system 2000 discussed above except as set forth below.
  • the surgical system 2400 may be modified according to any of the variations and embodiments hereinbefore described.
  • the portion of the surgical system 2400 is shown from the surgeon's viewpoint in FIG. 56 .
  • the surgical system 2400 includes an alignment device 2404 and a fixture 2408 .
  • the alignment device 2404 is similar to the alignment device 2008 discussed above, except as set forth below.
  • the surgical system 2400 is shown without a surgical microscope or other viewing device, but is configured to be coupled with one by way of the fixture 2408 .
  • the fixture 2408 may take any suitable form.
  • the fixture 2408 includes a clamp 2412 , an elevation adjustment mechanism 2416 , and suitable members to interconnect the clamp 2408 and the mechanism 2416 .
  • the clamp 2412 is a ring clamp that includes a first side portion 2420 , a second side portion 2424 , and a clamping mechanism 2426 to actuate the first and second side portion 2420 , 2424 with respect to each other.
  • the first side portion 2420 has a first arcuate inner surface 2428 and the second side portion 2424 has a second arcuate inner surface 2432 that faces the first arcuate inner surface 2428 .
  • the clamping mechanism 2426 is coupled with each of the first and second side portions 2420 , 2424 to cause the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428 , 2432 to move toward or away from each other. As the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428 , 2432 move toward each other they apply a force to a structure, such as a portion of a surgical microscope, placed between the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428 , 2432 . In one embodiment, the force applied by the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428 , 2432 is sufficient to clamp the alignment device 2404 with respect to a surgical viewing aid. In one embodiment, the clamp 2412 is configured to couple with any one of (or more than one of) the currently commercially available surgical microscopes.
  • the fixture 2408 preferably also is configured to suspend the alignment device 2404 at an elevation below the clamp 2412 .
  • a bracket 2440 is coupled with the clamp 2412 , which is an L-shaped bracket in the illustrated embodiment with a portion of the L extending downward from the clamp 2412 .
  • FIG. 56 shows the L-shaped bracket spaced laterally from the clamp 2412 by a spacer 2444 .
  • the bracket 2440 is pivotably coupled with the spacer 2444 so that the alignment device 2404 can be easily rotated out of the field of view of the surgical microscope or viewing aid, which is visible through the spaced defined between the surfaces 2428 , 2432 .
  • the fixture 2408 is also configured to enable the alignment device 2404 to be positioned at a selected elevation within a range of elevations beneath the clamp 2412 .
  • the elevation of the alignment device 2404 may be easily and quickly adjusted by manipulating a suitable mechanism.
  • manual actuation may be employed by providing a knob 2460 coupled with a rack-and-pinion gear coupling 2464 .
  • the rack-and-pinion gear coupling 2464 can be actuated by another manual device that is more remote, such as by a foot pedal or trigger or by an automated device.
  • FIGS. 57-59 show further details of the alignment device 2404 .
  • the alignment device 2404 is operatively coupled with an illuminator control device 2500 and includes an alignment module 2504 , a marking module 2508 , and an image routing module 2512 .
  • the illuminator control device 2500 controls light or energy sources associated with the alignment control device 2404 .
  • the illuminator control device 2500 forms a part of a computer or other signal processing device, similar to the computer 2036 discussed above.
  • the alignment module 2504 is similar to the alignment module 2020 except as set forth below.
  • the alignment module 2504 includes a housing 2520 that extends between a first end 2524 and a second end 2528 .
  • the first end 2524 of the housing 2520 is coupled with the image routing module 2512 and interacts with the image routing module 2512 in a manner described below.
  • the housing 2520 includes a rigid body 2532 that preferably is hollow.
  • An axis 2536 extends within the hollow portion of the housing 2520 between the first and second ends 2524 , 2528 .
  • the second end 2528 of the housing 2520 is enclosed by an end plate 2540 .
  • the housing 2520 is configured to protect a variety of components that are positioned in the hollow spaced defined therein.
  • a target illuminator 2560 is positioned inside the housing 2520 near the second end 2528 thereof.
  • a power cable 2564 (or other electrical conveyance) that extends from the end plate 2540 electrically connects the target illuminator 2560 to a power source.
  • the target illuminator 2560 could also be triggered and powered by a wireless connection.
  • the power source forms a portion of the illuminator control device 2500 to which the power cable 2564 is connected. Power may be from any suitable power source, e.g., from a battery or electrical outlet of suitable voltage.
  • the illuminator control device 2500 enables the surgeon (or other person assisting in a procedure) to control the amount of energy supplied to the target illuminator 2560 in the alignment module 2504 .
  • the illuminator control device 2500 has a brightness control so that the brightness of the target illumination 2560 can be adjusted.
  • the brightness control may be actuated in a suitable manner, such as by a brightness control knob 2568 .
  • the brightness control may take any other suitable form to provide manual analog (e.g., continuous) adjustment of the amount of energy applied to the target illuminator 2560 or to provide manual digital (e.g., discrete) adjustment of the amount of energy applied to the target illuminator 2560 .
  • the brightness control may be adjustable automatically, e.g., under computer control.
  • the illuminator control device 2500 may also have an on-off switch 2572 configured to selectively apply and cut off power to the target illuminator 2560 .
  • the on-off switch 2572 may be operated manually, automatically, or in a partially manual and partially automatic mode.
  • the brightness control and on-off switch could be controlled wirelessly in another embodiment.
  • first target 2592 located in the housing 2520 are a first target 2592 , a second target 2596 , and a lens 2600 .
  • the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 are configured to present a composite image to the patient's eye such that the patient may align the line-of-sight of the eye with an axis (e.g., the axis 2536 ) of the alignment module 2504 .
  • the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 are similar to the targets discussed above.
  • the alignment target 2081 which includes two targets on opposite ends of a single component, may be positioned within the housing 2520 .
  • the lens 2600 may be any suitable lens.
  • the lens 2600 is configured to sharply focus one or both of the images of the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 in a manner similar to the focus of the targets 2056 , 2060 , discussed above.
  • the alignment module 2504 is configured such that the position of the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 within the housing 2520 can be adjusted.
  • the adjustability of the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 may be provided with any suitable arrangement.
  • FIGS. 57-58 shows that in one embodiment the alignment module 2504 includes a target adjustment device 2612 to provide rapid gross adjustment and fine adjustment of the positions of the targets 2592 , 2596 within the housing 2520 .
  • the target adjustment device 2612 includes a support member 2616 that extends along at least a portion of the housing 2520 between the first end 2524 and the second end 2528 . In one embodiment, the support member 2616 is coupled with the end plate 2540 and with the image routing module 2512 . In one embodiment, the target adjustment device 2612 includes a lens fixture 2620 that is coupled with the lens 2600 and a target fixture 2624 that is coupled with the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 . In another embodiment, each of the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 is coupled with a separate target fixture so that the targets may be individually positioned and adjusted.
  • the lens 2600 may be adjustable as shown, or in a fixed position. Movement of the lens and the targets 2592 , 2596 enable the patterns on the targets 2592 , 2596 to be brought into focus from the patient's point of view.
  • the support member 2616 is a threaded rod and each of the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 has a corresponding threaded through hole to receive the threaded support member 2616 .
  • an adjustment device such as a knob 2628 is coupled with the threaded support member 2616 so that the support member 2616 may be rotated.
  • the knob 2628 may be knurled to make it easier to grasp and rotate.
  • Rotation of the support member 2616 causes the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 to translate on the support member 2616 along the outside of the housing 2520 .
  • the movement of the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 provides a corresponding movement of the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 within the housing 2520 .
  • a quick release mechanism 2640 is provided to enable the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 selectively to clamp and to release the support member 2616 .
  • the quick release mechanism 2640 can be a spring loaded clamp that causes the through holes formed in the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 to open to create a gap through which the support member 2616 can pass.
  • the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 are removed from the support member 2616 , the can be quickly moved to another position on the support member 2616 . After rapid repositioning, fine positioning of the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 may be achieved with by turning the support member 2616 .
  • the alignment device 2404 also includes a marking module 2508 that is similar to the marking module 2024 described above, except as set forth below.
  • the marking module includes a housing 2642 that is generally rigid and that defines a hollow space within the housing.
  • the housing 2642 includes a first end 2644 that is coupled with the image routing module 2512 and a second end 2648 that is closed by an end plate 2652 .
  • the housing 2642 includes a first portion 2656 and a second portion 2660 .
  • the first and second portions 2656 , 2660 preferably are configured to be disengaged from each other so that components located in the hollow space defined in the housing 2642 to be accessed. Such rapid access facilitates servicing and reconfiguring of the components located in the housing 2642 .
  • the first portion 2656 extends between the first end 2644 and a midpoint of the housing 2642 .
  • the second portion 2660 extends between the first portion 2656 and the second end 2648 of the housing 2642 .
  • the first portion 2656 has a male member with external threads and the second portion 2660 has a female member with internal thread such that the first and second portions 2656 , 2660 may be engaged with and disengaged from each other by way of the threads.
  • the housing 2642 provides a space in which one or more components may be positioned.
  • the housing 2642 encloses a marking target illuminator 2680 and a marking target 2684 .
  • the marking target illuminator 2680 may be a suitable source of radiant energy, e.g., a light source, such as an incandescent light, a fluorescent light, a light-emitting diode, or other source of radiant energy.
  • a light source such as an incandescent light, a fluorescent light, a light-emitting diode, or other source of radiant energy.
  • the marking target illuminator 2680 may include or be coupled with suitable optical components to process the light generated thereby in a useful manner, e.g., by providing one or more filters to modify the light, e.g., by allowing a subset of the spectrum of light energy emitted by the light source (e.g., one or more bands of the electromagnetic spectrum) to be transmitted toward the marking target 2684 .
  • the marking target illuminator 2680 is located near the end plate 2652 .
  • a power cable 2688 (or other electrical conveyance) that extends from the end plate 2652 electrically connects the marking target illuminator 2680 to a power source.
  • the power source forms a portion of the illuminator control device 2500 to which the power cable 2688 is connected.
  • Power may be from any suitable power source, e.g., from a battery or electrical outlet of suitable voltage.
  • the illuminator control device 2500 enables the surgeon (or other person assisting in a procedure) to control the amount of energy supplied to the target illuminator 2680 in the marking module 2508 .
  • the illuminator control device 2500 has a brightness control so that the brightness of the marking target illumination 2680 can be adjusted.
  • the brightness control may be actuated in a suitable manner, such as by a brightness control knob 2692 .
  • the brightness control may be similar to that discussed above in connection with the brightness control of the target illuminator 2560 .
  • the illuminator control device 2500 may also have an on-off switch 2696 configured to selectively apply and cut off power to the marking target illuminator 2680 .
  • the on-off switch 2696 may be operated manually, automatically, or in a partially manual and partially automatic mode. Any of the power supply, the brightness control, and the on-off switch may be implemented wirelessly in various other embodiments.
  • the marking target 2684 is a reticle, e.g., made of glass, with an annular shape formed thereon.
  • the annular shape formed on the marking target 2684 may be a substantially clear annulus surrounded by opaque regions. In this configuration, light directed toward the marking target 2684 interacts with the marking target 2684 to produce and annular image.
  • the marking target 2684 may be a substantially clear reticle with an opaque shape, such as an opaque annular shape.
  • the annular image is directed into the image routing device 2684 , as discussed further below.
  • the marking target 2684 may be housed in a fixture 2718 that is removable, e.g., when the first portion 2656 and the second portion 2660 of the housing 2642 are decoupled.
  • the first portion 2656 of the housing 2642 is configured to engage the fixture 2718 to relatively precisely position the marking target 2684 with respect to an axis of the housing 2642 .
  • FIG. 59 shows the image routing module 2512 in greater detail.
  • the image routing module 2512 is primarily useful for routing light that conveys the target and marking images to an eye of a patient.
  • the image routing module 2512 provides flexibility in the positioning of the various components of the alignment device 2404 .
  • the image routing module 2512 enables the housing 2520 and the housing 2556 to be generally in the same plane and positioned generally parallel to each other.
  • This provides a relatively compact arrangement for the alignment device 2404 , which is advantageous in the surgical setting because, as discussed above, it is desirable for the surgeon to be as close to the surgical site as possible.
  • the compact arrangement of the alignment device 2404 minimizes or at least reduces the extent to which the alignment device 2404 interferes with free movement of the surgeon and others assisting the surgeon.
  • FIGS. 58 and 59 shows that the image routing module 2512 includes a housing 2720 that is coupled with the first end 2524 and the housing 2520 and with the first end 2644 of the housing 2642 .
  • a space defined within the housing 2720 houses a first optic device 2728 and a second optic device 2732 .
  • the first optic device 2728 has a reflective surface that faces the marking target 2684 and is configured to reflect light conveying an image of the marking target 2684 toward the second optic device 2732 .
  • the first optic device 2728 may be a mirror.
  • the second optic device 2732 has a surface 2736 that faces the first optic device 2728 and is reflective to light from the first optic device 2728 .
  • the second optic device 2732 thus reflects light that is directed toward it by the first optic device 2728 .
  • the image routing module 2512 also may include a third optic device 2740 and a frame 2744 coupled with the housing 2720 .
  • the frame 2744 is configured to position and orient the third optic device 2740 with respect to the housing 2720 .
  • the third optic device 2740 is a beamsplitter and the frame 2744 holds the third optic device 2740 at about a forty-five degree angle with respect to the axis 2520 . In this position, the third optic device 2740 interacts with light reflected by the first surface 2736 of the second optic device 2732 .
  • the third optic device 2740 may operate in a manner similar to the beamsplitter 2080 of FIG. 55 .
  • the second optic device 2732 is configured to be transparent to substantially all of the light conveying an image along the axis 2536 such that the image conveyed along the axis 2536 may be directed to the third optic device 2740 and thereafter to an eye of a surgeon, as discussed about in connection with FIG. 55 .
  • the image routing device is shown with first, second, and third optic devices 2728 , 2732 , 2740 to route light conveying images in a particular manner, one skilled in the art will recognize that the image routing device 2512 could have more or fewer optic devices that route the image, depending on the desired geometry and compactness of the alignment device 2404 .
  • a variation of the alignment device 2404 provides a marking module with a secondary marking module not routed through the optics of the alignment device 2404 .
  • the secondary marking module includes a source of radiant energy, e.g., a laser or other light source.
  • the source of radiant energy is configured to direct a plurality of spots (e.g., three, four, or more than four spots) onto the patient's eye.
  • the spots indicate positions on the eye that correlate with an edge of a mask when the mask is in the correct position with respect to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 .
  • the spots can be aligned with the projected marking target such that they hit at a selected location on the projected marking target (e.g., circumferentially spaced locations on the inner edge, on the outer edge, or on both the inner and outer edges).
  • At least a portion of the secondary marking module is coupled with the frame 2744 in one embodiment.
  • a laser of the secondary marking module could be attached to the frame 2744 and suspended therefrom, oriented downward toward the patient's eye. As discussed above, this arrangement provides a secondary device for marking the proper location of a mask with respect to a patient's line of sight after the line of sight has been identified.
  • Some of the embodiments described below include nutrient transport structures that are configured to enhance or maintain nutrient flow between adjacent tissues by facilitating transport of nutrients across the mask.
  • the nutrient transport structures of some of the embodiments described below are configured to at least substantially prevent nutrient depletion in adjacent tissues.
  • the nutrient transport structures can decrease negative effects due to the presence of the mask in adjacent corneal layers when the mask is implanted in the cornea, increasing the longevity of the masks.
  • the inventors have discovered that certain arrangements of nutrient transport structures generate diffraction patterns that interfere with the vision improving effect of the masks described herein. Accordingly, certain masks are described herein that include nutrient transport structures that do not generate diffraction patterns or otherwise interfere with the vision enhancing effects of the mask embodiments.
  • FIGS. 60-61 show one embodiment of a mask 3000 configured to increase depth of focus of an eye of a patient suffering from presbyopia.
  • the mask 3000 is similar to the masks hereinbefore described, except as set forth below.
  • the mask 3000 can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a - 67 d with variations of such processes.
  • the mask 3000 is configured to be applied to an eye of a patient, e.g., by being implanted in the cornea of the patient.
  • the mask 3000 may be implanted within the cornea in any suitable manner, such as those discussed above in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C .
  • the mask 3000 includes a body 3004 that has an anterior surface 3008 and a posterior surface 3012 .
  • the body 3004 is capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow between the first corneal layer and the second corneal layer.
  • the material is selected to maintain at least about ninety-six percent of the natural flow of at least one nutrient (e.g., glucose) between a first corneal layer (e.g., the layer 1410 ) and a second corneal layer (e.g., the layer 1430 ).
  • the body 3004 may be formed of any suitable material, including at least one of an open cell foam material, an expanded solid material, and a substantially opaque material.
  • the material used to form the body 3004 has relatively high water content.
  • the mask 3000 includes and a nutrient transport structure 3016 .
  • the nutrient transport structure 3016 may comprise a plurality of holes 3020 .
  • the holes 3020 are shown on only a portion of the mask 3000 , but the holes 3020 preferably are located throughout the body 3004 in one embodiment.
  • the holes 3020 are arranged in a hex pattern, which is illustrated by a plurality of locations 3020 ′ in FIG. 62A . As discussed below, a plurality of locations may be defined and later used in the later formation of a plurality of holes 3020 on the mask 3000 .
  • the mask 3000 has an outer periphery 3024 that defines an outer edge of the body 3004 .
  • the mask 3000 includes an aperture 3028 at least partially surrounded by the outer periphery 3024 and a non-transmissive portion 3032 located between the outer periphery 3024 and the aperture 3028 .
  • the mask 3000 is symmetrical, e.g., symmetrical about a mask axis 3036 .
  • the outer periphery 3024 of the mask 3000 is circular.
  • the masks in general have has a diameter within the range of from about 3 mm to about 8 mm, often within the range of from about 3.5 mm to about 6 mm, and less than about 6 mm in one embodiment.
  • the mask is circular and has a diameter in the range of 4 to 6 mm.
  • the mask 3000 is circular and has a diameter of less than 4 mm.
  • the outer periphery 3024 has a diameter of about 3.8 mm in another embodiment.
  • masks that are asymmetrical or that are not symmetrical about a mask axis provide benefits, such as enabling a mask to be located or maintained in a selected position with respect to the anatomy of the eye.
  • the body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be configured to coupled with a particular anatomical region of the eye.
  • the body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be configured to conform to the native anatomy of the region of the eye in which it is to be applied.
  • the body 3004 may be provided with an amount of curvature along the mask axis 3036 that corresponds to the anatomical curvature.
  • one environment in which the mask 3000 may be deployed is within the cornea of the eye of a patient.
  • the cornea has an amount of curvature that varies from person to person about a substantially constant mean value within an identifiable group, e.g., adults.
  • at least one of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008 , 3012 of the mask 3000 may be provided with an amount of curvature corresponding to that of the layers of the cornea between which the mask 3000 is applied.
  • the mask 3000 has a desired amount of optical power.
  • Optical power may be provided by configuring the at least one of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008 , 3012 with curvature.
  • the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008 , 3012 are provided with different amounts of curvature.
  • the mask 3000 has varying thickness from the outer periphery 3024 to the aperture 3028 .
  • one of the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the body 3004 is substantially planar. In one planar embodiment, very little or no uniform curvature can be measured across the planar surface. In another embodiment, both of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008 , 3012 are substantially planar. In general, the thickness of the inlay may be within the range of from about 1 micron to about 40 micron, and often in the range of from about 5 micron to about 20 micron. In one embodiment, the body 3004 of the mask 3000 has a thickness 3038 of between about 5 micron and about 10 micron. In one embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 5 micron. In another embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 8 micron. In another embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 10 micron.
  • Thinner masks generally are more suitable for applications wherein the mask 3000 is implanted at a relatively shallow location in (e.g., close to the anterior surface of) the cornea.
  • the body 3004 may be sufficiently flexible such that it can take on the curvature of the structures with which it is coupled without negatively affecting the optical performance of the mask 3000 .
  • the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 5 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea.
  • the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 65 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea.
  • the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 125 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea. Further details regarding implanting the mask 3000 in the cornea are discussed above in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C .
  • a substantially planar mask has several advantages over a non-planar mask. For example, a substantially planar mask can be fabricated more easily than one that has to be formed to a particular curvature. In particular, the process steps involved in inducing curvature in the mask 3000 can be eliminated. Also, a substantially planar mask may be more amenable to use on a wider distribution of the patient population (or among different sub-groups of a broader patient population) because the substantially planar mask uses the curvature of each patient's cornea to induce the appropriate amount of curvature in the body 3004 .
  • the mask 3000 is configured specifically for the manner and location of coupling with the eye.
  • the mask 3000 may be larger if applied over the eye as a contact lens or may be smaller if applied within the eye posterior of the cornea, e.g., proximate a surface of the lens of the eye.
  • the thickness 3038 of the body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be varied based on where the mask 3000 is implanted. For implantation at deeper levels within the cornea, a thicker mask may be advantageous. Thicker masks are advantageous in some applications. For example, they are generally easier to handle, and therefore are easier to fabricate and to implant. Thicker masks may benefit more from having a preformed curvature than thinner masks. A thicker mask could be configured to have little or no curvature prior to implantation if it is configured to conform to the curvature of the native anatomy when applied.
  • the aperture 3028 is configured to transmit substantially all incident light along the mask axis 3036 .
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 surrounds at least a portion of the aperture 3028 and substantially prevents transmission of incident light thereon.
  • the aperture 3028 may be a through-hole in the body 3004 or a substantially light transmissive (e.g., transparent) portion thereof.
  • the aperture 3028 of the mask 3000 generally is defined within the outer periphery 3024 of the mask 3000 .
  • the aperture 3028 may take any of suitable configurations, such as those described above in connection with FIGS. 6-42 .
  • the aperture 3028 is substantially circular and is substantially centered in the mask 3000 .
  • the size of the aperture 3028 may be any size that is effective to increase the depth of focus of an eye of a patient suffering from presbyopia.
  • the aperture 3028 can be circular, having a diameter of less than about 2.2 mm in one embodiment.
  • the diameter of the aperture is between about 1.8 mm and about 2.2 mm.
  • the aperture 3028 is circular and has a diameter of about 1.8 mm or less. Most apertures will have a diameter within the range of from about 1.0 mm to about 2.5 mm, and often within the range of from about 1.3 mm to about 1.9 mm.
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to prevent transmission of radiant energy through the mask 3000 .
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of substantially all of at least a portion of the spectrum of the incident radiant energy.
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to prevent transmission of substantially all visible light, e.g., radiant energy in the electromagnetic spectrum that is visible to the human eye.
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 may substantially prevent transmission of radiant energy outside the range visible to humans in some embodiments.
  • preventing transmission of light through the non-transmissive portion 3032 decreases the amount of light that reaches the retina and the fovea that would not converge at the retina and fovea to form a sharp image.
  • the size of the aperture 3028 is such that the light transmitted therethrough generally converges at the retina or fovea. Accordingly, a much sharper image is presented to the eye than would otherwise be the case without the mask 3000 .
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of about 90 percent of incident light. In another embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of about 92 percent of all incident light.
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 of the mask 3000 may be configured to be opaque to prevent the transmission of light.
  • the term “opaque” is intended to be a broad term meaning capable of preventing the transmission of radiant energy, e.g., light energy, and also covers structures and arrangements that absorb or otherwise block all or less than all or at least a substantial portion of the light. In one embodiment, at least a portion of the body 3004 is configured to be opaque to more than 99 percent of the light incident thereon.
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 may be configured to prevent transmission of light without absorbing the incident light.
  • the mask 3000 could be made reflective or could be made to interact with the light in a more complex manner, as discussed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,554,424, issued Apr. 29, 2003, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety;
  • the mask 3000 also has a nutrient transport structure that in some embodiments comprises the plurality of holes 3020 .
  • the presence of the plurality of holes 3020 may affect the transmission of light through the non-transmissive portion 3032 by potentially allowing more light to pass through the mask 3000 .
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to absorb about 99 percent or more of the incident light from passing through the mask 3000 without holes 3020 being present.
  • the presence of the plurality of holes 3020 allows more light to pass through the non-transmissive portion 3032 such that only about 92 percent of the light incident on the non-transmissive portion 3032 is prevented from passing through the non-transmissive portion 3032 .
  • the holes 3020 may reduce the benefit of the aperture 3028 on the depth of focus of the eye by allowing more light to pass through the non-transmissive portion to the retina.
  • the transport structure 3016 (e.g., the holes 3020 ) is capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow from a first corneal layer (i.e., one that is adjacent to the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000 ) to the second corneal layer (i.e., one that is adjacent to the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000 ).
  • the plurality of holes 3020 are configured to enable nutrients to pass through the mask 3000 between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 .
  • the holes 3020 of the mask 3000 shown in FIG. 60 may be located anywhere on the mask 3000 .
  • Other mask embodiments described herein below locate substantially all of the nutrient transport structure in one or more regions of a mask.
  • each of the holes 3020 of FIG. 60 extends at least partially between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000 .
  • each of the holes 3020 includes a hole entrance 3060 and a hole exit 3064 .
  • the hole entrance 3060 is located adjacent to the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000 .
  • the hole exit 3064 is located adjacent to the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000 .
  • each of the holes 3020 extends the entire distance between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000 .
  • the transport structure 3016 is configured to maintain the transport of one or more nutrients across the mask 3000 .
  • the transport structure 3016 of the mask 3000 provides sufficient flow of one or more nutrients across the mask 3000 to prevent depletion of nutrients at least at one of the first and second corneal layers (e.g., the layers 1410 and 1430 ).
  • One nutrient of particular importance to the viability of the adjacent corneal layers is glucose.
  • the transport structure 3016 of the mask 3000 provides sufficient flow of glucose across the mask 3000 between the first and second corneal layers to prevent glucose depletion that would harm the adjacent corneal tissue.
  • the mask 3000 is capable of substantially maintaining nutrient flow (e.g., glucose flow) between adjacent corneal layers.
  • the nutrient transport structure 3016 is configured to prevent depletion of more than about 4 percent of glucose (or other biological substance) in adjacent tissue of at least one of the first corneal layer and the second corneal layer.
  • the holes 3020 may be configured to maintain the transport of nutrients across the mask 3000 .
  • the holes 3020 are formed with a diameter of about 0.015 mm or more.
  • the holes have a diameter of about 0.020 mm.
  • the holes have a diameter of about 0.025 mm.
  • the holes 3020 have a diameter in the range of about 0.020 mm to about 0.029 mm.
  • the number of holes in the plurality of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole entrances 3060 of all the holes 3000 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000 .
  • the number of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole exits 3064 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000 . In another embodiment, the number of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole exits 3064 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3012 and the sum of the surface areas of the hole entrances 3060 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000 .
  • Each of the holes 3020 may have a relatively constant cross-sectional area. In one embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of each of the holes 3020 is substantially circular. Each of the holes 3020 may comprise a cylinder extending between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 .
  • the relative position of the holes 3020 is of interest in some embodiments.
  • the holes 3020 of the mask 3000 are hex-packed, e.g., arranged in a hex pattern.
  • each of the holes 3020 is separated from the adjacent holes 3020 by a substantially constant distance, sometimes referred to herein as a hole pitch 3072 .
  • the hole pitch 3072 is about 0.062 mm.
  • the angles between lines of symmetry are approximately 60 degrees.
  • the spacing of holes along any line of holes is generally within the range of from about 30 microns to about 100 microns, and, in one embodiment, is approximately 60 microns.
  • the hole diameter is generally within the range of from about 10 microns to about 100 microns, and in one embodiment, is approximately 20 microns.
  • the hole spacing and diameter are related if you want to control the amount of light coming through. The light transmission is a function of the sum of hole areas as will be understood by those of skill in the art in view of the disclosure herein.
  • FIG. 60 advantageously enables nutrients to flow from the first corneal layer to the second corneal layer.
  • the inventors have discovered that negative visual effects can arise due to the presence of the transport structure 3016 .
  • a hex packed arrangement of the holes 3020 can generate diffraction patterns visible to the patient.
  • patients might observe a plurality of spots, e.g., six spots, surrounding a central light with holes 3020 having a hex patterned.
  • the inventors have discovered a variety of techniques that produce advantageous arrangements of a transport structure such that diffraction patterns and other deleterious visual effects do not substantially inhibit other visual benefits of a mask.
  • the nutrient transport structure is arranged to spread the diffracted light out uniformly across the image to eliminate observable spots.
  • the nutrient transport structure employs a pattern that substantially eliminates diffraction patterns or pushes the patterns to the periphery of the image.
  • FIG. 62B-62C show two embodiments of patterns of holes 4020 that may be applied to a mask that is otherwise substantially similar to the mask 3000 .
  • the holes 4020 of the hole patterns of FIGS. 62A-62B are spaced from each other by a random hole spacing or hole pitch. In other embodiments discussed below, holes are spaced from each other by a non-uniform amount, e.g., not a random amount.
  • the holes 4020 have a substantially uniform shape (cylindrical shafts having a substantially constant cross-sectional area).
  • FIG. 62C illustrates a plurality of holes 4020 separated by a random spacing, wherein the density of the holes is greater than that of FIG. 62B .
  • One way to provide a higher percentage of hole area is to increase the density of the holes. Increase hole density can also permit smaller holes to achieve the same nutrient transport as is achieved by less dense, larger holes.
  • FIG. 63A shows a portion of another mask 4000 a that is substantially similar to the mask 3000 , except as set forth below.
  • the mask 4000 a can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a - 67 d and with variations of such processes.
  • the mask 4000 a has a plurality of holes 4020 a .
  • a substantial number of the holes 4020 a have a non-uniform size.
  • the holes 4020 a may be uniform in cross-sectional shape.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the holes 4020 a is substantially circular in one embodiment.
  • the holes 4020 a may be circular in shape and have the same diameter from a hole entrance to a hole exit, but are otherwise non-uniform in at least one aspect, e.g., in size. It may be preferable to vary the size of a substantial number of the holes by a random amount. In another embodiment, the holes 4020 a are non-uniform (e.g., random) in size and are separated by a non-uniform (e.g., a random) spacing.
  • a non-uniform e.g., a random
  • FIG. 63B illustrates another embodiment of a mask 4000 b that is substantially similar to the mask 3000 , except as set forth below.
  • the mask 4000 b can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a - 67 d and with variations of such processes.
  • the mask 4000 b includes a body 4004 b .
  • the mask 4000 b has a transport structure 4016 b that includes a plurality of holes 4020 b with a non-uniform facet orientation.
  • each of the holes 4020 b has a hole entrance that may be located at an anterior surface 4008 b of the mask 4000 b .
  • a facet of the hole entrance is defined by a portion of the body 4004 b of the mask 4000 b surrounding the hole entrance.
  • the facet is the shape of the hole entrance at the anterior surface 4008 b .
  • most or all the facets have an elongate shape, e.g., an oblong shape, with a long axis and a short axis that is perpendicular to the long axis.
  • the facets may be substantially uniform in shape.
  • the orientation of facets is not uniform.
  • a substantial number of the facets may have a non-uniform orientation.
  • a substantial number of the facets have a random orientation.
  • the facets are non-uniform (e.g., random) in shape and are non-uniform (e.g., random) in orientation.
  • inventions may be provided that vary at least one aspect, including one or more of the foregoing aspects, of a plurality of holes to reduce the tendency of the holes to produce visible diffraction patterns or patterns that otherwise reduce the vision improvement that may be provided by a mask with an aperture, such as any of those described above.
  • the hole size, shape, and orientation of at least a substantial number of the holes may be varied randomly or may be otherwise non-uniform.
  • FIG. 64 shows another embodiment of a mask 4200 that is substantially similar to any of the masks hereinbefore described, except as set forth below.
  • the mask 4200 can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a - 67 d and with variations of such processes.
  • the mask 4200 includes a body 4204 .
  • the body 4204 has an outer peripheral region 4205 , an inner peripheral region 4206 , and a hole region 4207 .
  • the hole region 4207 is located between the outer peripheral region 4205 and the outer peripheral region 4206 .
  • the body 4204 may also include an aperture region, where the aperture (discussed below) is not a through hole.
  • the mask 4200 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4216 .
  • the nutrient transport structure includes a plurality of holes 4220 . At least a substantial portion of the holes 4220 (e.g., all of the holes) are located in the hole region 4207 . As above, only a portion of the nutrient structure 4216 is shown for simplicity. But it should be understood that the hole 4220 may be located through the hole region 4207 .
  • the outer peripheral region 4205 may extend from an outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200 to a selected outer circumference 4225 of the mask 4200 .
  • the selected outer circumference 4225 of the mask 4200 is located a selected radial distance from the outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200 . In one embodiment, the selected outer circumference 4225 of the mask 4200 is located about 0.05 mm from the outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200 .
  • the inner peripheral region 4206 may extend from an inner location, e.g., an inner periphery 4226 adjacent an aperture 4228 of the mask 4200 to a selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200 .
  • the selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200 is located a selected radial distance from the inner periphery 4226 of the mask 4200 . In one embodiment, the selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200 is located about 0.05 mm from the inner periphery 4226 .
  • the mask 4200 may be the product of a process that involves random selection of a plurality of locations and formation of holes on the mask 4200 corresponding to the locations.
  • the method can also involve determining whether the selected locations satisfy one or more criteria. For example, one criterion prohibits all, at least a majority, or at least a substantial portion of the holes from being formed at locations that correspond to the inner or outer peripheral regions 4205 , 4206 . Another criterion prohibits all, at least a majority, or at least a substantial portion of the holes 4220 from being formed too close to each other. For example, such a criterion could be used to assure that a wall thickness, e.g., the shortest distance between adjacent holes, is not less than a predetermined amount. In one embodiment, the wall thickness is prevented from being less than about 20 microns.
  • the outer peripheral region 4205 is eliminated and the hole region 4207 extends from the inner peripheral region 4206 to an outer periphery 4224 .
  • the inner peripheral region 4206 is eliminated and the hole region 4207 extends from the outer peripheral region 4205 to an inner periphery 4226 .
  • FIG. 61B shows a mask 4300 that is similar to the mask 3000 except as set forth below.
  • the mask 4300 can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a - 67 d and with variations of such processes.
  • the mask 4300 includes a body 4304 that has an anterior surface 4308 and a posterior surface 4312 .
  • the mask 4300 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4316 that, in one embodiment, includes a plurality of holes 4320 .
  • the holes 4320 are formed in the body 4304 so that nutrient transport is provided but transmission of radiant energy (e.g., light) to the retinal locations adjacent the fovea through the holes 4304 is substantially prevented.
  • the holes 4304 are formed such that when the eye with which the mask 4300 is coupled is directed at an object to be viewed, light conveying the image of that object that enters the holes 4320 cannot exit the holes along a path ending near the fovea.
  • each of the holes 4320 has a hole entrance 4360 and a hole exit 4364 .
  • Each of the holes 4320 extends along a transport axis 4366 .
  • the transport axis 4366 is formed to substantially prevent propagation of light from the anterior surface 4308 to the posterior surface 4312 through the holes 4320 .
  • at least a substantial number of the holes 4320 have a size to the transport axis 4366 that is less than a thickness of the mask 4300 .
  • at least a substantial number of the holes 4320 have a longest dimension of a perimeter at least at one of the anterior or posterior surfaces 4308 , 4312 (e.g., a facet) that is less than a thickness of the mask 4300 .
  • the transport axis 4366 is formed at an angle with respect to a mask axis 4336 that substantially prevents propagation of light from the anterior surface 4308 to the posterior surface 4312 through the hole 4320 .
  • the transport axis 4366 of one or more holes 4320 is formed at an angle with respect to the mask axis 4336 that is large enough to prevent the projection of most of the hole entrance 4360 from overlapping the hole exit 4364 .
  • the hole 4320 is circular in cross-section and has a diameter between about 0.5 micron and about 8 micron and the transport axis 4366 is between 5 and 85 degrees.
  • the length of each of the holes 4320 (e.g., the distance between the anterior surface 4308 and the posterior surface 4312 ) is between about 8 and about 92 micron.
  • the diameter of the holes 4320 is about 5 micron and the transport angle is about 40 degrees or more. As the length of the holes 4320 increases it may be desirable to include additional holes 4320 . In some cases, additional holes 4320 counteract the tendency of longer holes to reduce the amount of nutrient flow through the mask 4300 .
  • FIG. 61C shows another embodiment of a mask 4400 similar to the mask 3000 , except as set forth below.
  • the mask 4400 can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a - 67 d and with variations of such processes.
  • the mask 4400 includes a body 4404 that has an anterior surface 4408 , a first mask layer 4410 adjacent the anterior surface 4408 , a posterior surface 4412 , a second mask layer 4414 adjacent the posterior surface 4412 , and a third mask layer 4415 located between the first mask layer 4410 and the second mask layer 4414 .
  • the mask 4400 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4416 that, in one embodiment, includes a plurality of holes 4420 .
  • the holes 4420 are formed in the body 4404 so that nutrient are transported across the mask, as discussed above, but transmission of radiant energy (e.g., light) to retinal locations adjacent the fovea through the holes 4404 is substantially prevented.
  • the holes 4404 are formed such that when the eye with which the mask 4400 is coupled is directed at an object to be viewed, light conveying the image of that object that enters the holes 4420 cannot exit the holes along a path ending near the fovea.
  • the mask 4400 includes a first hole portion 4420 a that extends along a first transport axis 4466 a
  • the second mask layer 4414 includes a second hole portion 4420 b extending along a second transport axis 4466 b
  • the third mask layer 4415 includes a third hole portion 4420 c extending along a third transport axis 4466 c .
  • the first, second, and third transport axes 4466 a , 4466 b , 4466 c preferably are not collinear.
  • first and second transport axes 4466 a , 4466 b are parallel but are off-set by a first selected amount. In one embodiment, the second and third transport axes 4466 b , 4466 c are parallel but are off-set by a second selected amount. In the illustrated embodiment, each of the transport axes 44466 a , 4466 b , 4466 c are off-set by one-half of the width of the hole portions 4420 a , 4420 b , 4420 c .
  • the inner-most edge of the hole portion 4420 a is spaced from the axis 4336 by a distance that is equal to or greater than the distance of the outer-most edge of the hole portion 4420 b from the axis 4336 . This spacing substantially prevents light from passing through the holes 4420 from the anterior surface 4408 to the posterior surface 4412 .
  • the first and second amounts are selected to substantially prevent the transmission of light therethrough.
  • the first and second amounts of off-set may be achieved in any suitable fashion.
  • One technique for forming the hole portions 4420 a , 4420 b , 4420 c with the desired off-set is to provide a layered structure.
  • the mask 4400 may include the first layer 4410 , the second layer 4414 , and the third layer 4415 .
  • FIG. 61C shows that the mask 4400 can be formed with three layers.
  • the mask 4400 is formed of more than three layers. Providing more layers may advantageously further decrease the tendency of light to be transmitted through the holes 4420 onto the retina.
  • the body of the mask may be formed of a material selected to provide adequate nutrient transport and to substantially prevent negative optic effects, such as diffraction, as discussed above.
  • the masks are formed of an open cell foam material. In another embodiment, the masks are formed of an expanded solid material.
  • various random patterns of holes may advantageously be provided for nutrient transport. In some embodiment, it may be sufficient to provide regular patterns that are non-uniform in some aspect. Non-uniform aspects to the holes may be provided by any suitable technique.
  • a plurality of locations 4020 ′ is generated.
  • the locations 4020 ′ are a series of coordinates that may comprise a non-uniform pattern or a regular pattern.
  • the locations 4020 ′ may be randomly generated or may be related by a mathematical relationship (e.g., separated by a fixed spacing or by an amount that can be mathematically defined).
  • the locations are selected to be separated by a constant pitch or spacing and may be hex packed.
  • a subset of the locations among the plurality of locations 4020 ′ is modified to maintain a performance characteristic of the mask.
  • the performance characteristic may be any performance characteristic of the mask.
  • the performance characteristic may relate to the structural integrity of the mask.
  • the subset of locations may be moved with respect to their initial positions as selected in the first step.
  • each of the locations in the subset of locations is moved by an amount equal to a fraction of the hole spacing.
  • each of the locations in the subset of locations may be moved by an amount equal to one-quarter of the hole spacing.
  • the locations that are moved preferably are randomly or pseudo-randomly selected.
  • the subset of location is moved by a random or a pseudo-random amount.
  • an outer peripheral region is defined that extends between the outer periphery of the mask and a selected radial distance of about 0.05 mm from the outer periphery.
  • an inner peripheral region is defined that extends between an aperture of the mask and a selected radial distance of about 0.05 mm from the aperture.
  • an outer peripheral region is defined that extends between the outer periphery of the mask and a selected radial distance and an inner peripheral region is defined that extends between the aperture of the mask and a selected radial distance from the aperture.
  • the subset of location is modified by excluding those locations that would correspond to holes formed in the inner peripheral region or the outer peripheral region.
  • the strength of the mask in these regions is increased.
  • the mask may be easier to handle during manufacturing or when being applied to a patient without causing damage to the mask.
  • the subset of locations is modified by comparing the separation of the holes with minimum and or maximum limits. For example, it may be desirable to assure that no two locations are closer than a minimum value. In some embodiments this is important to assure that the wall thickness, which corresponds to the separation between adjacent holes, is no less than a minimum amount. As discussed above, the minimum value of separation is about 20 microns in one embodiment, thereby providing a wall thickness of no less than about 20 microns.
  • the subset of locations is modified and/or the pattern of location is augmented to maintain an optical characteristic of the mask.
  • the optical characteristic may be opacity and the subset of locations may be modified to maintain the opacity of a non-transmissive portion of a mask.
  • the subset of locations may be modified by equalizing the density of holes in a first region of the body compared with the density of holes in a second region of the body.
  • the locations corresponding to the first and second regions of the non-transmissive portion of the mask may be identified.
  • the first region and the second region are arcuate regions (e.g., wedges) of substantially equal area.
  • a first areal density of locations (e.g., locations per square inch) is calculated for the locations corresponding to the first region and a second areal density of locations is calculated for the locations corresponding to the second region.
  • at least one location is added to either the first or the second region based on the comparison of the first and second areal densities.
  • at least one location is removed based on the comparison of the first and second areal densities.
  • the subset of locations may be modified to maintain nutrient transport of the mask.
  • the subset of location is modified to maintain glucose transport.
  • a hole is formed in a body of a mask at locations corresponding to the pattern of locations as modified, augmented, or modified and augmented.
  • the holes are configured to substantially maintain natural nutrient flow from the first layer to the second layer without producing visible diffraction patterns.
  • the surgical system 2000 of FIG. 55 employs a marking module 2024 that provides a visual cue in the form of a projected image for a surgeon during a procedure for applying a mask.
  • some techniques for treating a patient involve positioning an implant with the aid of a marked reference point. These methods are illustrated by FIGS. 65-66B .
  • a patient is treated by placing an implant 5000 in a cornea 5004 .
  • a corneal flap 5008 is lifted to expose a surface in the cornea 5004 (e.g., an intracorneal surface).
  • Any suitable tool or technique may be used to lift the corneal flap 5008 to expose a surface in the cornea 5004 .
  • a blade e.g., a microkeratome
  • a laser or an electrosurgical tool could be used to form a corneal flap.
  • a reference point 5012 on the cornea 5004 is identified. The reference point 5012 thereafter is marked in one technique, as discussed further below.
  • the implant 5000 is positioned on the intracorneal surface.
  • the flap 5008 is then closed to cover at least a portion of the implant 5000 .
  • the surface of the cornea that is exposed is a stromal surface in one technique.
  • the stromal surface may be on the corneal flap 5008 or on an exposed surface from which the corneal flap 5008 is removed.
  • the reference point 5012 may be identified in any suitable manner.
  • the alignment devices and methods described above may be used to identify the reference point 5012 .
  • identifying the reference point 5012 involves illuminating a light spot (e.g., a spot of light formed by all or a discrete portion of radiant energy corresponding to visible light, e.g., red light).
  • the identifying of a reference point may further include placing liquid (e.g., a fluorescein dye or other dye) on the intracorneal surface.
  • identifying the reference point 5012 involves alignment using any of the techniques described herein.
  • the reference point is marked by applying a dye to the cornea or otherwise spreading a material with known reflective properties onto the cornea.
  • the dye may be a substance that interacts with radiant energy to increase the visibility of a marking target or other visual cue.
  • the reference point may be marked by a dye with any suitable tool.
  • the tool is configured so that it bites into a corneal layer, e.g., an anterior layer of the epithelium, and delivers a thin ink line into the corneal layer in one embodiment.
  • the tool may be made sharp to bite into the epithelium.
  • the tool is configured to deliver the dye as discussed above upon being lightly pressed against the eye.
  • the reference point may be marked by making an impression (e.g., a physical depression) on a surface of the cornea with or without additional delivery of a dye.
  • the reference point may be marked by illuminating a light or other source of radiant energy, e.g., a marking target illuminator and projecting that light onto the cornea (e.g., by projecting a marking target).
  • any of the foregoing techniques for marking a reference point may be combined with techniques that make a mark that indicates the location of an axis of the eye, e.g., the visual axis or line-of-sight of the eye.
  • a mark indicates the approximate intersection of the visual axis and a surface of the cornea.
  • a mark is made approximately radially symmetrically disposed about the intersection of the visual axis and a surface of the cornea.
  • some techniques involve making a mark on an intracorneal surface.
  • the mark may be made by any suitable technique.
  • a mark is made by pressing an implement against the intracorneal surface.
  • the implement may form a depression that has a size and shape that facilitate placement of a mask.
  • the implement is configured to form a circular ring (e.g., a thin line of dye, or a physical depression, or both) with a diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of a mask to be implanted.
  • the circular ring can be formed to have a diameter between about 4 mm and about 5 mm.
  • the intracorneal surface is on the corneal flap 5008 in one technique.
  • the intracorneal surface is on an exposed surface of the cornea from which the flap was removed. This exposed surface is sometimes referred to as a tissue bed.
  • the corneal flap 5008 is lifted and thereafter is laid on an adjacent surface 5016 of the cornea 5004 .
  • the corneal flap 5008 is laid on a removable support 5020 , such as a sponge.
  • the removable support has a surface 5024 that is configured to maintain the native curvature of the corneal flap 5008 .
  • FIG. 65 shows that the marked reference point 5012 is helpful in positioning an implant on an intracorneal surface.
  • the marked reference point 5012 enables the implant to be positioned with respect to the visual axis of the eye.
  • the implant 5000 is positioned so that a centerline of the implant, indicated as M CL , extends through the marked reference point 5012 .
  • FIG. 65A illustrates another technique wherein a reference 5012 ′ is a ring or other two dimensional mark.
  • the implant 5000 may be placed so that an outer edge of the implant and the ring correspond, e.g., such that the ring and the implant 5000 share the same or substantially the same center.
  • the ring and the implant 5000 are aligned so that the centerline of the implant M CL is on the line of sight of the eye, as discussed above.
  • the ring is shown in dashed lines because in the illustrated technique, it is formed on the anterior surface of the corneal flap 5008 .
  • the corneal flap 5008 is closed by returning the corneal flap 5008 to the cornea 5004 with the implant 5000 on the corneal flap 5008 .
  • the corneal flap 5008 is closed by returning the corneal flap 5008 to the cornea 5004 over the implant 5000 , which previously was placed on the tissue bed (the exposed intracorneal surface).
  • the implant 5000 When the intracorneal surface is a stromal surface, the implant 5000 is placed on the stromal surface. At least a portion of the implant 5000 is covered. In some techniques, the implant 5000 is covered by returning a flap with the implant 5000 thereon to the cornea 5004 to cover the stromal surface. In one technique, the stromal surface is exposed by lifting an epithelial layer to expose stroma. In another technique, the stromal surface is exposed by removing an epithelial layer to expose stroma. In some techniques, an additional step of replacing the epithelial layer to at least partially cover the implant 5000 is performed.
  • the implant 5000 may be repositioned to some extent in some applications.
  • pressure is applied to the implant 5000 to move the implant into alignment with the reference point 5012 .
  • the pressure may be applied to the anterior surface of the cornea 5004 proximate an edge of the implant 5000 (e.g., directly above, above and outside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5000 , or above and inside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5000 ). This may cause the implant to move slightly away from the edge proximate which pressure is applied.
  • pressure is applied directly to the implant.
  • the implant 5000 may be repositioned in this manner if the reference point 5012 was marked on the flap 5008 or if the reference point 5012 was marked on the tissue bed.
  • pushing is accomplished by inserting a thin tool under the flap or into the pocket and directly moving the inlay.
  • FIG. 66 shows that a patient may also be treated by a method that positions an implant 5100 in a cornea 5104 , e.g., in a corneal pocket 5108 .
  • Any suitable tool or technique may be used to create or form the corneal pocket 5108 .
  • a blade e.g., a microkeratome
  • a laser e.g., a laser
  • an electrosurgical tool could be used to create or form a pocket in the cornea 5104 .
  • a reference point 5112 is identified on the cornea 5104 .
  • the reference point may be identified by any suitable technique, such as those discussed herein.
  • the reference point 5112 is marked by any suitable technique, such as those discussed herein.
  • the corneal pocket 5108 is created to expose an intracorneal surface 5116 .
  • the corneal pocket 5108 may be created at any suitable depth, for example at a depth within a range of from about 50 microns to about 300 microns from the anterior surface of the cornea 5104 .
  • the implant 5100 is positioned on the intracorneal surface 5116 .
  • the marked reference point 5112 is helpful in positioning the implant 5100 on the intracorneal surface 5116 .
  • the marked reference point 5112 enables the implant 5100 to be positioned with respect to the visual axis of the eye, as discussed above.
  • the implant 5100 is positioned so that a centerline M CL of the implant 5100 extends through or adjacent to the marked reference point 5112 .
  • FIG. 66A illustrates another technique wherein a reference 5112 ′ is a ring or other two dimensional mark.
  • the implant 5100 may be placed so that an outer edge of the implant and the ring correspond, e.g., such that the ring and the implant 5100 share the same or substantially the same center.
  • the ring and the implant 5100 are aligned so that the centerline of the implant M CL is on the line of sight of the eye, as discussed above.
  • the ring is shown in solid lines because in the illustrated embodiment, it is formed on the anterior surface of the cornea 5104 above the pocket 5108 .
  • the implant 5100 may be repositioned to some extent in some applications.
  • pressure is applied to the implant 5100 to move the implant into alignment with the reference point 5112 .
  • the pressure may be applied to the anterior surface of the cornea 5104 proximate an edge of the implant 5100 (e.g., directly above, above and outside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5100 , or above and inside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5100 ). This may cause the implant 5100 to move slightly away from the edge at which pressure is applied.
  • pressure is applied directly to the implant 5100 .
  • the masks can be at least partially opaque to visible light and UV stable in some embodiments.
  • the masks should be sufficiently biocompatible that the mask can reside adjacent or within eye tissue without harming the tissue.
  • the masks also should be relatively thin so that they are capable of being implanted in a thin ocular structure, such as the cornea. It may also be desirable for the masks generally to blend in with adjacent ocular tissue so that the presence of the masks in the eye is not visible to others.
  • the masks can be configured with a non-reflective surface.
  • the masks are corrosion-resistant.
  • the masks are flexible and resilient, as it may be desirable for masks that are compressed during deployment to expand to an uncompressed configuration subsequent to deployment.
  • the mask that is formed is a thin, micro-perforated, corneal implant that is bio-compatible and corrosion resistant in the human eye.
  • the mask has approximately 1000-3000 micro-perforations extending between a first, e.g., convex, surface and a second, e.g., concave, surface of the mask.
  • the micro-perforations can have a transverse dimension of on average between about 10 microns and about 25 microns.
  • the physical dimensions of the mask can vary depending on the clinical application and individual patient.
  • the mask is of a shape analogous to a washer, e.g., an annulus defined between an inner periphery and an outer periphery.
  • the mask can have an inner diameter of about 1.5 mm, an outer diameter of about 4 mm, and conform to a portion of the surface of a sphere having a radius of curvature of about 8 mm.
  • the curvature of the mask can vary, but it is generally selected to conform to the curvature of an anatomical feature, e.g., the cornea of an adult human eye.
  • the radius of curvature of the mask can be within a range of from about 7.8 mm to about 8.2 mm in some embodiments.
  • the radius of curvature of the mask can be within a range of from about 7.6 mm to about 8.4 mm in other embodiments.
  • the radius of curvature of the mask can be within a range of from about 7.4 mm to about 8.6 mm in other embodiments.
  • the radius of curvature of the mask can be within a range of from about 7.2 mm to about 8.8 mm in other embodiments.
  • the radius of curvature of the mask can be within a range of from about 7 mm to about 9 mm in other embodiments. In some embodiments, the radius of curvature of the mask can be less than 7 mm. In other embodiments, the radius of curvature of the mask can be more than 9 mm.
  • the mask can have a thickness between the convex and concave surfaces of about 10 microns or less or about 7 microns or less.
  • the dimensions listed in this paragraph illustrate a variety of examples. Other dimensions and features discussed elsewhere herein could be substituted for or added to the dimensions discussed in this paragraph.
  • the color of the mask is cosmetically acceptable in one embodiment for implantation in the human cornea, e.g., having a black or a dark color appearance at least on an anterior (convex) side of the annulus.
  • the features and performance characteristics discussed above are largely a function of the materials used to form the masks, the mask design, and manufacturing techniques used. Applicants have discovered that some metals are among the materials that can be configured to exhibit many of these characteristics and that processes that form thin films (e.g., thin films of metal) are well suited for making such ocular implants. Physical vapor deposition, sputtering, electro-depositing and other similar processes discussed herein are particularly well suited for making ocular implants of thin metal films.
  • the techniques discussed herein for forming masks of one or more metal layers can be tailored to reduce the visibility of the masks and can enhance characteristics related to longevity, e.g., corrosion resistance.
  • FIGS. 67 a - 67 d illustrate techniques that can be used to form a mask or an implant for treating presbyopia, such as one similar to the masks and implants discussed herein. These techniques involve forming layers of material, at least one of which is configured for application to a human eye. As discussed below, the layers of material can include any combination of one or more of a release layer, a mask layer, and a sacrificial layer. In some embodiments, multiple mask layers are provided. As discussed further below, one or more layer can be configured as a “cosmetic layer”, which is a broad term encompassing a layer or a surface that provides an appearance desirable to the patient or other person. A cosmetic layer can reduce the visibility of the mask in the eye of the patient.
  • a cosmetic layer is a broad term encompassing a layer or a surface that provides an appearance desirable to the patient or other person.
  • a cosmetic layer can reduce the visibility of the mask in the eye of the patient.
  • a cosmetic layer can also act as a “non-reflective” layer that reduces the amount of light reflected off the mask.
  • the cosmetic layer can be a mask layer.
  • one or more of the mask layers can be configured to reduce or prevent corrosion (e.g., galvanic corrosion) of the mask.
  • corrosion e.g., galvanic corrosion
  • one or more of the mask layers can be configured to substantially enhance resistance to galvanic corrosion and other modes of mask degradation that would compromise the longevity of the mask.
  • the term “sacrificial layer” is a broad term used in its ordinary sense and includes any layer that is formed during a method for making a mask that is primarily or entirely to facilitate other aspects of the method of making and also includes layers that are entirely or substantially removed during the process or are not part of the mask.
  • a “release layer” is a type of sacrificial layer that is intended to facilitate separating one structure from another, e.g., to separate a mask from a substrate, as discussed below. Any suitable technique for forming the layers of material can be exploited. Techniques for forming layers using thin film sputtering are discussed first. The materials for forming the mask layer(s), discussed in connection with thin film sputtering, may also be used with other techniques for forming the mask layer(s). Other techniques that can be used are discussed thereafter.
  • thin film sputtering is a convenient technique for making a mask that is capable of being implanted in a human eye for treating presbyopia.
  • Thin film sputtering is particularly well suited for making a corneal inlay.
  • Many thin film sputtering techniques include three steps: 1) generating atomic or ionic species from a target comprising a metal or an alloy material; 2) transporting the species from the target to a substrate through a gas or a plasma medium; and 3) condensing the species on a surface of a substrate to form a solid thin film.
  • Argon gas can be used to generate a plasma to enable these process steps.
  • the target can comprise any metal or metal alloy and the substrate can comprise a polished silicon or glass wafer or a wafer of another suitable material.
  • a non-planar substrate is used to form one or more mask layer, release layer, or sacrificial layer.
  • a planar substrate is used to form a layer.
  • FIG. 67 a is a cross-sectional view of a portion of a substrate 6000 that can be used in a sputtering process to form a mask or other thin ocular implant.
  • the substrate 6000 is provided with a top surface 6004 that includes a mask forming feature 6008 .
  • the substrate 6000 also includes a planar portion 6012 that at least partially surrounds the mask forming feature 6008 .
  • the planar portion 6012 is a region of the substrate 6000 that can be located between adjacent mask forming features. Although adjacent mask forming features are not shown, such features can be located at regular or non-regular intervals across the substrate 6000 .
  • the substrate 6000 can be configured with any number of mask forming features 6008 that will fit on the substrate 6000 .
  • the mask forming feature 6008 can be configured such that later process steps produce a mask shaped to conform to the portion of the ocular anatomy where the mask is to be implanted.
  • the mask forming feature 6008 can comprise a curved profile 6016 that corresponds to the curvature of a layer of the cornea, or other ocular feature.
  • the mask forming feature 6008 includes an annular surface 6020 that surrounds a central axis 6024 .
  • the annular surface 6020 is substantially smooth, resulting in the formation of a smooth layer, e.g., one without discontinuities, pores, or apertures within the boundaries of the annular surface 6020 .
  • the annular surface 6020 is configured to produce micro-perforations, pores, or holes that form at least a part of a nutrient transport structure similar to those discussed herein. In other embodiments, the annular surface 6020 is configured to produce a desired surface condition of a mask formed thereon that correlates to a desired blending characteristic.
  • the mask forming feature 6008 also includes a central region 6028 which is centered on the central axis 6024 in one embodiment.
  • FIG. 67 a shows the profile of the annular surface 6020 at a section plane that extends through the center of the mask forming feature 6008 and that includes the central axis 6024 .
  • the profile of the annular surface 6020 includes a first curved profile 6016 a and a second curved profile 6016 b .
  • the first and second curved profiles 6016 a , 6016 b have generally the same arcuate length and curvature in one embodiment.
  • the annular surface 6020 can be configured to form micro-perforations or pores that form at least a part of a nutrient transport structure.
  • the profiles 6016 a , 6016 b can include a nutrient transport forming feature, such as one or more discontinuities, depressions, holes, or wells that are configured to prevent or substantially prevent bridging across the nutrient transport forming feature in a layer formed above the profiles.
  • a nutrient transport forming feature such as one or more discontinuities, depressions, holes, or wells that are configured to prevent or substantially prevent bridging across the nutrient transport forming feature in a layer formed above the profiles.
  • substantially prevent means that any bridging that occurs across the nutrient transport forming feature is removable by a later process that will not damage the layer near the feature.
  • holes are provided that have a diameter selected to provide an appropriate aspect ratio for nutrient transport features in the mask.
  • the diameter of the holes can be any diameter that provides a ratio of hole size (e.g., diameter) divided by layer thickness that is greater than one.
  • the diameter of the holes is selected to provide a ratio of hole size (e.g., diameter) divided by layer thickness that is about one.
  • Nutrient transport structures can be formed in other ways, e.g., using photolithography, as discussed below.
  • the annular surface 6020 can be configured to form a mask with an anterior surface having a selected surface condition.
  • one technique produces a mask with a surface roughness that produces a desired blending characteristic.
  • a blending characteristic is a characteristic that makes an implant partially or completely non-observable by persons other than the patient.
  • Some materials that can be used in the techniques discussed below to form a mask from one or more layers of thin metal can be made to appear darker by increasing the roughness of a surface that is visible when the mask is implanted, e.g., the anterior surface.
  • a cosmetic layer in addition to roughening the surface of a mask, can be applied to provide a desirable visual appearance, e.g., to further reduce the visibility of the mask. As discussed further below, the cosmetic layer can have additional utility, such as providing or enhancing corrosion resistance.
  • the roughness of an anterior surface of a mask can be increased by increasing the roughness of the annular surface 6020 .
  • the mask forming feature 6008 can be configured to define one or more edges of a mask formed on the annular surface 6020 in a later process stage.
  • the annular surface 6020 has an inner periphery 6032 and an outer periphery 6036 .
  • the inner and outer periphery 6032 , 6036 of the annular surface 6020 correspond to an inner and an outer periphery of a mask formed on the annular surface 6020 in a later process stage.
  • One or both of the inner and outer peripheries 6032 , 6036 can be eliminated in some techniques.
  • forming a mask on the substrate 6000 can be combined with a process for defining an inner periphery of a mask, an outer periphery of a mask, or both an inner and an outer periphery of a mask.
  • the inner periphery 6032 is eliminated.
  • an inner periphery of the mask can be formed using any suitable technique, e.g., machining, cutting, laser drilling or laser cutting.
  • a sheet of masks formed on a plurality of mask forming features 6008 is mounted to a fixture and a laser indexes from one mask to the next cutting out a central portion to define an inner periphery.
  • the outer periphery 6036 can be eliminated in another technique where it is desirable to form a mask locator structure that extends from an outer periphery of a mask. After one or more masks have been formed in this manner, a laser or other machining implement can be operated to act on the mask to define an outer periphery of the mask and/or a locator structure.
  • the outer periphery 6036 also could be modified such that a locator structure could be defined during the formation of a mask on the substrate.
  • the outer periphery 6036 could include a substantially circular portion and an elongated portion that extends outwardly from the substantially circular portion. More details of masks with locator structures that could be formed using this or a similar technique are discussed in an application filed Apr. 14, 2005 bearing the title “Ocular Inlay With Locator” (Attorney Docket No. ACUFO.024A).
  • the inner periphery 6032 is a substantially circular periphery.
  • the outer periphery 6036 is a substantially circular periphery.
  • both the inner and outer periphery 6032 , 6036 are substantially circular and are centered on the central axis 6024 .
  • the inner and outer peripheries 6032 , 6036 have different shapes, e.g., a circular inner periphery and a non-circular outer periphery, a non-circular inner periphery and a circular outer periphery, etc.
  • at least one of the inner and outer periphery 6032 , 6036 is not centered on the central axis 6024 .
  • the inner and outer periphery are circular but at least one of the inner and outer periphery 6032 , 6036 is not centered on the central axis 6024 .
  • the annular surface 6020 (and the mask formed thereon at a later stage) can be asymmetrical about the central axis 6024 in some embodiments.
  • the inner and outer periphery 6032 , 6036 can have other configurations such that the annular surface 6020 (and the mask formed thereon at a later stage) has other shapes. Other shapes for the annular surface 6020 that correspond to the mask designs described herein can be provided.
  • the substrate 6000 can comprise a wafer of silicon, a glass or Pyrex slide, a wafer of ceramic material, or any other suitable material or arrangement.
  • the size of the substrate 6000 is not critical, and can be any size practical for processing through a sputter process chamber.
  • a typical circular substrate wafer size is 4′′ diameter, though other sizes can be used.
  • the mask forming feature 6008 includes an annular inner recess 6040 and an annular outer recess 6044 formed in the substrate 6000 .
  • the inner recess 6040 is a U-shaped well or channel having a transverse dimension that extends from the inner periphery 6032 of the annular surface 6020 toward the central axis 6024 in one embodiment.
  • the outer recess 6044 is a U-shaped well or channel having a transverse dimension that extends from the outer periphery 6036 of the annular surface 6020 away from the central axis 6024 in one embodiment.
  • the inner recess 6040 and outer recess 6044 may be formed in any of a variety of ways such as mechanical grinding or chemical etching.
  • the width and the depth of the inner and outer recesses 6040 , 6044 are selected to be large enough to prevent material layers formed in later stages from bridging or extending across the recesses 6040 , 6044 .
  • One technique for preventing bridging is to provide that the width of the recesses 6040 , 6044 is approximately equal to the thickness of a layer to be formed on the substrate 6000 .
  • Another technique for preventing bridging is to provide that the width of the recesses 6040 , 6044 is greater than the thickness of a layer to be formed on the substrate 6000 .
  • the inner and outer recesses 6040 , 6044 enable layers of material to be deposited on the substrate 6000 in the desired shape, e.g., defining the inner and outer periphery of a mask at a later stage.
  • This arrangement enables a mask to be deposited (formed) substantially in the same shape in which it is to be implanted. This advantageously eliminates later process steps of defining the inner and outer periphery of the mask.
  • Other processes described below employ additional steps to define at least one aspect of a mask, e.g., its inner or outer periphery or curvature.
  • the dimensions of the inner and outer periphery 6032 , 6036 and the curvature of the first and second curved profiles 6016 a , 6016 b preferably are selected to correspond to the inner and outer dimensions and the curvature of a mask respectively. These dimensions are discussed above in connection with the various masks described herein.
  • the inner and outer periphery 6032 , 6036 of the mask forming feature 6008 have the same dimensions as a mask to be formed thereon and the curvature of the first and second curved profiles 6016 a , 6016 b are the same as the desired curvature of the mask to be formed thereon.
  • the mask forming feature 6008 protrudes from the top surface 6004 of the substrate 6000 .
  • the mask forming feature 6008 presents a convex surface upon which a material layer may be formed.
  • a release layer, a mask layer, a sacrificial layer, or another material layer may be formed on the convex surface of the mask forming feature 6008 or on a layer of material formed on the convex surface.
  • FIG. 67 a shows that in one embodiment, the first and second curved profiles 6016 a , 6016 b are convex curved profiles.
  • a mask is initially formed in a flat configuration on a planar top surface of a substrate that is otherwise similar to the substrate 6000 .
  • This variation may be used to form a mask that is sufficiently flexible to conform to an ocular structure, e.g., a corneal layer, when applied to the structure, and thus does not require any preformed shape.
  • one or more further steps are performed (such as thermoforming or compression, depending upon the mask material) to shape the mask to conform to an ocular structure after the mask is formed on the planar top surface.
  • a continuous imperforate curved profile is provided by eliminating the inner recess 6040 .
  • this arrangement could be used in a process wherein an inner periphery of a mask is defined after sputtering.
  • the inner periphery of a mask can be defined by cutting a central region out of the mask. Any suitable technique can be used to cut out the central region.
  • the central region could be cut out by a laser cutting process. Laser cutting can be used to otherwise further define a mask, e.g., by separating a mask from a neighboring mask or by forming nutrient transport apertures in a portion of a mask.
  • the mask forming feature 6008 includes a concave surface upon which a mask can be formed.
  • the mask forming feature 6008 includes a recess in the top surface 6004 of the substrate 6000 .
  • a mask can be formed on the substrate 6000 with one surface of the mask exposed, e.g., with one surface of the mask not in contact with the substrate 6000 or with any layer between the substrate 6000 and the mask.
  • the substrate 6000 can be prepared using any technique that will facilitate the formation of thin film layers thereon.
  • the top surface 6004 can be cleaned and polished to facilitate sputtering processes, as described below, or other mask forming processes.
  • the substrate 6000 is cleaned at an elevated temperature using a cleaning solution or agent for a fixed period.
  • the substrate 6000 can be cleaned in an RCA cleaning solution (e.g., a mixture of ammonium hydroxide, hydrogen peroxide and DI water in the ratio of 1:1:5 respectively) at 80 degrees Celsius for 30 minutes to remove impurities such as grease and dust particles.
  • RCA cleaning solution e.g., a mixture of ammonium hydroxide, hydrogen peroxide and DI water in the ratio of 1:1:5 respectively
  • other cleaning solutions can be used, such as Micro-90 (a commercially available mixture of salts of sodium, ammonium and acids).
  • the substrate 600 is prepared by providing a roughness level that is selected to provide a desired blending characteristic.
  • sputtering is an advantageous method of forming thin layers of material on a substrate for forming an ocular implant.
  • Sputtering is usually performed in a vacuum or very low pressure and so a process chamber is normally provided in which the substrate 6000 can be mounted.
  • the substrate 6000 is mounted on a table that is rotated during the process. Rotation of the substrate results in a more uniform deposition of material, providing a more uniform thickness, for example.
  • the process chamber preferably also is configured to receive a target comprising a target material. In some arrangements, the process chamber is capable of accommodating multiple targets so that different materials can be sputtered, if needed.
  • the process chamber is capable of multiple sputtering modes, for example enabling sputtering from one or all the targets in one or both of a radio frequency (RF) sputtering mode and a direct current (DC) sputtering mode.
  • RF radio frequency
  • DC direct current
  • a vacuum in the range of low 10 ⁇ 7 torr is induced in the process chamber by one or more vacuum pumps, which can be a mechanical pump, cryo pump or turbo molecular pump.
  • Argon gas or other inert gas
  • a high voltage from a DC or an RF power supply is applied to the target material to create a glow discharge.
  • the glow discharge dissociates the argon atoms into a cloud of ions called a plasma.
  • the ions in the plasma can be accelerated toward the target material. Collision of the ions with the target causes atoms of the target material to be dislodged from the surface of the target. Thereafter, the dislodged atoms condense on the exposed surfaces of the substrate 6000 .
  • a thin film of the material forms on the substrate 6000 .
  • FIG. 67 b illustrates a later stage of a method for making a mask in which a release layer 6080 has been formed on the mask forming feature 6008 of the substrate 6000 .
  • a release layer is a type of sacrificial layer that facilitates the separation of a mask from the substrate 6000 .
  • the release layer 6080 can be formed using the sputtering process described above or any suitable variation thereof.
  • the release layer 6080 is formed by using a target comprised of a material that can be eroded away by another process, e.g., by etching, without damaging other layers that form a part of or are coupled with a mask.
  • the material used to form the release layer 6080 may be a metal, such as chromium, aluminum, copper, TiCuAg, 90% tungsten 10% titanium (released with hydrogen peroxide), or any other metal or alloy. Other materials can be used if the release layer is to enable separation of mask layers from the substrate 6000 by a non-erosion process.
  • the release layer 6080 is sputter deposited to a thickness of about 500 ⁇ or more on the substrate 6000 .
  • the release layer 6080 can be sputter deposited using RF sputtering at argon pressure of about 2 millitorr.
  • the thickness of the release layer 6080 can vary.
  • the release layer could have a thickness of a few hundred angstroms, a thickness less than 500 ⁇ , a thickness of more than about 500 ⁇ , a thickness of a thousand angstroms, or more.
  • FIG. 67 b shows that the arrangement of the mask forming feature 6008 prevents the release layer 6080 from bridging from the planar portion 6012 to the annular surface 6020 and from the annular surface 6020 to the central region 6028 .
  • This aspect of the mask forming feature 6008 facilitates separation of a mask formed at a later stage of the process from the substrate 6000 because the mask can be released from the inner periphery and from the outer periphery of the mask forming feature 6008 .
  • planar portion 6012 , annular surface 6020 , and central region 6028 are not fully isolated from each other and the process for separating the mask from the mask forming feature 6008 operates primarily from one of the inner periphery 6032 and the outer periphery 6036 .
  • FIG. 67 c shows that after the release layer 6080 is formed on the substrate 6000 , a mask layer 6100 can be formed on the release layer 6080 .
  • FIG. 67 c should not be taken to suggest that no other process steps are performed between formation of the release layer 6080 and the mask layer 6100 .
  • the release layer 6080 is modified prior to formation of the mask layer 6100 . It may be desirable to modify the release layer 6080 so that it has a desired thickness, e.g., by removing a portion of the release layer 6080 .
  • the average thickness of the release layer 6080 could be reduced across the entire mask forming feature 6008 .
  • the thickness of the release layer 6080 could be reduced at a selected location of the mask forming feature 6008 .
  • the mask layer 6100 can be formed by any suitable technique, such as one of the sputtering processes discussed above or a variation thereof.
  • a mask for treating an ocular ailment is entirely or substantially entirely formed by a sputtering or other vapor deposition process.
  • substantially entirely formed means that at least the entire thickness of the mask is formed by this process and that further steps do not add thickness to the mask, but may reduce the thickness, form cutouts in the mask, and form the mask.
  • the mask layer 6100 can be a layer configured to facilitate handling of a mask formed by the processes described herein or to facilitate application of such a mask to an eye of a patient.
  • the mask is substantially entirely formed by the process, e.g., the mask layer 6100 forms the mask.
  • the mask layer 6100 preferably is able to substantially improve the patient's vision.
  • the mask layer 6100 preferably is made to be at least partially opaque.
  • the mask layer 6100 preferably is sufficiently stable to environmental conditions, such as UV radiation.
  • the mask layer 6100 preferably is sufficiently biocompatible so that it can be implanted in an eye of a human.
  • a variety of metals have these properties and are capable of being formed as thin structures that can be applied to the eye, e.g., as corneal inlays.
  • nitinol or TiNi and other derivative alloys of TiNi, gold, tantalum, platinum, titanium (e.g., titanium 6 aluminum 4 vanadium), and stainless steel are believed to have these properties and to be able to perform well in ocular applications.
  • the mask layer 6100 can be formed of any of these materials or of any other suitable biocompatible material.
  • the biocompatible material can also be selected from a class of materials that will not corrode or otherwise degrade during the useful life of the mask 6200 .
  • Selection of such a material to form the mask layer 6100 is one technique for configuring a surface of a mask to not corrode.
  • materials include noble metals generally and in particular those noble metals specifically described herein.
  • another technique for configuring a surface of a mask to not corrode involves forming a second layer, which may be a cosmetic layer, on the mask layer 6100 where the second layer is formed of a material selected to prevent corrosion or to substantially reduce the likelihood that the mask will corrode or otherwise degrade when the mask is applied to the patient.
  • a process chamber can be provided with multiple targets, e.g., one for a mask layer and another for a release layer. Three or more targets can be provided, e.g., a release layer target, a first mask layer target, and a second mask layer target.
  • the first mask layer can comprise the majority of the mask and the second layer can comprise a cosmetic layer, which can be relatively thin.
  • the release layer 6080 and the mask layer 6100 are formed using different modes of the chamber.
  • the mask layer 6100 can be sputtered using DC sputtering and the release layer 6080 using RF sputtering.
  • a mask layer comprising an alloy material can be sputtered from a single alloy target or by co-sputtering from multiple targets.
  • the mask layer 6100 and the release layer 6080 are sputtered in separate chambers.
  • the substrate 6000 is loaded into a process chamber and a vacuum is induced in the chamber in a low 10 ⁇ 7 torr range.
  • the mask layer 6100 is sputter deposited on top of the release layer 6080 using DC sputtering at an argon pressure of about 2 millitorr.
  • the mask layer 6100 can be sputtered to any desirable thickness, e.g., any of the thicknesses of the mask 3000 discussed above.
  • deposition techniques that may be used to form a mask layer, a release layer, or a sacrificial layer include vapor deposition, vacuum evaporation, molecular beam epitaxy, evaporative deposition, pulsed laser deposition, ion plating, ion implantation, and laser surface alloying. Other types of vapor deposition and other techniques for forming layers are discussed below.
  • FIG. 67 d illustrates a technique for separating a mask 6200 formed by the process discussed in connection with FIGS. 67 a - 67 c from a substrate 6000 .
  • the release layer 6080 is a sacrificial layer, e.g., a layer that facilitates the formation of the mask 6200 and that is substantially or entirely removed from the mask 6200 during the process of making the mask 6200 .
  • the mask 6200 may be separated from the substrate 6000 by any suitable technique.
  • the release layer 6080 is eroded away so that a gap forms between the annular surface 6020 and the mask 6200 . When the release layer 6080 is fully eroded, the mask 6200 is entirely separated from the substrate 6000 .
  • the inner and outer recesses 6040 , 6044 enable the process of eroding the release layer 6080 to proceed from both sides of the annular surface 6020 . This may significantly shorten the process time for separating the mask 6200 from the substrate 6000 .
  • the substrate 6000 with the release and mask layers 6080 , 6100 formed thereon is immersed in a bath containing an agent capable of eroding the release layer 6080 , as discussed above.
  • the agent may be a chemical that will selectively etch the release layer 6080 but have no harmful effect on the mask layer 6100 .
  • the etchant or other chemical or agent used to release the layer 6100 from the substrate 6000 does not react strongly with the layer 6100 .
  • the release layer 6080 is formed of chromium and the mask is separated from the substrate by contacting the release layer 6080 with a chromium etchant.
  • the chromium release layer can be submerged in a chromium etching bath.
  • FIG. 67 d shows that separating the mask 6200 from the substrate 6000 generates one or more pieces of scrap material 6204 , which may correspond to material deposited at the same time as the mask layer 6100 .
  • the scrap material 6204 is separated from the mask 6200 and discarded.
  • FIG. 68 illustrates a mask 6300 that can be formed by a method where the mask is configured to not corrode.
  • FIG. 68 also illustrates a mask that can be formed by a method where the mask is configured to be inert.
  • the mask 6300 is formed with two or more separate layers to provide desirable characteristics.
  • one layer can be formed of a material that has advantageous properties for minimally invasive implantation and a second layer can be formed as a cosmetic layer, providing a suitable visual appearance.
  • the method for forming the mask 6300 is similar to the method illustrated in FIGS. 67 a - 67 d , except as described differently below.
  • the mask 6300 includes a first mask layer 6304 and a second mask layer 6308 .
  • the first mask layer 6304 can be formed using any suitable technique, including those described herein.
  • the first mask layer 6304 can be formed on a substrate that can be similar to the substrate 6000 of FIGS. 67 a - 67 d or any suitable variation thereof.
  • the mask 6300 has an anterior surface 6312 and a posterior surface. The posterior surface is not shown, but is on the opposite side of the mask 6300 from the anterior surface 6312 .
  • the anterior surface can be any surface or interface between layers that generally faces forward or out of the eye when applied.
  • the anterior surface can be a surface that contacts a corneal layer when the mask 6300 is applied.
  • the anterior surface 6312 is a surface located internally in the mask 6300 .
  • the anterior surface 6312 can be located at an interface between the first and second layers 6304 , 6308 .
  • the anterior surface can be an external surface of the mask 6300 .
  • the first and second mask layers 6304 , 6308 may take any suitable form.
  • the first and second mask layers 6304 , 6308 can be formed of the same or different materials.
  • the first mask layer 6304 is formed of a first material that is selected to have any of the advantageous mask properties described above.
  • the second mask layer 6308 can be formed of a second material selected or configured to have any of the advantageous cosmetic or visual properties described above.
  • first and second materials are different materials
  • the combination of materials used for the first and second mask layers 6304 , 6308 should be carefully selected. This is particularly true where the selection of materials could cause a potentially destabilizing reaction to occur. For example, where there is sufficient galvanic potential between the first layer 6304 and the second layer 6308 , corrosion could occur along the interface.
  • a surface of the mask 6300 can be configured to not corrode by selecting a first material for the first mask layer 6304 and a second material for the second mask layer 6308 where the first and second materials have similar galvanic potential.
  • a third layer (not shown) configured to prevent the material of the first mask layer 6304 from interacting chemically or otherwise with the second mask layer 6308 may be formed between the first and second mask layers 6304 , 6308 .
  • the third layer may be formed of an interface material that at least substantially prevents electrical communication between the first and second mask layers 6304 , 6308 .
  • the interface material could be a suitable polymer or another insulating material.
  • the third layer could provide additional functionality, such as providing mechanical coupling between the first and second mask layers 6304 , 6308 .
  • the third layer may be a layer of adhesive.
  • the first mask layer 6304 could be formed of a biocompatible metal, as described herein.
  • noble metals have some advantageous characteristics. For example, noble metals are more resistant to some processes that could degrade the mask 6300 , such as galvanic reactions. Such reactions can result if additional layers of material are formed on the first mask layer 6304 where a galvanic potential between the layers is created that is sufficient to drive a galvanic reaction. Also, noble metals are generally slow to react, and in at least this sense, generally are inert. In particular, as discussed further below, combining a first layer of a noble metal and a second layer of carbon provides a mask arrangement that will be substantially resistant to corrosion due to a galvanic reaction.
  • Another class of materials that may be advantageous in some applications includes materials that have superelastic or shape memory characteristics. Such materials include nitinol and other similar alloys of nickel and titanium. Such materials are particularly well suited for implantation using less invasive techniques, such as implantation in a pocket. These materials are advantageous in that they can enable a mask to be folded, rolled, or otherwise compressed to a relatively low profile so that the mask can fit through a relatively small incision.
  • a “relatively small incision” is one that is substantially less than the diameter of a mask. For example, an incision that is about two-thirds or less than about two-thirds the diameter of a mask is a relatively small incision in some procedures.
  • an incision that is about one-half or less than about one-half the diameter of a mask is a relatively small incision.
  • an incision that is about one-third or less than about one-third the diameter of a mask is a “relatively small incision” in some procedures.
  • FIG. 68 shows the second mask layer 6308 of the mask 6300 , which can be formed after the first layer 6304 is formed in some processes.
  • the second mask layer 6308 can be formed on a surface of the first layer 6304 .
  • the second layer 6308 can be formed to provide a desirable visual appearance to persons other than the patient.
  • the second layer 6308 can be configured to be a non-reflective layer.
  • a non-reflective layer is useful where the material forming the first layer 6304 is a shiny material, e.g., a shiny metal material.
  • Forming a non-reflective second mask layer can darken the appearance of the mask 6300 . By darkening the appearance of the mask 6300 , the presence of the mask 6300 in a patient's eye can be made less apparent to others.
  • the second layer 6308 can be formed as a cosmetic layer on the anterior surface 6312 of the mask 6300 .
  • a cosmetic layer can be formed to reduce the visibility of the implant within the patient's eye.
  • the cosmetic layer may be tailored for a patient.
  • the second layer 6308 is formed as a cosmetic layer that has an appearance similar to that of the pupil.
  • a cosmetic layer can be formed that has a color similar to the color of the iris near an outer periphery of the mask and that has a color similar to the color of the pupil near the inner periphery of the mask.
  • a technique for cosmetically altering the mask 6300 is to roughen a surface that will be visible when the mask 6300 is applied, e.g., the anterior surface 6312 .
  • the surface becomes less reflective and therefore less visible in the eye of the patient to others.
  • a mask can be made less visible by both roughening the anterior surface 6312 and by providing a cosmetic layer, e.g., on the anterior surface 6312 of a first layer.
  • the second layer 6308 may be formed by any suitable process, such as a depositing process similar to those described herein or a coating technique.
  • noble metals are suitable for forming the first mask layer 6304 . These materials are suitable because they are relatively inert and are biocompatible. Also, these materials substantially reduce the likelihood that corrosion will occur in the presence of carbon, which is one material that can be used to form the second layer 6308 . Carbon is suitable for the second layer because it blends in with the pupil and thus provides a desirable cosmetic appearance. Carbon can be formed as the second layer 6308 by any suitable process. The carbon layer should be thick enough to provide the desired cosmetic result, e.g., making the mask 6300 unobtrusive or not visible to others when implanted in the eye of a patient. In some applications, the thickness of the second layer 6308 is regulated such that it is not thicker than necessary to provide the cosmetic effect.
  • This arrangement has the advantage of maintaining the low profile nature of the mask 6300 .
  • the mask 6300 can be more easily folded or otherwise handled during implantation procedures.
  • the mask 6300 will be less likely to affect the curvature of the anterior surface of the cornea so that the mask 6300 will not affect the refractive properties of the cornea in which it is applied.
  • the second mask layer 6308 or the mask 6300 can be thicker, but should not interfere with the implantability or wearability of the mask 6300 .
  • the thickness of the mask can vary and can be any of the thicknesses discussed herein.
  • the thickness of the second layer 6308 can be a fraction of the overall thickness of the mask 6300 , e.g., one percent or less than the thickness of the mask 6300 , one to ten percent of the thickness of the mask 6300 , ten to twenty percent of the thickness of the mask 6300 , twenty to thirty percent of the thickness of the mask 6300 , or more than thirty percent of the thickness of the mask.
  • Carbon can be co-deposited with a noble metal in a sputtering or in an electro-deposition process, for example.
  • the carbon layer preferably is formed on a noble metal layer such that the carbon adheres to the noble metal layer.
  • Nobel metals can be combined with other suitable materials that can provide suitable cosmetic appearance, e.g., silicon carbide.
  • these and other similar processes can employ a suitable substrate, e.g., one similar to the substrate 6000 , to form one or more masks that are not connected to each other during the formation of the layers 6304 , 6308 .
  • these processes can form a sheet of interconnected masks on a suitable substrate such that the masks can be separated from each other during a later processing stage.
  • a plurality of interconnected masks can be formed by the processes described herein and later separated from each other by any suitable process, such as machining, laser cutting, chemical etching, or another similar process.
  • masks can be made of mask layers that initially are formed flat or with a selected curvature.
  • a curvature can be induced in the mask at a later process stage.
  • a mask can be cup-formed after one or more layers thereof have been formed in a flat configuration.
  • a mask is urged into contact with a shaping surface, which can have a part-spherical contour.
  • the shaping surface is a surface of a mold.
  • a mold is provided that includes a convex surface and a concave surface.
  • a mask that has been formed by the techniques described above can be inserted into the mold in a flat or non-formed configuration between the convex and concave surfaces. Thereafter, the convex and concave surfaces are brought into close proximity, urging the mask into the desired shape.
  • the mask can be processed further such that the mask maintains the curvature of the shaping surface.
  • the mask can be heat treated while being held against one or more shaping surfaces.
  • the mask is placed in an elevated temperature environment for a time sufficient to cause the stress in the material of the mask to be released. This will result in the mask being in a relaxed state when in the shape of the mold.
  • the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 500 degrees Fahrenheit or more.
  • the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 500 degrees Celsius or more.
  • the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 300 degrees Fahrenheit or more.
  • the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 300 degrees Celsius or more. In one technique, the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 250 degrees Fahrenheit or more. In another technique, the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 250 degrees Celsius or more. After heat treating, the mask will maintain the shape of the shaping surface without significant strain.
  • the substrate can be configured to produce porous or smooth layers for different applications. Porous layers can be produced using substrate with a pattern of protrusions, for example.
  • one or more process variables can be altered to produce a mask layer characteristic, such as porosity. For example, the rate or speed of layer formation, e.g., the rate of electro-deposition, can be selected to provide a more porous layer. In one technique, a relatively high rate of electro-deposition produces a more porous mask layer or mask.
  • nitinol and other similar materials are advantageous in some application.
  • a second material is selected to form the second mask layer 6308 that will not be degraded by a chemical or biological reaction, such as galvanic corrosion.
  • the second material can be selected such that no or an insubstantial amount of galvanic potential exists between the first and second mask layers 6304 , 6308 .
  • One material that can be used for the second material is titanium oxide. In some environments, e.g., in the presence of oxygen, titanium oxide will form on an exposed surface of titanium or a titanium alloy. Thus, the second layer 6308 also can be formed by exposure to oxygen.
  • a sufficiently thick layer of titanium oxide formed on the titanium or titanium alloy surface will passivate the titanium or titanium alloy surface, e.g., configuring the mask for little or no corrosion at that surface.
  • Another material that can be used for the second material is silicon carbide.
  • Other similar materials that can be combined with nitinol or similar alloys without producing galvanic corrosion can be selected as the second material.
  • an anterior surface of the mask can be coated to reduce the visibility of the mask 6300 when applied to a patient.
  • the anterior surface 6312 could be coated with at least one of any of the materials discussed above in connection with the second mask layer 6308 , or an organic dye, an inorganic pigment, or other compounds, such as black iron oxide.
  • the second mask layer 6308 can be formed of a suitable polymeric material, e.g., a polymeric material that reduces the reflectivity of the first mask layer 6304 . Polymeric materials are not subject to galvanic reactions.
  • the second mask layer 6308 is formed of a mixture of a polymeric material and a suitable dye to provide a desirable cosmetic effect, as discussed herein.
  • FIGS. 67 a - 67 d enable a mask to be formed in substantially the same configuration in which it is to be implanted in the eye of a patient. As discussed above, this is achieved in part by providing a substrate with a mask forming feature that is shaped to correspond to the shape of the ocular anatomy in the region of the eye where the mask is to be applied. This may be achieved by providing the mask forming feature with a shape that is similar to the shape of a layer of corneal tissue where the mask is to be implanted in the corneal.
  • the process also facilitates application of the mask to the human eye by being capable of producing the mask with certain dimensions tightly controlled. For example, the process enables a mask to be formed that is thin enough to be implanted in the cornea without adversely affecting the adjacent corneal tissue.
  • one variation of the forgoing method of making a mask employs a substrate that is similar to the substrate 6000 but that is substantially planar rather than shaped. This process will form a mask that is similar to the mask 6200 , but that also initially is substantially planar.
  • a substantially planar mask 6200 may be thin enough to be applied to an eye and to conform to the native anatomy, e.g., to the curvature of the cornea, when applied.
  • “induce a permanent shape” is a broad term and it is used in its ordinary meaning and it includes forming the mask to retain its shape in the absence of a force other than gravity. This shape does not prevent the mask from flexing to an extent when applied to the eye or when acted on by ocular structures.
  • Any suitable process can be used to induce a shape in a mask.
  • One such process involves placing the mask on or in a mandrel, engaging the mask with a member to cause it to take on the desired shape, and heat treating the mask to cause it to maintain that shape. This process is discussed in more detail in U.S. Pat. No. 6,746,890, which is hereby expressly incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • the mask 4400 is formed with holes that extend from an anterior surface to a posterior surface. Such holes may be formed by depositing a plurality of layers with holes formed in them. The location of the holes in adjacent layers can be important, as discussed above. For example, the location of holes can reduce the production of diffraction patterns. The configuration and location and orientation of the holes can be adequately controlled using sacrificial layers and photolithography, as is discussed in more detail in U.S. Pat. No. 6,746,890, which is incorporated by reference herein above. Holes, sometimes referred to herein as “micro-perforations” or “perforations”, can also be formed in a process that provides a substrate with nutrient transport forming features, as discussed above.
  • one variation of the foregoing process provides a mask structure that enables a mask to be handled, e.g., while being manufactured, shipped, or applied by a surgeon to the patient's eye.
  • some embodiments of masks configured to be applied to an eye are very thin. Stated another way, the structures have a relatively high ratio of surface area to thickness. This is particularly true where the mask is intended to be implanted in the cornea of a patient's eye. As a result, a thin mask can be damaged depending on the skill of the person handling it. Damage to the mask can include contamination on the surface of the mask, creases formed in the mask, etc.
  • Such damage at least increases the processing time (e.g., by requiring additional cleaning steps) but can also require that the damaged mask be scrapped.
  • a handling structure e.g., a layer that is less easily damaged or that can be damaged without impairing the performance of the mask.
  • a handling structure is formed as a removable mask support layer.
  • the handling structure can be formed by any process. For example, any of the sputtering processes described above could be used to form the handling structure.
  • the handling structure is formed as a sacrificial layer.
  • a sacrificial layer is a layer that can be removed or separated from the mask at some point during the lifecycle of the mask.
  • the sacrificial handling layer can be made of the same material as the release layer 6080 , the same material as the mask layer 6100 , or another suitable material.
  • the handling structure can be removed by any process, e.g., by eroding or etching the layer, or by otherwise separating the handling structure from the mask.
  • the handling structure can take any suitable configuration.
  • the handling structure is temporarily coupled with the mask or a portion thereof.
  • the handling structure can be coupled with an outer periphery of a mask.
  • the handling structure is an annular member that surrounds or partially surrounds the mask or a portion of the mask.
  • the handling structure could be a bar or a flange of suitable configuration.
  • the handling structure is configured to be clamped or fixed in a processing device or process chamber in one embodiment.
  • the handling structure is able to securely hold a mask during one or more process steps in one embodiment.
  • the handling structure is removable after the process for manufacturing the mask is complete or partially complete in one embodiment.
  • Chemical Vapor Deposition may also be used to form the mask or a portion of the mask.
  • CVD methods include atmospheric pressure chemical vapor deposition, low pressure chemical vapor deposition, plasma assisted (enhanced) chemical vapor deposition, photochemical vapor deposition, laser chemical vapor deposition, metal-organic chemical vapor deposition, and chemical beam epitaxy.
  • a layer such as a mask layer, release layer, or sacrificial layer, could be formed by precipitating a material out of a solution. This technique is analogous to the methods discussed above in connection with FIGS. 67 a - 67 d , except as set forth below.
  • Mask layers, release layers, sacrificial layers, or other layers are formed by a precipitate that emerges from a solution.
  • a solution including metal ions can be prepared and placed into contact with a substrate.
  • the substrate can be similar to the substrate 6000 .
  • a tank is provided and the substrate is placed in the bottom of the tank.
  • a solution with metal or alloy ions or molecules is then placed in the tank in contact with the substrate. Thereafter, the solution can be acted on to cause a metal or alloy ion or molecule to no longer be soluble in the solution.
  • sufficient quantities of the desired metal ion can be added to the solution such that the solubility of that ion within the solution is exceeded.
  • the solvent can be evaporated from the solution, increasing the concentration of the desired metal ion until its solubility is exceeded, thus causing the ion to precipitate out of the solution and to condense onto the substrate 6000 .
  • Other techniques such as altering the pH of the solution can be employed to get the solute to precipitate out of the solution.
  • the solution can be evacuated from the tank and another solution placed in the tank with the same or a different material or metal ion solute.
  • more than one technique can be combined, such as using precipitation out of a solution for one layer and vapor deposition for another layer.
  • Suitable techniques for forming layers include electroplating or electrodepositing and electroforming.
  • forming a mask by electrodeposition is analogous to the method discussed above, except as set forth below.
  • Electrodeposition is the process of producing a layer or coating, which can be metallic, on a surface of an object by the action of electric current.
  • the deposition of a metallic coating onto an object can be achieved by negatively charging the object to be coated and immersing the object into a solution that contains a salt of the metal to be deposited.
  • the object to be plated can be the cathode of an electrolytic cell.
  • the object to be plated is similar to the substrate 6000 .
  • the metallic ions of the salt carry a positive charge and are attracted to the substrate or object.
  • the substrate provides electrons to reduce the positively charged ions to metallic form.
  • the substrate can be made of any suitable material, e.g., copper.
  • the material to be plated is one that can be eroded to separate a mask from the substrate, as discussed above, or a mask layer. Where the material to be plated is intended to be a mask layer, the material is selected with the biocompatility and stability properties discussed above for long implantation life (e.g., it is opaque, inert, and does not degrade in the presence of UV radiation).
  • a conductor is coupled with the substrate or other object and with a negative pole of a battery (or other power supply). Another conductor is connected with a positive pole of the battery (or other power supply) and with an anode of the electrolytic cell.
  • the anode is analogous to the target, discussed above in connection with sputtering.
  • a cell is filled with a solution of the metal salt to be plated.
  • the cell can be a process chamber. It is possible to use a molten salt (e.g., when plating tungsten and other similar materials). In some techniques, the salt is dissolved in water.
  • the substrate or other object to be plated As the substrate or other object to be plated is negatively charged, it attracts the positively charged cations from the solution, and electrons flow from the substrate or other object to the cations to neutralize them (to reduce them) to metallic form. Meanwhile, negatively charged anions in the solution are attracted to the positively charged anode. At the anode electrons are removed from the anode material, oxidizing it to the anode cations. Thus we see that the anode (analogous to the target, as discussed above) dissolves as ions into the solution. That is how replacement cations of the anode/target material are supplied to the solution for that which has been plated out and one retains a solution of appropriate composition in the cell.
  • One advantage of this technique is that it may be able to make a porous structure that would at least partially provide nutrient transport through the mask, as discussed above, without further process steps. Additional nutrient transport could be provided by forming additional nutrient transport structures in the mask using any of the techniques discussed above.

Abstract

A method of making a mask configured to improve the depth of focus of an eye of a patient is provided. A substrate with a mask forming feature is provided. The mask forming feature comprises a forming surface that extends from an outer periphery. The forming surface is centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature. A release layer is formed on the forming surface. A mask layer is formed such that the release layer is between the mask layer and the substrate. The mask layer is formed of a biocompatible metal. A surface of the mask layer opposite the release layer is configured to not corrode. The mask layer is separated from the substrate.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation in part of U.S. application Ser. No. 11/000,562, filed Dec. 1, 2004, the entire contents of which is hereby expressly incorporated by reference herein.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • 1. Field of the Invention
  • This application is directed to masks for improving the depth of focus of an eye of a human patient. This application also is directed to apparatuses and methods to produce masks that are resistant to corrosion, or other decay or degradation when applied to a patient.
  • 2. Description of the Related Art
  • Presbyopia, or the inability to clearly see objects up close is a common condition that afflicts many adults over the age of 40. Presbyopia diminishes the ability to see or read up close. Near objects appear blurry and out of focus. Presbyopia may be caused by defects in the focusing elements of the eye or the inability (due to aging) of the ciliary muscles to contract and relax and thereby control the shape of the lens in the eye.
  • The human eye functions by receiving light rays from an object and bending, refracting, and focusing those rays. The primary focusing elements of the human eye are the lens (also referred to as the intraocular lens) and the cornea. Light rays from an object are bent by the cornea, which is located in the anterior part of the eye. The light rays subsequently pass through the intraocular lens and are focused thereby onto the retina, which is the primary light receiving element of the eye. From the retina, the light rays are converted to electrical impulses, which are then transmitted by the optic nerves to the brain.
  • Ideally, the cornea and lens bend and focus the light rays in such a way that they converge at a single point on the retina. Convergence of the light rays on the retina produces a focused image. However, if the cornea or the lens are not functioning properly, or are irregularly shaped, the images may not converge at a single point on the retina. Similarly, the image may not converge at a single point on the retina if the muscles in the eye can no longer adequately control the lens. This condition is sometimes described as loss of accommodation. In presbyopic patients, for example, the light rays often converge at a point behind the retina. To the patient, the resulting image is out of focus and appears blurry.
  • Traditionally, vision improvement has been achieved by prescribing eye glasses or contact lenses to the patient. Eye glasses and contact lenses are shaped and curved to help bend light rays and improve focusing of the light rays onto the retina of the patient. However, some vision deficiencies, such as presbyopia, are not adequately addressed by these approaches.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • In one embodiment, a method is provided for making a mask configured to improve the depth of focus of an eye of a patient. A substrate is provided with a mask forming feature. The mask forming feature comprises an annular surface that extends between an inner periphery and an outer periphery. The annular surface is centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature. The annular surface has a curved profile between the inner periphery and the outer periphery that corresponds to the curvature of a corneal layer of the eye. A release layer is formed on the annular surface. A mask layer of a biocompatible metal is formed such that the release layer is between the mask layer and the substrate. The mask layer is separated from the substrate.
  • In another embodiment, a method is provided for making a mask that is configured to improve the depth of focus of an eye of a patient. A substrate is provided with a mask forming feature. The mask forming feature includes a forming surface that extends from an outer periphery. The forming surface can be an annular surface that extends between the outer periphery and an inner periphery. The forming surface is centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature. The forming surface has a curved profile corresponding to the curvature of a corneal layer of the eye. A mask layer is formed of a biocompatible metal on the substrate. A surface of the mask layer is configured to not corrode. The mask layer is separated from the substrate.
  • In another embodiment, a method of making a mask configured to improve the depth of focus of an eye of a patient is provided. A substrate with a mask forming feature is provided. The mask forming feature comprises a forming surface that is centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature. A release layer is formed on the annular surface. A mask layer is formed such that the release layer is between the mask layer and the substrate. The mask layer is formed of a biocompatible metal. A surface of the mask layer opposite the release layer is configured to not corrode. The mask layer is separated from the substrate.
  • In another embodiment, a method of making a mask configured be implanted in a cornea of an eye of a patient to improve the depth of focus of the patient is provided. The mask is disposed about a visual axis of the eye extending through a pupil of the eye when applied. A substrate with a mask forming feature is provided. The mask forming feature comprises an annular surface that extends between an inner periphery and an outer periphery. The annular surface is centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature. At least a portion of the mask is formed by depositing a mask layer of a biocompatible metal on the substrate. The mask is configured to be inert. The mask layer is separated from the substrate.
  • In another embodiment, a mask is configured to improve the depth of focus in an eye of a patient. The mask includes a posterior layer formed of a biocompatible metal and a cosmetic layer.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is a plan view of the human eye.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional side view of the human eye.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional side view of the human eye of a presbyopic patient wherein the light rays converge at a point behind the retina of the eye.
  • FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional side view of a presbyopic eye implanted with one embodiment of a mask wherein the light rays converge at a point on the retina.
  • FIG. 5 is a plan view of the human eye with a mask applied thereto.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 7 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a hexagon-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 8 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with an octagon-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 9 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with an oval-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 10 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a pointed oval-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 11 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a star-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 12 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture spaced above the true center of the mask.
  • FIG. 13 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture centered within the mask.
  • FIG. 14 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture spaced below the true center of the mask.
  • FIG. 15 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a square-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 16 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a kidney-shaped oval pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 17 is a side view of an embodiment of a mask having varying thickness.
  • FIG. 18 is a side view of another embodiment of a mask having varying thickness.
  • FIG. 19 is a side view of an embodiment of a mask with a gel to provide opacity to the lens.
  • FIG. 20 is frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a weave of polymeric fibers.
  • FIG. 21 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 20.
  • FIG. 22 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask having regions of varying opacity.
  • FIG. 23 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 22.
  • FIG. 24 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a centrally located pinhole like aperture and radially extending slots emanating from the center to the periphery of the mask.
  • FIG. 25 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 24.
  • FIG. 26 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture, surrounded by a plurality of holes radially spaced from the pinhole like aperture and slots extending radially spaced from the holes and extending to the periphery of the mask.
  • FIG. 27 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 26.
  • FIG. 28 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture, a region that includes a plurality of holes radially spaced from the aperture, and a region that includes rectangular slots spaced radially from the holes.
  • FIG. 29 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 28.
  • FIG. 30 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a non-circular pinhole like aperture, a first set of slots radially spaced from the aperture, and a region that includes a second set of slots extending to the periphery of the mask and radially spaced from the first set of slots.
  • FIG. 31 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 30.
  • FIG. 32 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture and a plurality of holes radially spaced from the aperture.
  • FIG. 33 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 32.
  • FIG. 34 is an embodiment of a mask that includes two semi-circular mask portions.
  • FIG. 35 is an embodiment of a mask including two half-moon shaped portions.
  • FIG. 36 is an embodiment of a mask that includes a half-moon shaped region and a centrally-located pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 37 is an enlarged, diagrammatic view of an embodiment of a mask that includes particulate structure adapted for selectively controlling light transmission through the mask in a low light environment.
  • FIG. 38 is a view of the mask of FIG. 37 in a bright light environment.
  • FIG. 39 is an embodiment of a mask that includes a barcode formed on the annular region of the mask.
  • FIG. 40 is another embodiment of a mask that includes connectors for securing the mask within the eye.
  • FIG. 41 is a plan view of an embodiment of a mask made of a spiraled fibrous strand.
  • FIG. 42 is a plan view of the mask of FIG. 41 being removed from the eye.
  • FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view similar to that of FIG. 2, but showing certain axes of the eye.
  • FIG. 44A illustrates a single-target fixation method for aligning an eye with the optical axis of an ophthalmic instrument.
  • FIG. 44B illustrates another single-target fixation method for aligning an eye with the optical axis of an ophthalmic instrument.
  • FIG. 45A shows an apparatus for projecting a target onto an optical axis at an infinite distance.
  • FIG. 45B shows an apparatus for projecting a target onto an optical axis at a finite distance.
  • FIG. 46 illustrates a dual-target fixation method.
  • FIG. 47 shows an apparatus with which two targets can be projected simultaneously by the same projection lens to provide fixation targets at a large distance (such as infinity) and a shorter (finite) distance.
  • FIG. 48 shows another embodiment of an apparatus for combining two targets to project them simultaneously at different axial distances.
  • FIG. 49A shows an example of a dual target pattern as viewed by the patient when the target patterns are aligned.
  • FIG. 49B shows the dual target pattern of FIG. 49A when the patterns are offset.
  • FIG. 50A shows an example of another dual target pattern as viewed by the patient when the target patterns are aligned.
  • FIG. 50B shows the dual target pattern of FIG. 50A when the target patterns are offset.
  • FIG. 51 shows one embodiment of an apparatus configured to locate the visual axis of an eye of a patient by aligning the axis with an axis of the apparatus.
  • FIG. 52 is a flow chart illustrating one method of screening a patient for the use of a mask.
  • FIGS. 53A-53C show a mask, similar to those described herein, inserted beneath an epithelium sheet of a cornea.
  • FIGS. 54A-54C show a mask, similar to those described herein, inserted beneath a Bowman's membrane of a cornea.
  • FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of a surgical system configured to locate the visual axis of a patient's eye by aligning the visual axis with an axis of the system.
  • FIG. 55A is a perspective view of another embodiment of a dual target fixation target.
  • FIG. 55B is a top view of the fixation target of FIG. 55A showing the first target.
  • FIG. 55C is a top view of the fixation target of FIG. 55A showing the second target.
  • FIG. 56 is a top view of another embodiment of a surgical system that includes an alignment device and a clamp configured to couple the alignment device with a surgical viewing device.
  • FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the alignment device shown in FIG. 56.
  • FIG. 58 is a top view of the alignment device shown in FIG. 57.
  • FIG. 59 is a schematic view of internal components of the alignment device of FIG. 57.
  • FIG. 60 is a top view of another embodiment of a mask configured to increase depth of focus.
  • FIG. 60A is an enlarged view of a portion of the view of FIG. 60.
  • FIG. 61A is a cross-sectional view of the mask of FIG. 60A taken along the section plane 61-61.
  • FIG. 61B is a cross-sectional view similar to FIG. 61A of another embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 61C is a cross-sectional view similar to FIG. 61A of another embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 62A is a graphical representation of one arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60.
  • FIG. 62B is a graphical representation of another arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60.
  • FIG. 62C is a graphical representation of another arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60.
  • FIG. 63A is an enlarged view similar to that of FIG. 60A showing a variation of a mask having non-uniform size.
  • FIG. 63B is an enlarged view similar to that of FIG. 60A showing a variation of a mask having a non-uniform facet orientation.
  • FIG. 64 is a top view of another embodiment of a mask having a hole region and a peripheral region.
  • FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of an eye illustrating a treatment of a patient wherein a flap is opened to place an implant and a location is marked for placement of the implant.
  • FIG. 65A is a partial plan view of the eye of FIG. 65 wherein an implant has been applied to a corneal flap and positioned with respect to a ring.
  • FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of an eye illustrating a treatment of a patient wherein a pocket is created to place an implant and a location is marked for placement of the implant.
  • FIG. 66A is a partial plan view of the eye of FIG. 66 wherein an implant has been positioned in a pocket and positioned with respect to a ring.
  • FIG. 67A is a schematic diagram of a substrate useful in a making an ocular implant;
  • FIG. 67B is a schematic diagram illustrating a portion of a method of making an ocular implant using the substrate of FIG. 67A wherein a release layer is formed on the substrate;
  • FIG. 67C is a schematic diagram illustrating a portion of a method of making an ocular implant using the substrate of FIG. 67A wherein a release layer and a material layer are formed on the substrate;
  • FIG. 67D is a schematic diagram illustrating a portion of a method of making an ocular implant using the substrate of FIG. 67A wherein an ocular implant is released from the substrate by a suitable method.
  • FIG. 68 is a perspective view of a mask with a broken-out section, the mask being configured to not corrode.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
  • This application is directed to masks for improving the depth of focus of an eye of a patient using pin-hole imaging and methods and apparatuses for making such masks. The masks may be applied to the eye in any manner and in any location, e.g., as an implant in the cornea (sometimes referred to as a “corneal inlay”). As discussed further below, some methods for making such masks employ techniques that deposit thin films of material. The materials used to make the mask can be metals that are selected or configured for long-term or permanent implantation. Some metals are subject to processes, such as corrosion, that can degrade a mask over time. As discussed further below, the mask can be formed of a material that is stable, e.g., one that is not subject to such processes or that substantially resists such processes. In some embodiments, the mask is formed of a material that is selected or configured to be inert, e.g., to not degrade due to physical or chemical processes such as corrosion induced by a galvanic reaction or otherwise. In other embodiments, masks can be formed that combine materials that are susceptible to corrosion with materials that reduce or eliminate the likelihood that corrosion will occur as a result of, for example, a galvanic reaction. These masks can be produced by vapor deposition, thin film sputtering, electro-depositing and other techniques amenable to batch processing.
  • I. Overview of Pin-Hole Vision Correction
  • A mask that has a pinhole aperture may be used to improve the depth of focus of a human eye. As discussed above, presbyopia is a problem of the human eye that commonly occurs in older human adults wherein the ability to focus becomes limited to inadequate range. FIGS. 1-6 illustrate how presbyopia interferes with the normal function of the eye and how a mask with a pinhole aperture mitigates the problem.
  • FIG. 1 shows the human eye, and FIG. 2 is a side view of the eye 10. The eye 10 includes a cornea 12 and an intraocular lens 14 posterior to the cornea 12. The cornea 12 is a first focusing element of the eye 10. The intraocular lens 14 is a second focusing element of the eye 10. The eye 10 also includes a retina 16, which lines the interior of the rear surface of the eye 10. The retina 16 includes the receptor cells which are primarily responsible for the sense of vision. The retina 16 includes a highly sensitive region, known as the macula, where signals are received and transmitted to the visual centers of the brain via the optic nerve 18. The retina 16 also includes a point with particularly high sensitivity 20, known as the fovea. As discussed in more detail in connection with FIG. 8, the fovea 20 is slightly offset from the axis of symmetry of the eye 10.
  • The eye 10 also includes a ring of pigmented tissue known as the iris 22. The iris 22 includes smooth muscle for controlling and regulating the size of an opening 24 in the iris 22, which is known as the pupil. An entrance pupil 26 is seen as the image of the iris 22 viewed through the cornea 12 (See FIG. 7). A central point of the entrance pupil 28 is illustrated in FIG. 7 and will be discussed further below.
  • The eye 10 resides in an eye-socket in the skull and is able to rotate therein about a center of rotation 30.
  • FIG. 3 shows the transmission of light through the eye 10 of a presbyotic patient. Due to either an aberration in the cornea 12 or the intraocular lens 14, or loss of muscle control, light rays 32 entering the eye 10 and passing through the cornea 12 and the intraocular lens 14 are refracted in such a way that the light rays 32 do not converge at a single focal point on the retina 16. FIG. 3 illustrates that in a presbyopic patient, the light rays 32 often converge at a point behind the retina 16. As a result, the patient experiences blurred vision.
  • Turning now to FIG. 4, there is shown the light transmission through the eye 10 to which a mask 34 has been applied. The mask 34 can be made by any suitable apparatus or method. Some advantageous methods form the mask 34 of a material that is at least partially opaque and very stable in the normal environment in which the mask 34 is deployed. For example, it is desired that the mask 34 be able to survive many years of exposure to ultraviolet (UV) light. Thus, in some embodiments, the mask is made of a UV stable material. A variety of UV stable materials can be used to form the mask 34. Preferably the UV stable material has a high degree of biocompatibility because, as discussed below, the mask 34 is implanted in the eye 10 in some techniques. Some specific examples of methods of making the mask 34 are discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a-67 d and with variations of such processes.
  • The mask 34 is shown implanted in the cornea 12 in FIG. 4. However, as discussed below, it will be understood that the mask 34 can be, in various modes of application, implanted in the cornea 12 (as shown), used as a contact lens placed over the cornea 12, incorporated in the intraocular lens 14 (including the patient's original lens or an implanted lens), or otherwise positioned on or in the eye 10. In the illustrated embodiment, the light rays 32 that pass through the mask 34, the cornea 12, and the lens 14 converge at a single focal point on the retina 16. The light rays 32 that would not converge at the single point on retina 16 are blocked by the mask 34. As discussed below, it is desirable to position the mask 34 on the eye 10 so that the light rays 32 that pass through the mask 34 converge at the fovea 20.
  • Turning now to FIG. 6, there is shown one embodiment of the mask 34. As seen, the mask 34 preferably includes an annular region 36 surrounding a pinhole opening or aperture 38 substantially centrally located on the mask 34. The pinhole aperture 38 is generally located around a central axis 39, referred to herein as the optical axis of the mask 34. The pinhole aperture 38 preferably is in the shape of a circle. It has been reported that a circular aperture, such as the aperture 38 may, in some patients, produce a so-called “halo effect” where the patient perceives a shimmering image around the object being viewed. Accordingly, it may be desirable to provide an aperture 38 in a shape that diminishes, reduces, or completely eliminates the so-called “halo effect.”
  • II. Masks Employing Pin-Hole Correction
  • FIGS. 7-42 illustrate a variety of embodiments of masks that can improve the vision of a patient with presbyopia. The masks described in connection with FIGS. 7-42 are similar to the mask 34, except as set forth below. Accordingly, the masks described in connection with FIGS. 7-42 can be used and applied to the eye 10 of a patient in a similar fashion to the mask 34. Also, like the mask 34, the masks 7-42 can be formed by the processes disclosed in connection with FIGS. 67 a-67 d and with variations of such processes.
  • FIG. 7 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 a that includes an aperture 38 a formed in the shape of a hexagon. FIG. 8 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 b that includes an aperture 38 b formed in the shape of an octagon. FIG. 9 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 c that includes an aperture 38 c formed in the shape of an oval, while FIG. 10 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 d that includes an aperture 38 d formed in the shape of a pointed oval. FIG. 11 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 e wherein the aperture 38 e is formed in the shape of a star or starburst.
  • FIGS. 12-14 illustrate further embodiments that have tear-drop shaped apertures. FIG. 12 shows a mask 34 f that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 f that is located above the true center of the mask 34 f. FIG. 13 shows a mask 34 g that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 g that is substantially centered in the mask 34 g. FIG. 14 shows a mask 34 h that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 h that is below the true center of the mask 34 h. FIGS. 12-14 illustrate that the position of aperture can be tailored, e.g., centered or off-center, to provide different effects. For example, an aperture that is located below the true center of a mask generally will allow more light to enter the eye because the upper portion of the aperture 34 will not be covered by the eyelid of the patient. Conversely, where the aperture is located above the true center of the mask, the aperture may be partially covered by the eyelid. Thus, the above-center aperture may permit less light to enter the eye.
  • FIG. 15 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 i that includes an aperture 38 i formed in the shape of a square. FIG. 16 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 j that has a kidney-shaped aperture 38 j. It will be appreciated that the apertures shown in FIGS. 7-16 are merely exemplary of non-circular apertures. Other shapes and arrangements may also be provided and are within the scope of the present invention.
  • The mask 34 preferably has a constant thickness, as discussed below. However, in some embodiments, the thickness of the mask may vary between the inner periphery (near the aperture 38) and the outer periphery. FIG. 17 shows a mask 34 k that has a gradually decreasing thickness from the inner periphery to the outer periphery. FIG. 18 shows a mask 34 l that has a gradually increasing thickness from the inner periphery to the outer periphery. Other cross-sectional profiles are also possible.
  • The annular region 36 is at least partially and preferably completely opaque. The opacity of the annular region 36 prevents light from being transmitted through the mask 32 (as generally shown in FIG. 4). Opacity of the annular region 36 may be achieved in any of several different ways.
  • For example, in one embodiment, the material used to make mask 34 may be naturally opaque. Alternatively, the material used to make the mask 34 may be substantially clear, but treated with a dye or other pigmentation agent to render region 36 substantially or completely opaque. In still another example, the surface of the mask 34 may be treated physically or chemically (such as by etching) to alter the refractive and transmissive properties of the mask 34 and make it less transmissive to light.
  • In still another alternative, the surface of the mask 34 may be treated with a particulate deposited thereon. For example, the surface of the mask 34 may be deposited with particulate of titanium, gold or carbon to provide opacity to the surface of the mask 34. In another alternative, the particulate may be encapsulated within the interior of the mask 34, as generally shown in FIG. 19. Finally, the mask 34 may be patterned to provide areas of varying light transmissivity, as generally shown in FIGS. 24-33, which are discussed in detail below.
  • Turning to FIG. 20, there is shown a mask 34 m formed or made of a woven fabric, such as a mesh of polyester fibers. The mesh may be a cross-hatched mesh of fibers. The mask 34 m includes an annular region 36 m surrounding an aperture 38 m. The annular region 36 m comprises a plurality of generally regularly positioned apertures 36 m in the woven fabric that allow some light to pass through the mask 34 m. The amount of light transmitted can be varied and controlled by, for example, moving the fibers closer together or farther apart, as desired. Fibers more densely distributed allow less light to pass through the annular region 36 m. Alternatively, the thickness of fibers can be varied to allow more or less light through the openings of the mesh. Making the fiber strands larger results in the openings being smaller.
  • FIG. 22 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 n that includes an annular region 36 n that has sub-regions with different opacities. The opacity of the annular region 36 n may gradually and progressively increased or decreased, as desired. FIG. 22 shows one embodiment where a first area 42 closest to an aperture 38 n has an opacity of approximately 60%. In this embodiment, a second area 44, which is outlying with respect to the first area 42, has a greater opacity, such as 70%. In this embodiment, a third area 46, which is outlying with respect to the second area 42, has an opacity of between 85 to 100%. The graduated opacity of the type described above and shown in FIG. 22 is achieved in one embodiment by, for example, providing different degrees of pigmentation to the areas 42, 44 and 46 of the mask 34 n. In another embodiment, light blocking materials of the type described above in variable degrees may be selectively deposited on the surface of a mask to achieve a graduated opacity.
  • In another embodiment, the mask may be formed from co-extruded rods made of material having different light transmissive properties. The co-extruded rod may then be sliced to provide disks for a plurality of masks, such as those described herein.
  • FIGS. 24-33 show examples of masks that have been modified to provide regions of differing opacity. For example, FIG. 24 shows a mask 34 o that includes an aperture 38 o and a plurality of cutouts 48 in the pattern of radial spokes extending from near the aperture 38 o to an outer periphery 50 of the mask 34 o. FIG. 24 shows that the cutouts 48 are much more densely distributed about a circumference of the mask near aperture 38 o than are the cutouts 48 about a circumference of the mask near the outer periphery 50. Accordingly, more light passes through the mask 34 o nearer aperture 38 o than near the periphery 50. The change in light transmission through the mask 34 o is gradual.
  • FIGS. 26-27 show another embodiment of a mask 34 p. The mask 34 p includes an aperture 38 p and a plurality of circular cutouts 52 p, and a plurality of cutouts 54 p. The circular cutouts 52 p are located proximate the aperture 38 p. The cutouts 54 p are located between the circular cutouts 52 p and the periphery 50 p. The density of the circular cutouts 52 p generally decreases from the near the aperture 38 p toward the periphery 50 p. The periphery 50 p of the mask 34 p is scalloped by the presence of the cutouts 54, which extend inward from the periphery 50 p, to allow some light to pass through the mask at the periphery 50 p.
  • FIGS. 28-29 show another embodiment similar to that of FIGS. 26-27 wherein a mask 34 q includes a plurality of circular cutouts 52 q and a plurality of cutouts 54 q. The cutouts 54 q are disposed along the outside periphery 50 q of the mask 34 q, but not so as to provide a scalloped periphery.
  • FIGS. 30 and 31 illustrate an embodiment of a mask 34 r that includes an annular region 36 r that is patterned and an aperture 38 r that is non-circular. As shown in FIG. 30, the aperture 38 r is in the shape of a starburst. Surrounding the aperture 38 r is a series of cutouts 54 r that are more densely spaced toward the aperture 38 r. The mask 34 r includes an outer periphery 50 r that is scalloped to provide additional light transmission at the outer periphery 50 r.
  • FIGS. 32 and 33 show another embodiment of a mask 34 s that includes an annular region 36 s and an aperture 38 s. The annular region 36 s is located between an outer periphery 50 s of the mask 34 s and the aperture 38 s. The annular region 36 s is patterned. In particular, a plurality of circular openings 56 s is distributed over the annular region 36 s of the mask 34 s. It will be appreciated that the density of the openings 56 s is greater near the aperture 38 s than near the periphery 50 s of the mask 34 s. As with the examples described above, this results in a gradual increase in the opacity of the mask 34 s from aperture 38 s to periphery 50 s.
  • FIGS. 34-36 show further embodiments. In particular, FIG. 34 shows a mask 34 t that includes a first mask portion 58 t and a second mask portion 60 t. The mask portions 58 t, 60 t are generally “C-shaped.” As shown in FIG. 34, the mask portions 58 t, 60 t are implanted or inserted such that the mask portions 58 t, 60 t define a pinhole or aperture 38 t.
  • FIG. 35 shows another embodiment wherein a mask 34 u includes two mask portions 58 u, 60 u. Each mask portion 58 u, 60 u is in the shape of a half-moon and is configured to be implanted or inserted in such a way that the two halves define a central gap or opening 62 u, which permits light to pass therethrough. Although opening 62 u is not a circular pinhole, the mask portions 58 u, 60 u in combination with the eyelid (shown as dashed line 64) of the patient provide a comparable pinhole effect.
  • FIG. 36 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 v that includes an aperture 38 v that is in the shape of a half-moon. As discussed in more detail below, the mask 34 v may be implanted or inserted into a lower portion of the cornea 12 where, as described above, the combination of the mask 34 v and the eyelid 62 provides the pinhole effect.
  • Other embodiments employ different ways of controlling the light transmissivity through a mask. For example, the mask may be a gel-filled disk, as shown in FIG. 19. The gel may be a hydrogel or collagen, or other suitable material that is biocompatible with the mask material and can be introduced into the interior of the mask. The gel within the mask may include particulate 66 suspended within the gel. Examples of suitable particulate are gold, titanium, and carbon particulate, which, as discussed above, may alternatively be deposited on the surface of the mask.
  • The material of the mask 34 may be any biocompatible polymeric material. Where a gel is used, the material is suitable for holding a gel. Examples of suitable materials for the mask 34 include the preferred polymethylmethacrylate or other suitable polymers, such as polycarbonates and the like. Of course, as indicated above, for non-gel-filled materials, a preferred material may be a fibrous material, such as a Dacron mesh. Additional techniques are discussed below whereby the masks discussed herein can be formed of processes that deposit metal layers.
  • The mask 34 may also be made to include a medicinal fluid, such as an antibiotic that can be selectively released after application, insertion, or implantation of the mask 34 into the eye of the patient. Release of an antibiotic after application, insertion, or implantation provides faster healing of the incision. The mask 34 may also be coated with other desired drugs or antibiotics. For example, it is known that cholesterol deposits can build up on the eye. Accordingly, the mask 34 may be provided with a releasable cholesterol deterring drug. The drug may be coated on the surface of the mask 34 or, in an alternative embodiment, incorporated into the polymeric material (such as PMMA) from which the mask 34 is formed.
  • FIGS. 37 and 38 illustrate one embodiment where a mask 34 w comprises a plurality of nanites 68. “Nanites” are small particulate structures that have been adapted to selectively transmit or block light entering the eye of the patient. The particles may be of a very small size typical of the particles used in nanotechnology applications. The nanites 68 are suspended in the gel or otherwise inserted into the interior of the mask 34 w, as generally shown in FIGS. 37 and 38. The nanites 68 can be preprogrammed to respond to different light environments.
  • Thus, as shown in FIG. 37, in a high light environment, the nanites 68 turn and position themselves to substantially and selectively block some of the light from entering the eye. However, in a low light environment where it is desirable for more light to enter the eye, nanites may respond by turning or be otherwise positioned to allow more light to enter the eye, as shown in FIG. 38.
  • Nano-devices or nanites are crystalline structures grown in laboratories. The nanites may be treated such that they are receptive to different stimuli such as light. In accordance with one aspect of the present invention, the nanites can be imparted with energy where, in response to a low light and bright light environments, they rotate in the manner described above and generally shown in FIG. 38.
  • Nanoscale devices and systems and their fabrication are described in Smith et al., “Nanofabrication,” Physics Today, February 1990, pp. 24-30 and in Craighead, “Nanoelectromechanical Systems,” Science, Nov. 24, 2000, Vol. 290, pp. 1532-1535, both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Tailoring the properties of small-sized particles for optical applications is disclosed in Chen et al. “Diffractive Phase Elements Based on Two-Dimensional Artificial Dielectrics,” Optics Letters, Jan. 15, 1995, Vol. 20, No. 2, pp. 121-123, also incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • Masks 34 made in accordance with the present invention may be further modified to include other properties. FIG. 39 shows one embodiment of a mask 34 x that includes a bar code 70 or other printed indicia.
  • The masks described herein may be incorporated into the eye of a patient in different ways. For example, as discussed in more detail below in connection with FIG. 52, the mask 34 may be provided as a contact lens placed on the surface of the eyeball 10. Alternatively, the mask 34 may be incorporated in an artificial intraocular lens designed to replace the original lens 14 of the patient. Preferably, however, the mask 34 is provided as a corneal implant or inlay, where it is physically inserted between the layers of the cornea 12.
  • When used as a corneal implant, layers of the cornea 12 are peeled away to allow insertion of the mask 34. Typically, the optical surgeon (using a laser) cuts away and peels away a flap of the overlying corneal epithelium. The mask 34 is then inserted and the flap is placed back in its original position where, over time, it grows back and seals the eyeball. In some embodiments, the mask 34 is attached or fixed to the eye 10 by support strands 72 and 74 shown in FIG. 40 and generally described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,976,732, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • In certain circumstances, to accommodate the mask 34, the surgeon may be required to remove additional corneal tissue. Thus, in one embodiment, the surgeon may use a laser to peel away additional layers of the cornea 12 to provide a pocket that will accommodate the mask 34. Application of the mask 34 to the cornea 12 of the eye 10 of a patient is described in greater detail in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C.
  • Removal of the mask 34 may be achieved by simply making an additional incision in the cornea 12, lifting the flap and removing the mask 34. Alternatively, ablation techniques may be used to completely remove the mask 34.
  • FIGS. 41 and 42 illustrate another embodiment of a mask 34 y that includes a coiled strand 80 of a fibrous or other material. Strand 80 is coiled over itself to form the mask 34 y, which may therefore be described as a spiral-like mask. This arrangement provides a pinhole or aperture 38 y substantially in the center of the mask 34 y. The mask 34 y can be removed by a technician or surgeon who grasps the strand 80 with tweezers 82 through an opening made in a flap of the cornea 12. FIG. 42 shows this removal technique.
  • Further mask details are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,976,732, issued Dec. 11, 1990 and in U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/473,824, filed May 28, 2003, both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
  • III. Methods of Applying Pinhole Aperture Devices
  • The various masks discussed herein can be used to improve the vision of a presbyopic patient as well as that of patients with other vision problems. The masks discussed herein can be deployed in combination with a LASIK procedure, to eliminate the effects of abrasions, aberrations, and divots in the cornea. It is also believed that the masks disclosed herein can be used to treat patients suffering from macular degeneration, e.g., by directing light rays to unaffected portions of retina, thereby improving the vision of the patient. Whatever treatment is contemplated, more precise alignment of the central region of a mask with a pin-hole aperture with the visual axis of the patient is believed to provide greater clinical benefit to the patient.
  • A. Alignment of the Pinhole Aperture with the Patient's Visual Axis
  • Alignment of the central region of the pinhole aperture 38, in particular, the optical axis 39, of the mask 34 with the visual axis of the eye 10 may be achieved in a variety of ways. As discussed more fully below, such alignment may be achieved by imaging two reference targets at different distances and effecting movement of the patient's eye to a position where the images of the first and second reference targets appear aligned as viewed by the patient's eye. When the patient views the targets as being aligned, the patient's visual axis is located.
  • FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the eye 10, similar to that shown in FIG. 1, indicating a first axis 1000 and a second axis 1004. The first axis 1000 represents the visual axis, or line of sight, of the patient and the second axis 1004 indicates the axis of symmetry of the eye 10. The visual axis 1000 is an axis that connects the fovea 20 and a target 1008. The visual axis 1000 also extends through the central point 28 of the entrance pupil 26. The target 1008 is sometimes referred to herein as a “fixation point.” The visual axis 1000 also corresponds to the chief ray of the bundle of rays emanating from the target 1008 that passes through the pupil 22 and reaches the fovea 20. The axis of symmetry 1004 is an axis passing through the central point 28 of the entrance pupil 26 and the center of rotation 30 of the eye 10. As described above, the cornea 12 is located at the front of the eye 10 and, along with the iris 22, admits light into the eye 10. Light entering the eye 10 is focused by the combined imaging properties of the cornea 12 and the intraocular lens 14 (see FIGS. 2-3).
  • In a normal eye, the image of the target 1008 is formed at the retina 16. The fovea 20 (the region of the retina 16 with particularly high resolution) is slightly off-set from the axis of symmetry 1004 of the eye 10. This visual axis 1000 is typically inclined at an angle θ of about six (6) degrees to the axis of symmetry 1004 of the eye 10 for an eye with a centered iris.
  • FIGS. 44A and 44B illustrate single-target fixation methods for aligning an eye with an optical axis of an instrument also referred to herein as an “instrument axis.” In FIG. 44A, the eye 10 is shown looking into an aperture of a projection lens 1012. The lens aperture is shown as the entire lens 1012. The projection lens 1012 reimages a reference target 1016 at an infinite distance, producing a collimated beam 1020.
  • The reference target 1016 in FIG. 44A is shown reimaged at an infinite distance, which is achieved by positioning the target object at a distance 1024 equal to the focal length f of the lens 1012, i.e. the reference target 1016 is at the lens focal point. To a first-order approximation, the relationship between the object and the image distances for a lens of focal length f follows the Gaussian equation (1/A)=(1/f)+(1/B) where B and A are respectively the object and image distances measured from the lens center. Because the illuminated target appears at an infinite distance as viewed by the eye 10, individual light rays 1020 a to 1020 g are parallel to each other.
  • FIG. 44A shows the eye 10 fixated on the reference target 1016 along a ray 1020 c, which appears to come from the reference target 1016 as imaged by the projection lens 1012. The eye 10 is here decentered a distance 1028 from an optical axis 1032 of the instrument, i.e., the instrument axis, which may be the central axis of the lens 1012. This decentration of the eye 10 with respect to the optical axis 1032 of the instrument does not affect fixation to an infinitely distant image because all rays projected by the lens 1012 are parallel. As such, in an instrument that relies on fixation to a single target imaged at infinity, an eye can be fixated on the target but still be off-center of the optical axis of the instrument.
  • FIG. 44B is similar to FIG. 44A, except that a reference target 1016′ is located somewhat closer to the projection lens 1012 than is the reference target 1016 so that an image 1036 of the reference target 1016′ appears at a large but finite distance 1040 behind the lens 1012. As was the case in FIG. 44A, the eye 10 in FIG. 44B is fixated on the reference target 1016′ along a ray 1020 c′, which is decentered a distance 1028 from an optical axis 1032 of the instrument. However, the rays 1020 a′ to 1020 g′ projected by the lens 1012 shown in FIG. 44B are seen to diverge as if they originated at the image 1036 of the reference target 1016′, which is located on the optical axis 1032 of the lens 1012 at a finite distance 1040 from the lens 1012. If the decentration of the eye 10 (corresponding to the distance 1028) changes, the eye 10 must rotate somewhat about its center of rotation 30 in order to fixate on the image 1036. The eye 10 in FIG. 44B is shown rotated by some angle so as to align its visual axis 1000 with the direction of propagation of ray 1020 c′. Thus, in general, a decentered eye fixated on a finite-distance target is not merely off-center but is also angularly offset from the optical axis 1032 of the instrument.
  • FIG. 45A shows one embodiment of a projection lens 1012 used to create an optical image at infinite distance, as was schematically shown in FIG. 44A. The reference target 1016 typically is a back-illuminated pattern on a transparent glass reticle 1044. The reference target 1016 is located at a distance 1024 on the lens' optical axis 1032 at the lens' focal point, i.e. the reference target 1016 is located such that the distance 1024 is equal to the distance f. A diffusing plate 1048 and a condensing lens 1052 are used to ensure full illumination of the reference target 1016 throughout the aperture of the projection lens 1012. Light rays projected by the projection lens 1012 are substantially parallel depending upon the degree of imaging perfection achieved in the optical system. Assuming a well-corrected lens with small aberrations, the image as observed through the aperture of the projection lens 1012 will appear to be at infinity.
  • FIG. 45B shows a somewhat different optical system in which a target 1016′ is projected so that an image 1036 appears at a large but finite distance 1040 behind the lens 1012, as was shown schematically in FIG. 44B. The diffusing plate 1048 and the condensing lens 1052 again are used to ensure that full illumination of the target reference 112′ is achieved throughout the aperture of the projection lens 1012. In the system of FIG. 45B, the reference target 1016′ is located at an object distance 1024′, which is inside the focal point in accordance with the aforementioned Gaussian equation. Thus, the object distance 1024′ is a distance that is less than the focal length f of the lens 1012′. The path of a typical light ray 1056 from the center of the reference target 1016′ is shown. If the eye 10 is aligned with this ray 1056, the reference target 1016 is observed as if it were located at the location of the image 1036, i.e. at a finite distance. The ray 1056 would then be similar to ray 1020 c′ of FIG. 44B, and fixation of the eye 10 could be established as appropriate for the given degree of decentration from the optical axis 1032.
  • FIG. 46 illustrates a fixation method whereby the single-target fixation methods shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B are both used simultaneously in a dual-target fixation system. With two fixation targets 1016 and 1016′ at different distances, the eye 10 will see angular disparity (parallax) between the target images (i.e., they will not appear to be superimposed) if the eye is decentered. The rays 1020 a to 1020 g of the infinite-distance target 1016 are parallel to one another, while the rays 1020 a′ to 1020 g′ of the finite distance target 1016′ diverge. The only rays of the targets that coincide are rays 1020 d and 10204 d′, which are collinear along the optical axis 1032 of the instrument. Thus, the eye 10 can be simultaneously fixated on both targets if the visual axis, represented by the first axis 1000 of the eye 10, is centered on the optical axis of the instrument, i.e. along the ray 1020 d (which is the same as 1020 d′). Thus, when the visual axis of the eye 10 lies on the optical axis 1032 of the apparatus, both images are fixated.
  • FIG. 47 shows schematically an apparatus with which two reticle patterns could be projected simultaneously by the same projection lens to provide fixation targets 1016 and 1016′ at a large distance 1024 (such as infinity) and a shorter (finite) distance 1024′. It is preferable that both fixation targets are at relatively large distances so that only slight focus accommodation of the eye 10 is required to compensate for these different distances. By instructing the patient to move his or her eye transversely with respect to the instrument axis until a visual event occurs, e.g., angular displacement (parallax) between the images is minimized, alignment of the eye 10 with the optical axis 1032 of the apparatus is facilitated. Providing two fixation targets at different apparent distances will simplify accurate alignment of the sighted eye with an ophthalmic apparatus in the surgical procedures disclosed herein and in other similar surgical procedures.
  • FIG. 48 shows another embodiment of an apparatus for combining two fixation targets 1016 and 1016′ to project them simultaneously at different axial distances. A beamsplitter plate or cube 1060 is inserted between the patterns and the projection lens 1012 so each pattern can be illuminated independently. In the embodiments of FIGS. 46 and 47, the targets 1016, 1016′ can be opaque lines seen against a light background, bright lines seen against a dark background, or a combination of these forms.
  • FIG. 49A shows an example of a typical dual pattern as viewed by the patient when the patterns are aligned, i.e. when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the apparatus. The dual pattern set in this embodiment comprises an opaque fine-line cross 1064 seen against a broader bright cross 1068. FIG. 49B shows the same dual pattern set as shown in FIG. 49A, except the patterns are offset, indicating that the eye 10 is decentered with respect to the optical axis of the associated optical instrument.
  • FIG. 50A shows an example of another dual pattern as viewed by the patient when the patterns are aligned, i.e. when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the ophthalmic instrument. The dual pattern set in this embodiment comprises an opaque circle 1072 seen against a bright circle 1076. The circle 1072 has a diameter that is greater than the diameter of the circle 1076. FIG. 50B shows the same dual pattern set as shown in FIG. 50A, except the patterns are offset, indicating that the eye 10 is decentered with respect the optical axis of the associated optical instrument. It is not necessary that the targets appear as crosses or circles; patterns such as dots, squares, and other shapes and patterns also can suffice.
  • In another embodiment, color is used to indicate when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the apparatus. For example, a dual color set can be provided. The dual color set may comprise a first region of a first color and a second region of a second color. As discussed above in connection with the dual pattern sets, the patient visual axis is located when the first color and the second color are in a particular position relative to each other. This may cause a desired visual effect to the patient's eye, e.g., when the first region of the first color is aligned with the second region of the second color, the patient may observe a region of a third color. For example, if the first region is colored blue and the second region is colored yellow, the patient will see a region of green. Additional details concerning locating a patient's visual axis or line of sight are contained in U.S. Pat. No. 5,474,548, issued Dec. 12, 1995, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • FIG. 51 shows one embodiment of an ophthalmic instrument 1200 that can be used in connection with various methods described herein to locate the visual axis of a patient. The instrument 1200 includes an optics housing 1202 and a patient locating fixture 1204 that is coupled with the optics housing 1202. The optics housing 1202 includes an optical system 1206 that is configured to project two reticle patterns simultaneously to provide fixation targets at a large distance, e.g., infinity, and a shorter, finite distance.
  • In the illustrated embodiment, the optical system 1206 of the instrument includes a first reference target 1208, a second reference target 1210, and a projection lens 1212. The first and second reference targets 1208, 1210 are imaged by the projection lens 1212 along an instrument axis 1213, of the ophthalmic instrument 1200. In one embodiment, the first reference target 1208 is formed on a first glass reticle 1214 located a first distance 1216 from the lens 1212 and the second target 1210 is formed on a second glass reticle 1218 located a second distance 1220 from the lens 1212. Preferably, the second distance 1220 is equal to the focal length f of the lens 1212, as was discussed in connection with FIG. 44A. As discussed above, positioning the second target 1210 at the focal length f of the lens 1212 causes the second target 1210 to be imaged at an infinite distance from the lens 1212. The first distance 1216 preferably is less than the second distance 1220. As discussed above, the first reference target 1208 is thereby imaged at a large but finite distance from the lens 1212. By positioning the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210 in this manner, the method set forth above for aligning the eye 10 of the patient may be implemented with the ophthalmic instrument 1200.
  • The optical system 1206 preferably also includes a light source 1222 that marks the visual axis of the patient after the visual axis has been located in the manner described above. In the illustrated embodiment, the light source 1222 is positioned separately from the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210. In one embodiment, the light source 1222 is positioned at a ninety degree angle to the instrument axis 1213 and is configured to direct light toward the axis 1213. In the illustrated embodiment, a beamsplitter plate or cube 1224 is provided between the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210 and the patient to route light rays emitted by the light source 1222 to the eye of the patient. The beamsplitter 1224 is an optical component that reflects light rays from the direction of the light source 1222, but permits the light rays to pass through the beamsplitter along the instrument axis 1213. Thus, light rays form the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210 and from the light source 1222 may be propagated toward the eye of the patient. Other embodiments are also possible. For example, the beamsplitter 1224 could be replaced with a mirror that is movable into and out of the instrument axis 1213 to alternately reflect light from the light source 1222 to the eye or to permit light from the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210 to reach the eye.
  • The patient locating fixture 1204 includes an elongate spacer 1232 and a contoured locating pad 1234. The contoured locating pad 1234 defines an aperture through which the patient may look along the instrument axis 213. The spacer 1232 is coupled with the optics housing 1202 and extends a distance 1236 between the housing 1202 and the contoured locating pad 1234. In one embodiment, the spacer 1232 defines a lumen 1238 that extends between the contoured locating pads 1234 and the optics housing 1202. In some embodiments, the magnitude of the distance 1236 may be selected to increase the certainty of the location of the patient's visual axis. In some embodiments, it is sufficient that the distance 1236 be a relatively fixed distance.
  • When the alignment apparatus 1200 is used, the patient's head is brought into contact with the contoured locating pad 1234, which locates the patient's eye 10 in the aperture at a fixed distance from the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210. Once the patient's head is positioned in the contoured locating pad 1234, the patient may move the eye 10 as discussed above, to locate the visual axis. After locating the visual axis, the light source 1222 is engaged to emit light toward the eye 10, e.g., as reflected by the beamsplitter 1224.
  • In the illustrated embodiment, at least some of the light emitted by the light source 1222 is reflected by the beamsplitter 1224 along the instrument axis 1213 toward the patient's eye 10. Because the visual axis of the eye 10 was previously aligned with the instrument axis 1213, the light from the light source 1222 reflected by the beamsplitter 1224 is also aligned with the visual axis of the eye 10.
  • The reflected light provides a visual marker of the location of the patient's visual axis. The marking function of the light source 1222 is particularly useful in connection with the methods, described below, of applying a mask. Additional embodiments of ophthalmic instruments embodying this technique are described below in connection with FIGS. 55-59.
  • B. Methods of Applying a Mask
  • Having described a method for properly locating the visual axis of the eye 10 of a patient and for visually marking the visual axis, various methods for applying a mask to the eye will be discussed.
  • FIG. 52 shows an exemplary process for screening a patient interested in increasing his or her depth of focus. The process begins at step 1300, in which the patient is fitted with soft contact lenses, e.g., a soft contact lens is placed in each of the patient's eyes. If needed, the soft contact lenses may include vision correction. Next, at step 1310, the visual axis of each of the patient's eyes is located as described above. At a step 1320, a mask, such as any of those described above, is placed on the soft contact lenses such that the optical axis of the aperture of the mask is aligned with the visual axis of the eye. In this position, the mask will be located generally concentric with the patient's pupil. In addition, the curvature of the mask should parallel the curvature of the patient's cornea. The process continues at a step 1330, in which the patient is fitted with a second set of soft contact lenses, i.e., a second soft contact lens is placed over the mask in each of the patient's eyes. The second contact lens holds the mask in a substantially constant position. Last, at step 1340, the patient's vision is tested. During testing, it is advisable to check the positioning of the mask to ensure that the optical axis of the aperture of the mask is substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. Further details of testing are set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 6,554,424, issued Apr. 29, 2003, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • In accordance with a still further embodiment of the invention, a mask is surgically implanted into the eye of a patient interested in increasing his or her depth of focus. For example, a patient may suffer from presbyopia, as discussed above. The mask may be a mask as described herein, similar to those described in the prior art, or a mask combining one or more of these properties. Further, the mask may be configured to correct visual aberrations. To aid the surgeon surgically implanting a mask into a patient's eye, the mask may be pre-rolled or folded for ease of implantation.
  • The mask may be implanted in several locations. For example, the mask may be implanted underneath the cornea's epithelium sheet, beneath the cornea's Bowman membrane, in the top layer of the cornea's stroma, or in the cornea's stroma. When the mask is placed underneath the cornea's epithelium sheet, removal of the mask requires little more than removal of the cornea's epithelium sheet.
  • FIGS. 53 a through 53 c show a mask 1400 inserted underneath an epithelium sheet 1410. In this embodiment, the surgeon first removes the epithelium sheet 1410. For example, as shown in FIG. 53 a, the epithelium sheet 1410 may be rolled back. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 b, the surgeon creates a depression 1415 in a Bowman's membrane 420 corresponding to the visual axis of the eye. The visual axis of the eye may be located as described above and may be marked by use of the alignment apparatus 1200 or other similar apparatus. The depression 1415 should be of sufficient depth and width to both expose the top layer 1430 of the stroma 1440 and to accommodate the mask 1400. The mask 1400 is then placed in the depression 1415. Because the depression 1415 is located in a position to correspond to the visual axis of the patient's eye, the central axis of the pinhole aperture of the mask 1400 will be substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. This will provide the greatest improvement in vision possible with the mask 1400. Last, the epithelium sheet 1410 is placed over the mask 1400. Over time, as shown in FIG. 53 c, the epithelium sheet 1410 will grow and adhere to the top layer 1430 of the stroma 1440, as well as the mask 1400 depending, of course, on the composition of the mask 1400. As needed, a contact lens may be placed over the incised cornea to protect the mask.
  • FIGS. 54 a through 54 c show a mask 1500 inserted beneath a Bowman's membrane 1520 of an eye. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 a, the surgeon first hinges open the Bowman's membrane 1520. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 b, the surgeon creates a depression 1515 in a top layer 1530 of a stroma 1540 corresponding to the visual axis of the eye. The visual axis of the eye may be located as described above and may be marked by using the alignment apparatus 1200 or other similar apparatus. The depression 1515 should be of sufficient depth and width to accommodate the mask 1500. Then, the mask 1500 is placed in the depression 1515. Because the depression 1515 is located in a position to correspond to the visual axis of the patient's eye, the central axis of the pinhole aperture of the mask 1500 will be substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. This will provide the greatest improvement in vision possible with the mask 1500. Last, the Bowman's membrane 1520 is placed over the mask 1500. Over time, as shown in FIG. 54 c, the epithelium sheet 1510 will grow over the incised area of the Bowman's membrane 1520. As needed, a contact lens may be placed over the incised cornea to protect the mask.
  • In another embodiment, a mask of sufficient thinness, i.e., less than substantially 20 microns, may be placed underneath epithelium sheet 1410. In another embodiment, an optic mark having a thickness less than about 20 microns may be placed beneath Bowman's membrane 1520 without creating a depression in the top layer of the stroma.
  • In an alternate method for surgically implanting a mask in the eye of a patient, the mask may be threaded into a channel created in the top layer of the stroma. In this method, a curved channeling tool creates a channel in the top layer of the stroma, the channel being in a plane parallel to the surface of the cornea. The channel is formed in a position corresponding to the visual axis of the eye. The channeling tool either pierces the surface of the cornea or, in the alternative, is inserted via a small superficial radial incision. In the alternative, a laser focusing an ablative beam may create the channel in the top layer of the stroma. In this embodiment, the mask may be a single segment with a break, or it may be two or more segments. In any event, the mask in this embodiment is positioned in the channel and is thereby located so that the central axis of the pinhole aperture formed by the mask is substantially collinear with the patient's visual axis to provide the greatest improvement in the patient's depth of focus.
  • In another alternate method for surgically implanting a mask in the eye of a patient, the mask may be injected into the top layer of the stroma. In this embodiment, an injection tool with a stop penetrates the surface of the cornea to the specified depth. For example, the injection tool may be a ring of needles capable of producing a mask with a single injection. In the alternative, a channel may first be created in the top layer of the stroma in a position corresponding to the visual axis of the patient. Then, the injector tool may inject the mask into the channel. In this embodiment, the mask may be a pigment, or it may be pieces of pigmented material suspended in a bio-compatible medium. The pigment material may be made of a polymer or, in the alternative, made of a suture material. In any event, the mask injected into the channel is thereby positioned so that the central axis of the pinhole aperture formed by the pigment material is substantially collinear with the visual axis of the patient.
  • In another method for surgically implanting a mask in the eye of a patient, the mask may be placed beneath the corneal flap created during keratectomy, when the outermost 20% of the cornea is hinged open. As with the implantation methods discussed above, a mask placed beneath the corneal flap created during keratectomy should be substantially aligned with the patient's visual axis, as discussed above, for greatest effect.
  • In another method for surgically implanting a mask in the eye of a patient, the mask may be aligned with the patient's visual axis and placed in a pocket created in the cornea's stroma.
  • Further details concerning alignment apparatuses are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/479,129, filed Jun. 17, 2003, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • IV. Further Surgical Systems for Aligning a Pinhole Aperture with a Patient's Eye
  • FIG. 55 shows a surgical system 2000 that employs dual target fixation in a manner similar to that discussed above in connection with FIGS. 43-51. The surgical system 2000 enables the identification of a unique feature of a patient's eye in connection with a surgical procedure. The surgical system 2000 is similar to the ophthalmic instrument 1200 except as set forth below. As discussed below, in one arrangement, the surgical system 2000 is configured to align an axis of the patient's eye, e.g., the patient's line of sight (sometimes referred to herein as the “visual axis”), with an axis of the system 2000. The axis of the system 2000 may be a viewing axis along which the patient may direct an eye. As discussed above, such alignment is particularly useful in many surgical procedures, including those that benefit from precise knowledge of the location of one or more structures or features of the eye on which the procedures is being performed.
  • In one embodiment, the surgical system 2000 includes a surgical viewing device 2004 and an alignment device 2008. In one embodiment, the surgical viewing device 2004 includes a surgical microscope. The surgical viewing device 2004 may be any device or combination of devices that enables a surgeon to visualize the surgical site with sufficient clarity or that enhances the surgeon's visualization of the surgical site. A surgeon also may elect to use the alignment device 2004 without a viewing device. As discussed more fully below in connection another embodiment of a surgical system shown in FIG. 56, the surgical system 2000 preferably also includes a fixture configured to conveniently mount one or more components to the surgical viewing device 2004.
  • In one embodiment, the alignment device 2008 includes an alignment module 2020, a marking module 2024, and an image capture module 2028. As discussed below, in another embodiment, the marking module 2024 is eliminated. Where the marking module 2024 is eliminated, one or more of its functions may be performed by the image capture module 2028. In another embodiment, the image capture module 2028 is eliminated. The alignment device 2004 preferably also has a control device 2032 that directs one or more components of the alignment device 2004. As discussed more fully below, the control device 2032 includes a computer 2036 and signal lines 2040 a, 2040 b, and a trigger 2042 in one embodiment.
  • The alignment module 2020 includes components that enable a patient to align a feature related to the patient's eye, vision, or sense of sight with an instrument axis, e.g., an axis of the alignment device 2008. In one embodiment, the alignment module 2020 includes a plurality of targets (e.g., two targets) that are located on the instrument axis. In the illustrated embodiment, the alignment module 2020 includes a first target 2056 and a second target 2060. The alignment module 2020 may be employed to align the patient's line-of-sight with an axis 2052 that extends perpendicular to the faces of the targets 2056, 2060.
  • Although the alignment device 2008 could be configured such that the patient is positioned relative thereto so that the eye is positioned along the axis 2052, it may be more convenient to position the patient such that an eye 2064 of the patient is not on the axis 2052. For example, as shown in FIG. 55, the patient may be positioned a distance 2068 from the axis 2052. FIG. 55 shows that the gaze of the patient's eye 2064 is directed generally along a patient viewing axis 2072.
  • In this arrangement, the alignment device 2008 is configured such that the patient viewing axis 2072 is at about a ninety degree angle with respect to the instrument axis 2052. In this embodiment, a path 2076 optically connecting the targets 2056, 2060 with the patient's eye 2064 extends partially along the axis 2052 and partially along the patient viewing axis 2072. The optical path 2076 defines the path along which the images of the targets 2056, 2060 are cast when the alignment device 2008 is configured such that the patient's eye 2064 is not on the axis 2052.
  • Positioning the patient off of the axis 2052, may be facilitated by one or more components that redirect light traveling along or parallel to the axis 2052. In one embodiment, the alignment device 2008 includes a beamsplitter 2080 located on the axis 2052 to direct along the patient viewing axis 2072 light rays coming toward the beamsplitter 2080 from the direction of the targets 2056, 2060. In this embodiment, at least a portion of the optical path 2076 is defined from the patient's eye 2064 to the beamsplitter 2080 and from the beamsplitter 2080 to the first and second targets 2056, 2060. Although the alignment device 2008 is configured to enable the patient viewing axis 2072 to be at about a ninety degree angle with respect to the axis 2052, other angles are possible and may be employed as desired. The arrangement of FIG. 55 is convenient because it enables a surgeon to be directly above and relatively close to the patient if the patient is positioned on his or her back on an operating table.
  • In one embodiment, the first target 2056 is on the axis 2052 and on the optical path 2076 between the second target 2060 and the patient's eye 2064. More particularly, light rays that are directed from the second target 2060 intersect the first target 2056 and are thereafter directed toward the beamsplitter 2080. As discussed more fully below, the first and second targets 2056, 2060 are configured to project a suitable pattern toward the patient's eye 2064. The patient interacts with the projected images of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 to align the line-of-sight (or other unique anatomical feature) of the patient's eye 2064 or of the patient's sense of vision with an axis of the instrument, such as the axis 2052, the viewing axis 2072, or the optical path 2076.
  • The first and second targets 2056, 2060 may take any suitable form. The targets 2056, 2060 may be similar to those hereinbefore described. The targets 2056, 2060 may be formed on separate reticles or as part of a single alignment target. In one embodiment, at least one of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 includes a glass reticle with a pattern formed thereon. The pattern on the first target 2056 and the pattern on the second target 2060 may be linear patterns that are combined to form a third linear pattern when the patient's line-of-sight is aligned with the axis 2052 or optical path 2076.
  • Although shown as separate elements, the first and second targets 2056, 2060 may be formed on a alignment target. FIGS. 55A-55C shows one embodiment of an alignment target 2081. The alignment target 2081 can be formed of glass or another substantially transparent medium. The alignment target 2081 includes a first surface 2082 and a second surface 2083. The first and second surfaces 2082, 2083 are separated by a distance 2084. The distance 2084 is selected to provide sufficient separation between the first and second surfaces 2082, 2083 to facilitate alignment by the patient by any of the methods described herein. In one embodiment, the alignment target 2081 includes a first pattern 2085 that may comprise a linear pattern formed on the first surface 2082 and a second pattern 2086 that may comprise a linear pattern formed on the second surface 2083. The first and second patterns 2085, 2086 are selected so that when the patient's line-of-sight is properly aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008, the first and second patterns 2085, 2086 form a selected pattern (as in FIG. 55B) but when the patient's line-of-sight is properly aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008, the first and second patterns 2085, 2086 do not form the selected pattern (as in FIG. 55C). In the illustrated embodiment, the first and second pattern 2085, 2086 each are generally L-shaped. When aligned, the first and second patterns 2085, 2086 form a cross. When not aligned, a gap is formed between the patterns and they appear as an L and an inverted L. This arrangement advantageously exploits vernier acuity, which is the ability of the eye to keenly detect misalignment of displaced lines. Any other combination of non-linear or linear patterns (e.g., other linear patterns that exploit vernier acuity) can be used as targets, as discussed above.
  • The first and second targets 2056, 2060 (or the first and second patterns 2085, 2086) may be made visible to the patient's eye 2064 in any suitable manner. For example, a target illuminator 2090 may be provided to make the targets 2056, 2060 visible to the eye 2064. In one embodiment, the target illuminator 2090 is a source of radiant energy, such as a light source. The light source can be any suitable light source, such as an incandescent light, a fluorescent light, one or more light emitting diodes, or any other source of light to illuminate the targets 2056, 2060.
  • As discussed more fully below, the alignment module 2020 also may include one or more optic elements, such as lenses, that relatively sharply focus the images projected from the first and second targets 2056, 2060 to present sharp images to the patient's eye 2064. In such arrangements, the focal length of the optic element or system of optical elements may be located at any suitable location, e.g., at the first or second targets 2056, 2060, between the first and second targets 2056, 2060 in front of the first target 2056, or behind the second target 2060. The focal length is the distance from a location (e.g., the location of an optic element) to the plane at which the optic element focuses the target images projected from the first and second target 2056, 2060.
  • FIG. 55 shows a series of arrows that indicate the projection of the images of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 to the patient's eye 2064. In particular, an arrow 2094 indicates the direction of light cast by the target illuminator 2090 along the axis 2052 toward the first and second targets 2056, 2060. The light strikes the first and second targets 2056, 2060 and is absorbed by or passed through the targets to cast an image of the targets 2056, 2060 along the axis 2052 in a direction indicated by an arrow 2098. In the embodiment of FIG. 55, the image of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 intersects a beamsplitter 2102 that forms a part of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028. The beamsplitter 2102 is configured to transmit the majority of the light conveying the images of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 toward the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by an arrow 2106. The beamsplitter 2102 will be discussed in greater detail below. The light is thereafter reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 along the patient viewing axis 2072 and toward the patient's eye 2064. As discussed more fully below, in some embodiments, the beamsplitter 2080 transmits some of the incident light beyond the beamsplitter 2080 along the axis 2050. In one embodiment, 70 percent of the light incident on the beamsplitter 2080 is reflected toward the patient's eye 2064 and 30 percent is transmitter. One skilled in the art will recognize that the beamsplitter 2080 can be configured to transmit and reflect in any suitable fraction.
  • While the target illuminator 2090 and the first and second targets 2056, 2060 project the images of the targets to the patient's eye 2064, the patient may interact with those images to align a feature of the patient's eye 2064 with an axis of the alignment device 2008. In the embodiment illustrated by FIG. 55, the patient aligns the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 with the patient viewing axis 2072 of the alignment device 2008.
  • Techniques for aligning the line of sight of the patient's eye 2064 with the instrument axis have been discussed above. In the context of the embodiment of FIG. 55, the patient is positioned such that the optical path 2076 intersects the patient's eye 2064. In one method, the patient is instructed to focus on the first target 2056. Motion is provided between the patient's eye 2064 and the optical path 2076 (and therefore between the patient's eye 2064 and the targets 2056, 2060). The relative motion between the patient's eye 2064 and the targets 2056, 2060 may be provided by the patient moving his or her head with respect to the patient viewing axis 2072. Alternatively, the patient may be enabled to move all or a portion of the surgical system 2000 while the patient remains stationary. As discussed above, when the first and second targets 2056, 2060 appear aligned (e.g., the L patterns 2085, 2086 merge to form a cross), the line-of-sight of the patient is aligned with the patient viewing axis 2072, the optical path 2076, and the axis 2052 of the alignment module 2020.
  • Although aligning the eye may be sufficient to provide relatively precise placement of the masks described herein, one or both of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 may be included to assist the surgeon in placing a mask after the eye 2064 has been aligned. At least one of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 may be used to correlate the line-of-sight of the patient's eye 2064, which is not otherwise visible, with a visual cue, such as a visible physical feature of the patient's eye, a marker projected onto the eye or an image of the eye, or a virtual image of a marker visible to the surgeon, or any combination of the foregoing. As is discussed in more detail below, the virtual image may be an image that is directed toward the surgeon's eye that appears from the surgeon's point of view to be on the eye 2064 at a pre-selected location.
  • In one embodiment, the marking module 2024 is configured to produce an image, sometimes referred to herein as a “marking image”, that is visible to the surgeon and that is assists the surgeon in placing a mask or performing another surgical procedure after the line of sight of the eye 2064 has been located. The marking module 2024 of the alignment device 2008 shown includes a marking target 2120 and a marking target illuminator 2124. The marking target illuminator 2124 preferably is a source of light, such as any of those discussed above in connection with the target illuminator 2090.
  • FIG. 55 shows that in one embodiment, the marking target 2120 is a structure configured to produce a marking image when light is projected onto the marking target 2120. The marking target 2120 may be similar to the targets 2056, 2060. In some embodiments, the marking target 2120 is a glass reticle with a suitable geometrical pattern formed thereon. The pattern formed on the marking target 2120 may be a clear two dimensional shape that is surrounded by one or more opaque regions. For example, a clear annulus of selected width surrounded by opaque regions could be provided. In another embodiment, the marking target 2120 may be a glass reticle with an opaque two dimensional shape surrounded by substantially clear regions. As discussed below, in other embodiments, the marking target 2120 need not be made of glass and need not have a fixed pattern. The marking target 2120 may be located in any suitable location with respect to the beamsplitter 2080 or the alignment device 2008 as discussed below.
  • FIG. 55 shows that in one embodiment, the marking image is generated in a manner similar to the manner in which the images of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 are generated. In particular, the marking target 2124 and the marking target illuminator 2124 cooperate to produce, generate, or project the marking image along a marking image axis 2128. The marking image is conveyed by light along the axis 2128. The marking target illuminator 2124 casts light toward the marking target 2120 in a direction indicated by an arrow 2132. The marking target 2120 interacts with the light cast by the marking target illuminator 2124, e.g., by at least one of transmitting, absorbing, filtering, and attenuating at least a portion of the light. An arrow 2136 indicates the direction along which the marking image generated by the interaction of the marking target illuminator 2124 and the marking target 2120 is conveyed. The marking image preferably is conveyed along the marking axis 2128. In the illustrated embodiment, the marking target 2120 is located off of the axis 2052 and the image of the marking target initially is cast in a direction generally perpendicular to the axis 2052.
  • A beamsplitter 2140, to be discussed below in connection with the image capture module 2028, is positioned on the marking axis 2128 in the embodiment of FIG. 55. However, the beamsplitter 2140 is configured to be substantially transparent to light being transmitted along the marking axis 2128 from the direction of the marking target 2120. Thus, the light conveying the marking image is substantially entirely transmitted beyond the beamsplitter 2140 along the marking axis 2128 toward the axis 2052 as indicated by an arrow 2144. Thus, the beamsplitter 2140 generally does not affect the marking image. A surface of the beamsplitter 2102 that faces the marking target 2120 is reflective to light. Thus, the light conveying the marking image is reflected and thereafter is conveyed along the axis 2052 as indicated by the arrow 2106. The surface of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the beamsplitter 2102 also is reflective to at least some light (e.g., 70 percent of the incident light, as discussed above). Thus, the light conveying the marking image is reflected and thereafter is conveyed along the patient viewing axis 2072 toward the patient's eye 2064 as indicated by the arrow 2148. Thus, a marking image projected from the marking target 2120 may be projected onto the patient's eye 2064.
  • As discussed more fully below, projecting the marking image onto the patient's eye 2064 may assist the surgeon in accurately placing a mask. For example, the surgeon may be assisted in that the location of line-of-sight of the patient's eye (or some other generally invisible feature of the eye 2064) is correlated with a visible feature of the eye, such as the iris or other anatomical feature. In one technique, the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a diameter that is greater than the size of the inner periphery of the iris under surgical conditions (e.g., the prevailing light and the state of dilation of the patient's eye 2064). In another technique, the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a diameter that is less than the size of the outer periphery of the iris under surgical conditions (e.g., light and dilation of the eye 2064). In another technique, the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a size that is correlated to another feature of the eye 2064, e.g., the limbus of the eye.
  • In one embodiment of the system 2000, a marking module is provided that includes a secondary marking module. The secondary marking module is not routed through the optics of associated with the alignment device 2008. Rather, the secondary marking module is coupled with the alignment device 2008. In one embodiment, the secondary marking module includes a source of radiant energy, e.g., a laser or light source similar to any of these discussed herein. The source of radiant energy is configured to direct a plurality of spots (e.g., two, three, four, or more than four spots) onto the patient's eye 2064. The spots preferably are small, bright spots. The spots indicate positions on the eye 2064 that correlate with a feature of a mask, such as an edge of a mask, when the mask is in the correct position with respect to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064. The spots can be aligned with the projected marking target such that they hit at a selected location on the projected marking target (e.g., circumferentially spaced locations on the inner edge, on the outer edge, or on both the inner and outer edges). Thus, the marking module may give a visual cue as to the proper positioning of a mask that is correlated to the location of the line-of-sight without passing through the optics of the alignment device. The visual cue of the secondary marking module may be coordinated with the marking image of the marking module 2024 in some embodiments.
  • In some techniques, it may be beneficial to increase the visibility of a visual cue generated for the benefit of the surgeon (e.g., the reflection of the image of the marking target 2120) on the eye 2064. In some cases, this is due to the generally poor reflection of marking images off of the cornea. Where reflection of the marking image off of the cornea is poor, the reflection of the image may be quite dim. In addition, the cornea is an off-center aspherical structure, so the corneal reflection (purkinje images) may be offset from the location of the intersection of the visual axis and the corneal surface as viewed by the surgeon.
  • One technique for increasing the visibility of a visual cue involves applying a substance to the eye that can react with the projected image of the marking target 2120. For example, a dye, such as fluorescein dye, can be applied to the surface of the eye. Then the marking target illuminator 2124 may be activated to cause an image of the marking target 2120 to be projected onto the eye, as discussed above. In one embodiment, the marking target illuminator 2124 is configured to project light from all or a discrete portion of the visible spectrum of electromagnetic radiant energy, e.g., the wavelengths corresponding to blue light, to project the image of the marking target 2120 onto the eye 2064. The projected image interacts with the dye and causes the image of the marking target 2120 to be illuminated on the surface of the cornea. The presence of the dye greatly increases the visibility of the image of the marking target. For example, where the marking target 2120 is a ring, a bright ring will be visible to the surgeon because the light causes the dye to fluoresce. This technique substantially eliminates errors in placement of a mask due to the presence of the purkinje images and may generally increase the brightness of the image of the marking target 2120.
  • Another technique for increasing the visibility of a visual cue on the eye involves applying a visual cue enhancing device to at least a portion of the anterior surface of the eye 2064. For example, in one technique, a drape is placed over the cornea. The drape may have any suitable configuration. For example, the drape may be a relatively thin structure that will substantially conform to the anterior structure of the eye. The drape may be formed in a manner similar to the formation of a conventional contact lens. In one technique, the drape is a contact lens. The visual cue enhancing device preferably has suitable reflecting properties. In one embodiment, the visual cue enhancing device diffusely reflects the light projecting the image of the marking target 2120 onto the cornea. In one embodiment, the visual cue enhancing device is configured to interact with a discrete portion of the visible spectrum of electromagnetic radiant energy, e.g., the wavelengths thereof corresponding to blue light.
  • As discussed above the alignment device 2008 shown in FIG. 55 also includes an image capture module 2028. Some variations do not include the image capture module 2028. The image capture module 2028 of the surgical system 2000 is capable of capturing one or more images of the patient's eye 2064 to assist the surgeon in performing surgical procedures on the eye 2064. The image capture module 2028 preferably includes a device to capture an image, such as a camera 2200 and a display device 2204 to display an image. The display device 2204 may be a liquid crystal display. The image capture module 2028 may be controlled in part by the control device 2032 of the surgical system 2000. For example, the computer 2036 may be employed to process images captured by the camera 2200 and to convey an image to the display device 2204 where it is made visible to the surgeon. The computer 2036 may also direct the operation of or be responsive to at least one of the camera 2200, the display device 2204, the trigger 2042, and any other component of the image capture module 2028.
  • The camera 2200 can be any suitable camera. One type of camera that can be used is a charge-coupled device camera, referred to herein as a CCD camera. One type of CCD camera incorporates a silicon chip, the surface of which includes light-sensitive pixels. When light, e.g., a photon or light particle, hits a pixel, an electric charge is registered at the pixels that can be detected. Images of sufficient resolution can be generated with a large array of sensitive pixels. As discussed more fully below, one advantageous embodiment provides precise alignment of a selected pixel (e.g., one in the exact geometric center of the display device 2204) with the axis 2052. When such alignment is provided, the marking module may not be needed to align a mask with the line-of-sight of the eye 2064.
  • As discussed above, an image captured by the camera 2200 aids the surgeon attempting to align a mask, such as any of the masks described herein, with the eye 2064. In one arrangement, the image capture module 2028 is configured to capture an image of one or more physical attributes of the eye 2064, the location of which may be adequately correlated to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064. For example, the image of the patient's iris may be directed along the patient viewing axis 2072 to the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by the arrow 2148. As mentioned above, a side of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the beamsplitter 2080 is reflective to light transmitted from the eye 2064. Thus, at least a substantial portion of the light conveying the image of the iris of the eye 2064 is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 and is conveyed along the axis 2052 toward the beamsplitter 2102, as indicated by the arrow 2106. As discussed above, the surface of the beamsplitter 2102 facing the beamsplitter 2080 is reflective to light. Thus, substantially all of the light conveying the image of the iris is reflected by the beamsplitter 2102 and is conveyed along the marking axis 2128 toward the beamsplitter 2140, as indicated by the arrow 2144. The surface of the beamsplitter 2140 facing the beamsplitter 2102 and the camera 2200 is reflective to light. Thus, substantially all of the light conveying the image of the iris is reflected along an image capture axis 2212 that extends between the beamsplitter 2140 and the camera 2200. The light is conveyed along an image capture axis 2212 as indicated by an arrow 2216.
  • The image captured by the camera 2200 is conveyed to the computer 2036 by way of a signal line 2040 a. The computer 2036 processes the signal in a suitable manner and generates signals to be conveyed along a signal line 2040 b to the display device 2204. Any suitable signal line and computer or other signal processing device can be used to convey signals from the camera 2200 to the display device 2204. The signal lines 2040 a, 2040 b need not be physical lines. For example, any suitable wireless technology may be used in combination with or in place of physical lines or wires.
  • The capturing of the image by the camera 2200 may be triggered in any suitable way. For example, the trigger 2042 may be configured to be manually actuated. In one embodiment, the trigger 2042 is configured to be actuated by the patient when his or her eye 2064 is aligned (e.g., when the targets 2056, 2060 are aligned, as discussed above). By enabling the patient to trigger the capturing of the image of the eye 2064 by the image capture module 2028, the likelihood of the eye 2064 moving prior to the capturing of the image is greatly reduced. In another embodiment, another person participating in the procedure may be permitted to trigger the capturing of the image, e.g., on the patient's cue. In another embodiment, the control device 2032 may be configured to automatically capture the image of the patient's eye 2064 based on a predetermined criteria.
  • The display device 2204 is configured to be illuminated to direct an image along the axis 2052 toward the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by an arrow 2208. The surface of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the display device 2204 preferably is reflective to light directed from the location of the beamsplitter 2080. Thus, the image on the display 2052 is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 toward an eye 2212 of the surgeon as indicated by an arrow 2216. The beamsplitter 2080 preferably is transparent from the perspective of the surgeon's eye 2212. Thus, the surgeon may simultaneously view the patient's eye 2064 and the image on the display device 2204 in one embodiment. In one embodiment where both the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 are present, the marking image may be projected at the same time that an image is displayed on the display device 2204. The marking image and the image on the display will appear to both be on the patient's eye. In one arrangement, they have the same configuration (e.g., size and shape) and therefore overlap. This can reinforce the image from the perspective of the surgeon, further increasing the visibility of the visual cue provided by the marking image.
  • The display device 2204 is located at a distance 2220 from the beamsplitter 2080. The patient is located a distance 2224 from the axis 2052. Preferably the distance 2220 is about equal to the distance 2224. Thus, both the display device 2204 and the patient's eye 2064 are at the focal length of the surgical viewing device 2004. This assures that the image generated by the display device 2204 is in focus at the same time that the patient's eye is in focus.
  • In one embodiment, the system 2000 is configured to track movement of the patient's eye 2064 during the procedure. In one configuration, the trigger 2042 is actuated by the patient when the eye 2064 is aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008. Although a mask is implanted shortly thereafter, the patient's eye is not constrained and may thereafter move to some extent. In order to correct for such movement, the image capture module 2028 may be configured to respond to such movements by moving the image formed on the display device 2204. For example, a ring may be formed on the display device 2204 that is similar to those discussed above in connection with the marking target 2120. The beamsplitter 2080 enables the surgeon to see the ring visually overlaid on the patient's eye 2064. The image capture module 2028 compares the real-time position of the patient's eye 2064 with the image of the eye captured when the trigger 2042 is actuated. Differences in the real-time position and the position captured by the camera 2200 are determined. The position of the ring is moved an amount corresponding to the differences in position. As a result, from the perspective of the surgeon, movements of the ring and the eye correspond and the ring continues to indicate the correct position to place a mask.
  • As discussed above, several variations of the system 2000 are contemplated. A first variation is substantially identical to the embodiment shown in FIG. 55, except as set forth below. In the first variation, the video capture module 2028 is eliminated. This embodiment is similar to that set forth above in connection with FIG. 51. In the arrangement of FIG. 55, the marking module 2024 is configured to project the marking target onto the surface of the patient's eye. This variation is advantageous in that it has a relatively simple construction. Also, this variation projects the marking image onto the surface of the cornea, proximate the surgical location.
  • In one implementation of the first variation, the marking module 2024 is configured to display the marking image to the surgeon's eye 2212 but not to the patient's eye 2064. This may be provided by positioning the marking target 2120 approximately in the location of the display device 2204. The marking image may be generated and presented to the surgeon in any suitable manner. For example, the marking target 2120 and marking target illuminator 2124 may be repositioned so that they project the image of the marking target 2120 as indicated by the arrows 2208, 2216. The marking target 2120 and the marking target illuminator 2124 may be replaced by a unitary display, such as an LCD display. This implementation of the first variation is advantageous in that the marking image is visible to the surgeon but is not visible to the patient. The patient is freed from having to respond to or being subject to the marking image. This can increase alignment performance by increasing patient comfort and decreasing distractions, thereby enabling the patient to remain still during the procedure.
  • In another implementation of the first variation, a dual marking image is presented to the eye 2212 of the surgeon. In one form, this implementation has a marking module 2024 similar to that shown in FIG. 55 and discussed above, except as set forth below. A virtual image is presented to the surgeon's eye 2212. In one form, a virtual image generation surface is positioned in substantially the same location as the display device 2204. The surface may be a mirror, another reflective surface, or a non-reflective surface. In one embodiment, the display device 2204 is a white card. A first fraction of the light conveying the marking image is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 to the patient's eye 2064. The marking image is thus formed on the patient's eye. A second fraction of the light conveying the marking image is transmitted to the virtual image generation surface. The marking image is formed on or reflected by the virtual image generation surface. The marking target thus also is visible to the surgeon's eye 2212 in the form of a virtual image of the target. The virtual image and the marking image formed on the patient's eye are both visible to the surgeon. This implementation of the first variation is advantageous in that the virtual image and the marking image of the marking target are visible to the surgeon's eye 2212 and are reinforced each other making the marking image highly visible to the surgeon.
  • In a second variation, the marking module 2024 is eliminated. In this embodiment, the image capture module 2028 provides a visual cue for the surgeon to assist in the placement of a mask. In particular, an image can be displayed on the display device 2204, as discussed above. The image can be generated in response to the patient actuating the trigger 2042. In one technique, the patient actuates the trigger when the targets 2056, 2060 appear aligned, as discussed above. In this variation, care should be taken to determine the position of the display device 2204 in the alignment device because the image formed on the display device 2204 is to give the surgeon a visual cue indicating the location of the line-of-sight of the patient. In one embodiment, the display device 2204 is carefully coupled with the alignment module so that the axis 2052 extends through a known portion (e.g., a known pixel) thereof. Because the precise location of the axis 2052 on the display device 2204 is known, the relationship of the image formed thereon to the line-of-sight of the patient is known.
  • FIG. 56 shows a portion of a surgical system 2400 that is similar to the surgical system 2000 discussed above except as set forth below. The surgical system 2400 may be modified according to any of the variations and embodiments hereinbefore described.
  • The portion of the surgical system 2400 is shown from the surgeon's viewpoint in FIG. 56. The surgical system 2400 includes an alignment device 2404 and a fixture 2408. The alignment device 2404 is similar to the alignment device 2008 discussed above, except as set forth below. The surgical system 2400 is shown without a surgical microscope or other viewing device, but is configured to be coupled with one by way of the fixture 2408.
  • The fixture 2408 may take any suitable form. In the illustrated embodiment, the fixture 2408 includes a clamp 2412, an elevation adjustment mechanism 2416, and suitable members to interconnect the clamp 2408 and the mechanism 2416. In the embodiment of FIG. 56, the clamp 2412 is a ring clamp that includes a first side portion 2420, a second side portion 2424, and a clamping mechanism 2426 to actuate the first and second side portion 2420, 2424 with respect to each other. The first side portion 2420 has a first arcuate inner surface 2428 and the second side portion 2424 has a second arcuate inner surface 2432 that faces the first arcuate inner surface 2428. The clamping mechanism 2426 is coupled with each of the first and second side portions 2420, 2424 to cause the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428, 2432 to move toward or away from each other. As the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428, 2432 move toward each other they apply a force to a structure, such as a portion of a surgical microscope, placed between the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428, 2432. In one embodiment, the force applied by the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428, 2432 is sufficient to clamp the alignment device 2404 with respect to a surgical viewing aid. In one embodiment, the clamp 2412 is configured to couple with any one of (or more than one of) the currently commercially available surgical microscopes.
  • The fixture 2408 preferably also is configured to suspend the alignment device 2404 at an elevation below the clamp 2412. In the illustrated embodiment, a bracket 2440 is coupled with the clamp 2412, which is an L-shaped bracket in the illustrated embodiment with a portion of the L extending downward from the clamp 2412. FIG. 56 shows the L-shaped bracket spaced laterally from the clamp 2412 by a spacer 2444. In one embodiment, the bracket 2440 is pivotably coupled with the spacer 2444 so that the alignment device 2404 can be easily rotated out of the field of view of the surgical microscope or viewing aid, which is visible through the spaced defined between the surfaces 2428, 2432.
  • Preferably the fixture 2408 is also configured to enable the alignment device 2404 to be positioned at a selected elevation within a range of elevations beneath the clamp 2412. The elevation of the alignment device 2404 may be easily and quickly adjusted by manipulating a suitable mechanism. For example, manual actuation may be employed by providing a knob 2460 coupled with a rack-and-pinion gear coupling 2464. Of course the rack-and-pinion gear coupling 2464 can be actuated by another manual device that is more remote, such as by a foot pedal or trigger or by an automated device.
  • FIGS. 57-59 show further details of the alignment device 2404. The alignment device 2404 is operatively coupled with an illuminator control device 2500 and includes an alignment module 2504, a marking module 2508, and an image routing module 2512. As discussed below, the illuminator control device 2500 controls light or energy sources associated with the alignment control device 2404. In some embodiments, the illuminator control device 2500 forms a part of a computer or other signal processing device, similar to the computer 2036 discussed above.
  • The alignment module 2504 is similar to the alignment module 2020 except as set forth below. The alignment module 2504 includes a housing 2520 that extends between a first end 2524 and a second end 2528. The first end 2524 of the housing 2520 is coupled with the image routing module 2512 and interacts with the image routing module 2512 in a manner described below. The housing 2520 includes a rigid body 2532 that preferably is hollow. An axis 2536 extends within the hollow portion of the housing 2520 between the first and second ends 2524, 2528. In the illustrated embodiment, the second end 2528 of the housing 2520 is enclosed by an end plate 2540.
  • The housing 2520 is configured to protect a variety of components that are positioned in the hollow spaced defined therein. In one embodiment, a target illuminator 2560 is positioned inside the housing 2520 near the second end 2528 thereof. A power cable 2564 (or other electrical conveyance) that extends from the end plate 2540 electrically connects the target illuminator 2560 to a power source. The target illuminator 2560 could also be triggered and powered by a wireless connection. In one arrangement, the power source forms a portion of the illuminator control device 2500 to which the power cable 2564 is connected. Power may be from any suitable power source, e.g., from a battery or electrical outlet of suitable voltage.
  • As discussed above, the illuminator control device 2500 enables the surgeon (or other person assisting in a procedure) to control the amount of energy supplied to the target illuminator 2560 in the alignment module 2504. In one embodiment, the illuminator control device 2500 has a brightness control so that the brightness of the target illumination 2560 can be adjusted. The brightness control may be actuated in a suitable manner, such as by a brightness control knob 2568. The brightness control may take any other suitable form to provide manual analog (e.g., continuous) adjustment of the amount of energy applied to the target illuminator 2560 or to provide manual digital (e.g., discrete) adjustment of the amount of energy applied to the target illuminator 2560. In some embodiments, the brightness control may be adjustable automatically, e.g., under computer control. The illuminator control device 2500 may also have an on-off switch 2572 configured to selectively apply and cut off power to the target illuminator 2560. The on-off switch 2572 may be operated manually, automatically, or in a partially manual and partially automatic mode. The brightness control and on-off switch could be controlled wirelessly in another embodiment.
  • Also located in the housing 2520 are a first target 2592, a second target 2596, and a lens 2600. As discussed above, the first and second targets 2592, 2596 are configured to present a composite image to the patient's eye such that the patient may align the line-of-sight of the eye with an axis (e.g., the axis 2536) of the alignment module 2504. The first and second targets 2592, 2596 are similar to the targets discussed above. In particular, the alignment target 2081, which includes two targets on opposite ends of a single component, may be positioned within the housing 2520.
  • The lens 2600 may be any suitable lens. Preferably the lens 2600 is configured to sharply focus one or both of the images of the first and second targets 2592, 2596 in a manner similar to the focus of the targets 2056, 2060, discussed above.
  • In one embodiment, the alignment module 2504 is configured such that the position of the first and second targets 2592, 2596 within the housing 2520 can be adjusted. The adjustability of the first and second targets 2592, 2596 may be provided with any suitable arrangement. FIGS. 57-58 shows that in one embodiment the alignment module 2504 includes a target adjustment device 2612 to provide rapid gross adjustment and fine adjustment of the positions of the targets 2592, 2596 within the housing 2520.
  • In one embodiment, the target adjustment device 2612 includes a support member 2616 that extends along at least a portion of the housing 2520 between the first end 2524 and the second end 2528. In one embodiment, the support member 2616 is coupled with the end plate 2540 and with the image routing module 2512. In one embodiment, the target adjustment device 2612 includes a lens fixture 2620 that is coupled with the lens 2600 and a target fixture 2624 that is coupled with the first and second targets 2592, 2596. In another embodiment, each of the first and second targets 2592, 2596 is coupled with a separate target fixture so that the targets may be individually positioned and adjusted. The lens 2600 may be adjustable as shown, or in a fixed position. Movement of the lens and the targets 2592, 2596 enable the patterns on the targets 2592, 2596 to be brought into focus from the patient's point of view.
  • In one arrangement, the support member 2616 is a threaded rod and each of the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 has a corresponding threaded through hole to receive the threaded support member 2616. Preferably an adjustment device, such as a knob 2628 is coupled with the threaded support member 2616 so that the support member 2616 may be rotated. The knob 2628 may be knurled to make it easier to grasp and rotate. Rotation of the support member 2616 causes the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 to translate on the support member 2616 along the outside of the housing 2520. The movement of the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 provides a corresponding movement of the first and second targets 2592, 2596 within the housing 2520.
  • In one embodiment a quick release mechanism 2640 is provided to enable the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 selectively to clamp and to release the support member 2616. The quick release mechanism 2640 can be a spring loaded clamp that causes the through holes formed in the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 to open to create a gap through which the support member 2616 can pass. When the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 are removed from the support member 2616, the can be quickly moved to another position on the support member 2616. After rapid repositioning, fine positioning of the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 may be achieved with by turning the support member 2616.
  • As discussed above, the alignment device 2404 also includes a marking module 2508 that is similar to the marking module 2024 described above, except as set forth below. The marking module includes a housing 2642 that is generally rigid and that defines a hollow space within the housing. The housing 2642 includes a first end 2644 that is coupled with the image routing module 2512 and a second end 2648 that is closed by an end plate 2652. In one embodiment, the housing 2642 includes a first portion 2656 and a second portion 2660. The first and second portions 2656, 2660 preferably are configured to be disengaged from each other so that components located in the hollow space defined in the housing 2642 to be accessed. Such rapid access facilitates servicing and reconfiguring of the components located in the housing 2642. The first portion 2656 extends between the first end 2644 and a midpoint of the housing 2642. The second portion 2660 extends between the first portion 2656 and the second end 2648 of the housing 2642. In one embodiment, the first portion 2656 has a male member with external threads and the second portion 2660 has a female member with internal thread such that the first and second portions 2656, 2660 may be engaged with and disengaged from each other by way of the threads.
  • As discussed above, the housing 2642 provides a space in which one or more components may be positioned. In the illustrated embodiment, the housing 2642 encloses a marking target illuminator 2680 and a marking target 2684.
  • The marking target illuminator 2680 may be a suitable source of radiant energy, e.g., a light source, such as an incandescent light, a fluorescent light, a light-emitting diode, or other source of radiant energy. As with the target illuminators discussed above, the marking target illuminator 2680 may include or be coupled with suitable optical components to process the light generated thereby in a useful manner, e.g., by providing one or more filters to modify the light, e.g., by allowing a subset of the spectrum of light energy emitted by the light source (e.g., one or more bands of the electromagnetic spectrum) to be transmitted toward the marking target 2684.
  • In the illustrated embodiment, the marking target illuminator 2680 is located near the end plate 2652. A power cable 2688 (or other electrical conveyance) that extends from the end plate 2652 electrically connects the marking target illuminator 2680 to a power source. In one arrangement, the power source forms a portion of the illuminator control device 2500 to which the power cable 2688 is connected. Power may be from any suitable power source, e.g., from a battery or electrical outlet of suitable voltage.
  • As discussed above, the illuminator control device 2500 enables the surgeon (or other person assisting in a procedure) to control the amount of energy supplied to the target illuminator 2680 in the marking module 2508. The illuminator control device 2500 has a brightness control so that the brightness of the marking target illumination 2680 can be adjusted. The brightness control may be actuated in a suitable manner, such as by a brightness control knob 2692. The brightness control may be similar to that discussed above in connection with the brightness control of the target illuminator 2560. The illuminator control device 2500 may also have an on-off switch 2696 configured to selectively apply and cut off power to the marking target illuminator 2680. The on-off switch 2696 may be operated manually, automatically, or in a partially manual and partially automatic mode. Any of the power supply, the brightness control, and the on-off switch may be implemented wirelessly in various other embodiments.
  • In one embodiment, the marking target 2684 is a reticle, e.g., made of glass, with an annular shape formed thereon. For example, the annular shape formed on the marking target 2684 may be a substantially clear annulus surrounded by opaque regions. In this configuration, light directed toward the marking target 2684 interacts with the marking target 2684 to produce and annular image. In another embodiment, the marking target 2684 may be a substantially clear reticle with an opaque shape, such as an opaque annular shape. The annular image is directed into the image routing device 2684, as discussed further below. The marking target 2684 may be housed in a fixture 2718 that is removable, e.g., when the first portion 2656 and the second portion 2660 of the housing 2642 are decoupled. The first portion 2656 of the housing 2642 is configured to engage the fixture 2718 to relatively precisely position the marking target 2684 with respect to an axis of the housing 2642.
  • FIG. 59 shows the image routing module 2512 in greater detail. The image routing module 2512 is primarily useful for routing light that conveys the target and marking images to an eye of a patient. The image routing module 2512 provides flexibility in the positioning of the various components of the alignment device 2404. For example, the image routing module 2512 enables the housing 2520 and the housing 2556 to be generally in the same plane and positioned generally parallel to each other. This provides a relatively compact arrangement for the alignment device 2404, which is advantageous in the surgical setting because, as discussed above, it is desirable for the surgeon to be as close to the surgical site as possible. In addition, the compact arrangement of the alignment device 2404 minimizes or at least reduces the extent to which the alignment device 2404 interferes with free movement of the surgeon and others assisting the surgeon.
  • FIGS. 58 and 59 shows that the image routing module 2512 includes a housing 2720 that is coupled with the first end 2524 and the housing 2520 and with the first end 2644 of the housing 2642. A space defined within the housing 2720 houses a first optic device 2728 and a second optic device 2732. The first optic device 2728 has a reflective surface that faces the marking target 2684 and is configured to reflect light conveying an image of the marking target 2684 toward the second optic device 2732. The first optic device 2728 may be a mirror. The second optic device 2732 has a surface 2736 that faces the first optic device 2728 and is reflective to light from the first optic device 2728. The second optic device 2732 thus reflects light that is directed toward it by the first optic device 2728.
  • The image routing module 2512 also may include a third optic device 2740 and a frame 2744 coupled with the housing 2720. The frame 2744 is configured to position and orient the third optic device 2740 with respect to the housing 2720. In one embodiment, the third optic device 2740 is a beamsplitter and the frame 2744 holds the third optic device 2740 at about a forty-five degree angle with respect to the axis 2520. In this position, the third optic device 2740 interacts with light reflected by the first surface 2736 of the second optic device 2732. The third optic device 2740 may operate in a manner similar to the beamsplitter 2080 of FIG. 55.
  • The second optic device 2732 is configured to be transparent to substantially all of the light conveying an image along the axis 2536 such that the image conveyed along the axis 2536 may be directed to the third optic device 2740 and thereafter to an eye of a surgeon, as discussed about in connection with FIG. 55.
  • Although the image routing device is shown with first, second, and third optic devices 2728, 2732, 2740 to route light conveying images in a particular manner, one skilled in the art will recognize that the image routing device 2512 could have more or fewer optic devices that route the image, depending on the desired geometry and compactness of the alignment device 2404.
  • A variation of the alignment device 2404 provides a marking module with a secondary marking module not routed through the optics of the alignment device 2404. In one embodiment, the secondary marking module includes a source of radiant energy, e.g., a laser or other light source. The source of radiant energy is configured to direct a plurality of spots (e.g., three, four, or more than four spots) onto the patient's eye. The spots indicate positions on the eye that correlate with an edge of a mask when the mask is in the correct position with respect to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064. The spots can be aligned with the projected marking target such that they hit at a selected location on the projected marking target (e.g., circumferentially spaced locations on the inner edge, on the outer edge, or on both the inner and outer edges). At least a portion of the secondary marking module is coupled with the frame 2744 in one embodiment. A laser of the secondary marking module could be attached to the frame 2744 and suspended therefrom, oriented downward toward the patient's eye. As discussed above, this arrangement provides a secondary device for marking the proper location of a mask with respect to a patient's line of sight after the line of sight has been identified.
  • Although various exemplary embodiments of apparatuses and methods for aligning a patient's line-of-sight with an axis of an instrument in connection with the application of a mask have been discussed hereinabove, it should be apparent to those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made which will achieve at least some of the advantages of the invention without departing from, the true scope of the invention. These and other obvious modifications are intended to be covered by the appended claims.
  • V. Masks Configured to Reduce the Visibility of Diffraction Patterns
  • Many of the foregoing masks can be used to improve the depth of focus of a patient. Various additional mask embodiments are discussed below. Some of the embodiments described below include nutrient transport structures that are configured to enhance or maintain nutrient flow between adjacent tissues by facilitating transport of nutrients across the mask. The nutrient transport structures of some of the embodiments described below are configured to at least substantially prevent nutrient depletion in adjacent tissues. The nutrient transport structures can decrease negative effects due to the presence of the mask in adjacent corneal layers when the mask is implanted in the cornea, increasing the longevity of the masks. The inventors have discovered that certain arrangements of nutrient transport structures generate diffraction patterns that interfere with the vision improving effect of the masks described herein. Accordingly, certain masks are described herein that include nutrient transport structures that do not generate diffraction patterns or otherwise interfere with the vision enhancing effects of the mask embodiments.
  • FIGS. 60-61 show one embodiment of a mask 3000 configured to increase depth of focus of an eye of a patient suffering from presbyopia. The mask 3000 is similar to the masks hereinbefore described, except as set forth below. Also, the mask 3000 can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a-67 d with variations of such processes. The mask 3000 is configured to be applied to an eye of a patient, e.g., by being implanted in the cornea of the patient. The mask 3000 may be implanted within the cornea in any suitable manner, such as those discussed above in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C.
  • In one embodiment, the mask 3000 includes a body 3004 that has an anterior surface 3008 and a posterior surface 3012. In one embodiment, the body 3004 is capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow between the first corneal layer and the second corneal layer. In one embodiment, the material is selected to maintain at least about ninety-six percent of the natural flow of at least one nutrient (e.g., glucose) between a first corneal layer (e.g., the layer 1410) and a second corneal layer (e.g., the layer 1430). The body 3004 may be formed of any suitable material, including at least one of an open cell foam material, an expanded solid material, and a substantially opaque material. In one embodiment, the material used to form the body 3004 has relatively high water content.
  • In one embodiment, the mask 3000 includes and a nutrient transport structure 3016. The nutrient transport structure 3016 may comprise a plurality of holes 3020. The holes 3020 are shown on only a portion of the mask 3000, but the holes 3020 preferably are located throughout the body 3004 in one embodiment. In one embodiment, the holes 3020 are arranged in a hex pattern, which is illustrated by a plurality of locations 3020′ in FIG. 62A. As discussed below, a plurality of locations may be defined and later used in the later formation of a plurality of holes 3020 on the mask 3000. The mask 3000 has an outer periphery 3024 that defines an outer edge of the body 3004. In some embodiments, the mask 3000 includes an aperture 3028 at least partially surrounded by the outer periphery 3024 and a non-transmissive portion 3032 located between the outer periphery 3024 and the aperture 3028.
  • Preferably the mask 3000 is symmetrical, e.g., symmetrical about a mask axis 3036. In one embodiment, the outer periphery 3024 of the mask 3000 is circular. The masks in general have has a diameter within the range of from about 3 mm to about 8 mm, often within the range of from about 3.5 mm to about 6 mm, and less than about 6 mm in one embodiment. In another embodiment, the mask is circular and has a diameter in the range of 4 to 6 mm. In another embodiment, the mask 3000 is circular and has a diameter of less than 4 mm. The outer periphery 3024 has a diameter of about 3.8 mm in another embodiment. In some embodiments, masks that are asymmetrical or that are not symmetrical about a mask axis provide benefits, such as enabling a mask to be located or maintained in a selected position with respect to the anatomy of the eye.
  • The body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be configured to coupled with a particular anatomical region of the eye. The body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be configured to conform to the native anatomy of the region of the eye in which it is to be applied. For example, where the mask 3000 is to be coupled with an ocular structure that has curvature, the body 3004 may be provided with an amount of curvature along the mask axis 3036 that corresponds to the anatomical curvature. For example, one environment in which the mask 3000 may be deployed is within the cornea of the eye of a patient. The cornea has an amount of curvature that varies from person to person about a substantially constant mean value within an identifiable group, e.g., adults. When applying the mask 3000 within the cornea, at least one of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008, 3012 of the mask 3000 may be provided with an amount of curvature corresponding to that of the layers of the cornea between which the mask 3000 is applied.
  • In some embodiments, the mask 3000 has a desired amount of optical power. Optical power may be provided by configuring the at least one of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008, 3012 with curvature. In one embodiment, the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008, 3012 are provided with different amounts of curvature. In this embodiment, the mask 3000 has varying thickness from the outer periphery 3024 to the aperture 3028.
  • In one embodiment, one of the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the body 3004 is substantially planar. In one planar embodiment, very little or no uniform curvature can be measured across the planar surface. In another embodiment, both of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008, 3012 are substantially planar. In general, the thickness of the inlay may be within the range of from about 1 micron to about 40 micron, and often in the range of from about 5 micron to about 20 micron. In one embodiment, the body 3004 of the mask 3000 has a thickness 3038 of between about 5 micron and about 10 micron. In one embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 5 micron. In another embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 8 micron. In another embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 10 micron.
  • Thinner masks generally are more suitable for applications wherein the mask 3000 is implanted at a relatively shallow location in (e.g., close to the anterior surface of) the cornea. In thinner masks, the body 3004 may be sufficiently flexible such that it can take on the curvature of the structures with which it is coupled without negatively affecting the optical performance of the mask 3000. In one application, the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 5 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea. In another application, the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 65 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea. In another application, the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 125 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea. Further details regarding implanting the mask 3000 in the cornea are discussed above in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C.
  • A substantially planar mask has several advantages over a non-planar mask. For example, a substantially planar mask can be fabricated more easily than one that has to be formed to a particular curvature. In particular, the process steps involved in inducing curvature in the mask 3000 can be eliminated. Also, a substantially planar mask may be more amenable to use on a wider distribution of the patient population (or among different sub-groups of a broader patient population) because the substantially planar mask uses the curvature of each patient's cornea to induce the appropriate amount of curvature in the body 3004.
  • In some embodiments, the mask 3000 is configured specifically for the manner and location of coupling with the eye. In particular, the mask 3000 may be larger if applied over the eye as a contact lens or may be smaller if applied within the eye posterior of the cornea, e.g., proximate a surface of the lens of the eye. As discussed above, the thickness 3038 of the body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be varied based on where the mask 3000 is implanted. For implantation at deeper levels within the cornea, a thicker mask may be advantageous. Thicker masks are advantageous in some applications. For example, they are generally easier to handle, and therefore are easier to fabricate and to implant. Thicker masks may benefit more from having a preformed curvature than thinner masks. A thicker mask could be configured to have little or no curvature prior to implantation if it is configured to conform to the curvature of the native anatomy when applied.
  • The aperture 3028 is configured to transmit substantially all incident light along the mask axis 3036. The non-transmissive portion 3032 surrounds at least a portion of the aperture 3028 and substantially prevents transmission of incident light thereon. As discussed in connection with the above masks, the aperture 3028 may be a through-hole in the body 3004 or a substantially light transmissive (e.g., transparent) portion thereof. The aperture 3028 of the mask 3000 generally is defined within the outer periphery 3024 of the mask 3000. The aperture 3028 may take any of suitable configurations, such as those described above in connection with FIGS. 6-42.
  • In one embodiment, the aperture 3028 is substantially circular and is substantially centered in the mask 3000. The size of the aperture 3028 may be any size that is effective to increase the depth of focus of an eye of a patient suffering from presbyopia. For example, the aperture 3028 can be circular, having a diameter of less than about 2.2 mm in one embodiment. In another embodiment, the diameter of the aperture is between about 1.8 mm and about 2.2 mm. In another embodiment, the aperture 3028 is circular and has a diameter of about 1.8 mm or less. Most apertures will have a diameter within the range of from about 1.0 mm to about 2.5 mm, and often within the range of from about 1.3 mm to about 1.9 mm.
  • The non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to prevent transmission of radiant energy through the mask 3000. For example, in one embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of substantially all of at least a portion of the spectrum of the incident radiant energy. In one embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to prevent transmission of substantially all visible light, e.g., radiant energy in the electromagnetic spectrum that is visible to the human eye. The non-transmissive portion 3032 may substantially prevent transmission of radiant energy outside the range visible to humans in some embodiments.
  • As discussed above in connection with FIG. 3, preventing transmission of light through the non-transmissive portion 3032 decreases the amount of light that reaches the retina and the fovea that would not converge at the retina and fovea to form a sharp image. As discussed above in connection with FIG. 4, the size of the aperture 3028 is such that the light transmitted therethrough generally converges at the retina or fovea. Accordingly, a much sharper image is presented to the eye than would otherwise be the case without the mask 3000.
  • In one embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of about 90 percent of incident light. In another embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of about 92 percent of all incident light. The non-transmissive portion 3032 of the mask 3000 may be configured to be opaque to prevent the transmission of light. As used herein the term “opaque” is intended to be a broad term meaning capable of preventing the transmission of radiant energy, e.g., light energy, and also covers structures and arrangements that absorb or otherwise block all or less than all or at least a substantial portion of the light. In one embodiment, at least a portion of the body 3004 is configured to be opaque to more than 99 percent of the light incident thereon.
  • As discussed above, the non-transmissive portion 3032 may be configured to prevent transmission of light without absorbing the incident light. For example, the mask 3000 could be made reflective or could be made to interact with the light in a more complex manner, as discussed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,554,424, issued Apr. 29, 2003, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety;
  • As discussed above, the mask 3000 also has a nutrient transport structure that in some embodiments comprises the plurality of holes 3020. The presence of the plurality of holes 3020 (or other transport structure) may affect the transmission of light through the non-transmissive portion 3032 by potentially allowing more light to pass through the mask 3000. In one embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to absorb about 99 percent or more of the incident light from passing through the mask 3000 without holes 3020 being present. The presence of the plurality of holes 3020 allows more light to pass through the non-transmissive portion 3032 such that only about 92 percent of the light incident on the non-transmissive portion 3032 is prevented from passing through the non-transmissive portion 3032. The holes 3020 may reduce the benefit of the aperture 3028 on the depth of focus of the eye by allowing more light to pass through the non-transmissive portion to the retina.
  • Reduction in the depth of focus benefit of the aperture 3028 due to the holes 3020 is balanced by the nutrient transmission benefits of the holes 3020. In one embodiment, the transport structure 3016 (e.g., the holes 3020) is capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow from a first corneal layer (i.e., one that is adjacent to the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000) to the second corneal layer (i.e., one that is adjacent to the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000). The plurality of holes 3020 are configured to enable nutrients to pass through the mask 3000 between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012. As discussed above, the holes 3020 of the mask 3000 shown in FIG. 60 may be located anywhere on the mask 3000. Other mask embodiments described herein below locate substantially all of the nutrient transport structure in one or more regions of a mask.
  • The holes 3020 of FIG. 60 extends at least partially between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000. In one embodiment, each of the holes 3020 includes a hole entrance 3060 and a hole exit 3064. The hole entrance 3060 is located adjacent to the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000. The hole exit 3064 is located adjacent to the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000. In one embodiment, each of the holes 3020 extends the entire distance between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000.
  • The transport structure 3016 is configured to maintain the transport of one or more nutrients across the mask 3000. The transport structure 3016 of the mask 3000 provides sufficient flow of one or more nutrients across the mask 3000 to prevent depletion of nutrients at least at one of the first and second corneal layers (e.g., the layers 1410 and 1430). One nutrient of particular importance to the viability of the adjacent corneal layers is glucose. The transport structure 3016 of the mask 3000 provides sufficient flow of glucose across the mask 3000 between the first and second corneal layers to prevent glucose depletion that would harm the adjacent corneal tissue. Thus, the mask 3000 is capable of substantially maintaining nutrient flow (e.g., glucose flow) between adjacent corneal layers. In one embodiment, the nutrient transport structure 3016 is configured to prevent depletion of more than about 4 percent of glucose (or other biological substance) in adjacent tissue of at least one of the first corneal layer and the second corneal layer.
  • The holes 3020 may be configured to maintain the transport of nutrients across the mask 3000. In one embodiment, the holes 3020 are formed with a diameter of about 0.015 mm or more. In another embodiment, the holes have a diameter of about 0.020 mm. In another embodiment, the holes have a diameter of about 0.025 mm. In another embodiment, the holes 3020 have a diameter in the range of about 0.020 mm to about 0.029 mm. The number of holes in the plurality of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole entrances 3060 of all the holes 3000 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000. In another embodiment, the number of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole exits 3064 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000. In another embodiment, the number of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole exits 3064 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3012 and the sum of the surface areas of the hole entrances 3060 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000.
  • Each of the holes 3020 may have a relatively constant cross-sectional area. In one embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of each of the holes 3020 is substantially circular. Each of the holes 3020 may comprise a cylinder extending between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012.
  • The relative position of the holes 3020 is of interest in some embodiments. As discussed above, the holes 3020 of the mask 3000 are hex-packed, e.g., arranged in a hex pattern. In particular, in this embodiment, each of the holes 3020 is separated from the adjacent holes 3020 by a substantially constant distance, sometimes referred to herein as a hole pitch 3072. In one embodiment, the hole pitch 3072 is about 0.062 mm.
  • In a hex pattern, the angles between lines of symmetry are approximately 60 degrees. The spacing of holes along any line of holes is generally within the range of from about 30 microns to about 100 microns, and, in one embodiment, is approximately 60 microns. The hole diameter is generally within the range of from about 10 microns to about 100 microns, and in one embodiment, is approximately 20 microns. The hole spacing and diameter are related if you want to control the amount of light coming through. The light transmission is a function of the sum of hole areas as will be understood by those of skill in the art in view of the disclosure herein.
  • The embodiment of FIG. 60 advantageously enables nutrients to flow from the first corneal layer to the second corneal layer. The inventors have discovered that negative visual effects can arise due to the presence of the transport structure 3016. For example, in some cases, a hex packed arrangement of the holes 3020 can generate diffraction patterns visible to the patient. For example, patients might observe a plurality of spots, e.g., six spots, surrounding a central light with holes 3020 having a hex patterned.
  • The inventors have discovered a variety of techniques that produce advantageous arrangements of a transport structure such that diffraction patterns and other deleterious visual effects do not substantially inhibit other visual benefits of a mask. In one embodiment, where diffraction effects would be observable, the nutrient transport structure is arranged to spread the diffracted light out uniformly across the image to eliminate observable spots. In another embodiment, the nutrient transport structure employs a pattern that substantially eliminates diffraction patterns or pushes the patterns to the periphery of the image.
  • FIG. 62B-62C show two embodiments of patterns of holes 4020 that may be applied to a mask that is otherwise substantially similar to the mask 3000. The holes 4020 of the hole patterns of FIGS. 62A-62B are spaced from each other by a random hole spacing or hole pitch. In other embodiments discussed below, holes are spaced from each other by a non-uniform amount, e.g., not a random amount. In one embodiment, the holes 4020 have a substantially uniform shape (cylindrical shafts having a substantially constant cross-sectional area). FIG. 62C illustrates a plurality of holes 4020 separated by a random spacing, wherein the density of the holes is greater than that of FIG. 62B. Generally, the higher the percentage of the mask body that has holes the more the mask will transport nutrients in a manner similar to the native tissue. One way to provide a higher percentage of hole area is to increase the density of the holes. Increase hole density can also permit smaller holes to achieve the same nutrient transport as is achieved by less dense, larger holes.
  • FIG. 63A shows a portion of another mask 4000 a that is substantially similar to the mask 3000, except as set forth below. The mask 4000 a can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a-67 d and with variations of such processes. The mask 4000 a has a plurality of holes 4020 a. A substantial number of the holes 4020 a have a non-uniform size. The holes 4020 a may be uniform in cross-sectional shape. The cross-sectional shape of the holes 4020 a is substantially circular in one embodiment. The holes 4020 a may be circular in shape and have the same diameter from a hole entrance to a hole exit, but are otherwise non-uniform in at least one aspect, e.g., in size. It may be preferable to vary the size of a substantial number of the holes by a random amount. In another embodiment, the holes 4020 a are non-uniform (e.g., random) in size and are separated by a non-uniform (e.g., a random) spacing.
  • FIG. 63B illustrates another embodiment of a mask 4000 b that is substantially similar to the mask 3000, except as set forth below. Also, the mask 4000 b can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a-67 d and with variations of such processes. The mask 4000 b includes a body 4004 b. The mask 4000 b has a transport structure 4016 b that includes a plurality of holes 4020 b with a non-uniform facet orientation. In particular, each of the holes 4020 b has a hole entrance that may be located at an anterior surface 4008 b of the mask 4000 b. A facet of the hole entrance is defined by a portion of the body 4004 b of the mask 4000 b surrounding the hole entrance. The facet is the shape of the hole entrance at the anterior surface 4008 b. In one embodiment, most or all the facets have an elongate shape, e.g., an oblong shape, with a long axis and a short axis that is perpendicular to the long axis. The facets may be substantially uniform in shape. In one embodiment, the orientation of facets is not uniform. For example, a substantial number of the facets may have a non-uniform orientation. In one arrangement, a substantial number of the facets have a random orientation. In some embodiments, the facets are non-uniform (e.g., random) in shape and are non-uniform (e.g., random) in orientation.
  • Other embodiments may be provided that vary at least one aspect, including one or more of the foregoing aspects, of a plurality of holes to reduce the tendency of the holes to produce visible diffraction patterns or patterns that otherwise reduce the vision improvement that may be provided by a mask with an aperture, such as any of those described above. For example, in one embodiment, the hole size, shape, and orientation of at least a substantial number of the holes may be varied randomly or may be otherwise non-uniform.
  • FIG. 64 shows another embodiment of a mask 4200 that is substantially similar to any of the masks hereinbefore described, except as set forth below. Also, the mask 4200 can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a-67 d and with variations of such processes. The mask 4200 includes a body 4204. The body 4204 has an outer peripheral region 4205, an inner peripheral region 4206, and a hole region 4207. The hole region 4207 is located between the outer peripheral region 4205 and the outer peripheral region 4206. The body 4204 may also include an aperture region, where the aperture (discussed below) is not a through hole. The mask 4200 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4216. In one embodiment, the nutrient transport structure includes a plurality of holes 4220. At least a substantial portion of the holes 4220 (e.g., all of the holes) are located in the hole region 4207. As above, only a portion of the nutrient structure 4216 is shown for simplicity. But it should be understood that the hole 4220 may be located through the hole region 4207.
  • The outer peripheral region 4205 may extend from an outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200 to a selected outer circumference 4225 of the mask 4200. The selected outer circumference 4225 of the mask 4200 is located a selected radial distance from the outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200. In one embodiment, the selected outer circumference 4225 of the mask 4200 is located about 0.05 mm from the outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200.
  • The inner peripheral region 4206 may extend from an inner location, e.g., an inner periphery 4226 adjacent an aperture 4228 of the mask 4200 to a selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200. The selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200 is located a selected radial distance from the inner periphery 4226 of the mask 4200. In one embodiment, the selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200 is located about 0.05 mm from the inner periphery 4226.
  • The mask 4200 may be the product of a process that involves random selection of a plurality of locations and formation of holes on the mask 4200 corresponding to the locations. As discussed further below, the method can also involve determining whether the selected locations satisfy one or more criteria. For example, one criterion prohibits all, at least a majority, or at least a substantial portion of the holes from being formed at locations that correspond to the inner or outer peripheral regions 4205, 4206. Another criterion prohibits all, at least a majority, or at least a substantial portion of the holes 4220 from being formed too close to each other. For example, such a criterion could be used to assure that a wall thickness, e.g., the shortest distance between adjacent holes, is not less than a predetermined amount. In one embodiment, the wall thickness is prevented from being less than about 20 microns.
  • In a variation of the embodiment of FIG. 64, the outer peripheral region 4205 is eliminated and the hole region 4207 extends from the inner peripheral region 4206 to an outer periphery 4224. In another variation of the embodiment of FIG. 64, the inner peripheral region 4206 is eliminated and the hole region 4207 extends from the outer peripheral region 4205 to an inner periphery 4226.
  • FIG. 61B shows a mask 4300 that is similar to the mask 3000 except as set forth below. The mask 4300 can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a-67 d and with variations of such processes. The mask 4300 includes a body 4304 that has an anterior surface 4308 and a posterior surface 4312. The mask 4300 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4316 that, in one embodiment, includes a plurality of holes 4320. The holes 4320 are formed in the body 4304 so that nutrient transport is provided but transmission of radiant energy (e.g., light) to the retinal locations adjacent the fovea through the holes 4304 is substantially prevented. In particular, the holes 4304 are formed such that when the eye with which the mask 4300 is coupled is directed at an object to be viewed, light conveying the image of that object that enters the holes 4320 cannot exit the holes along a path ending near the fovea.
  • In one embodiment, each of the holes 4320 has a hole entrance 4360 and a hole exit 4364. Each of the holes 4320 extends along a transport axis 4366. The transport axis 4366 is formed to substantially prevent propagation of light from the anterior surface 4308 to the posterior surface 4312 through the holes 4320. In one embodiment, at least a substantial number of the holes 4320 have a size to the transport axis 4366 that is less than a thickness of the mask 4300. In another embodiment, at least a substantial number of the holes 4320 have a longest dimension of a perimeter at least at one of the anterior or posterior surfaces 4308, 4312 (e.g., a facet) that is less than a thickness of the mask 4300. In some embodiments, the transport axis 4366 is formed at an angle with respect to a mask axis 4336 that substantially prevents propagation of light from the anterior surface 4308 to the posterior surface 4312 through the hole 4320. In another embodiment, the transport axis 4366 of one or more holes 4320 is formed at an angle with respect to the mask axis 4336 that is large enough to prevent the projection of most of the hole entrance 4360 from overlapping the hole exit 4364.
  • In one embodiment, the hole 4320 is circular in cross-section and has a diameter between about 0.5 micron and about 8 micron and the transport axis 4366 is between 5 and 85 degrees. The length of each of the holes 4320 (e.g., the distance between the anterior surface 4308 and the posterior surface 4312) is between about 8 and about 92 micron. In another embodiment, the diameter of the holes 4320 is about 5 micron and the transport angle is about 40 degrees or more. As the length of the holes 4320 increases it may be desirable to include additional holes 4320. In some cases, additional holes 4320 counteract the tendency of longer holes to reduce the amount of nutrient flow through the mask 4300.
  • FIG. 61C shows another embodiment of a mask 4400 similar to the mask 3000, except as set forth below. The mask 4400 can be formed by any suitable process, such as those discussed below in connection with FIGS. 67 a-67 d and with variations of such processes. The mask 4400 includes a body 4404 that has an anterior surface 4408, a first mask layer 4410 adjacent the anterior surface 4408, a posterior surface 4412, a second mask layer 4414 adjacent the posterior surface 4412, and a third mask layer 4415 located between the first mask layer 4410 and the second mask layer 4414. The mask 4400 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4416 that, in one embodiment, includes a plurality of holes 4420. The holes 4420 are formed in the body 4404 so that nutrient are transported across the mask, as discussed above, but transmission of radiant energy (e.g., light) to retinal locations adjacent the fovea through the holes 4404 is substantially prevented. In particular, the holes 4404 are formed such that when the eye with which the mask 4400 is coupled is directed at an object to be viewed, light conveying the image of that object that enters the holes 4420 cannot exit the holes along a path ending near the fovea.
  • In one embodiment, at least one of the holes 4420 extends along a non-linear path that substantially prevents propagation of light from the anterior surface to the posterior surface through the at least one hole. In one embodiment, the mask 4400 includes a first hole portion 4420 a that extends along a first transport axis 4466 a, the second mask layer 4414 includes a second hole portion 4420 b extending along a second transport axis 4466 b, and the third mask layer 4415 includes a third hole portion 4420 c extending along a third transport axis 4466 c. The first, second, and third transport axes 4466 a, 4466 b, 4466 c preferably are not collinear. In one embodiment, the first and second transport axes 4466 a, 4466 b are parallel but are off-set by a first selected amount. In one embodiment, the second and third transport axes 4466 b, 4466 c are parallel but are off-set by a second selected amount. In the illustrated embodiment, each of the transport axes 44466 a, 4466 b, 4466 c are off-set by one-half of the width of the hole portions 4420 a, 4420 b, 4420 c. Thus, the inner-most edge of the hole portion 4420 a is spaced from the axis 4336 by a distance that is equal to or greater than the distance of the outer-most edge of the hole portion 4420 b from the axis 4336. This spacing substantially prevents light from passing through the holes 4420 from the anterior surface 4408 to the posterior surface 4412.
  • In one embodiment, the first and second amounts are selected to substantially prevent the transmission of light therethrough. The first and second amounts of off-set may be achieved in any suitable fashion. One technique for forming the hole portions 4420 a, 4420 b, 4420 c with the desired off-set is to provide a layered structure. As discussed above, the mask 4400 may include the first layer 4410, the second layer 4414, and the third layer 4415. FIG. 61C shows that the mask 4400 can be formed with three layers. In another embodiment, the mask 4400 is formed of more than three layers. Providing more layers may advantageously further decrease the tendency of light to be transmitted through the holes 4420 onto the retina. This has the benefit of reducing the likelihood that a patient will observe or otherwise perceive a patter that will detract from the vision benefits of the mask 4400. A further benefit is that less light will pass through the mask 4400, thereby enhancing the depth of focus increase due to the pin-hole sized aperture formed therein.
  • In any of the foregoing mask embodiments, the body of the mask may be formed of a material selected to provide adequate nutrient transport and to substantially prevent negative optic effects, such as diffraction, as discussed above. In various embodiments, the masks are formed of an open cell foam material. In another embodiment, the masks are formed of an expanded solid material.
  • As discussed above in connection with FIGS. 62B and 62C, various random patterns of holes may advantageously be provided for nutrient transport. In some embodiment, it may be sufficient to provide regular patterns that are non-uniform in some aspect. Non-uniform aspects to the holes may be provided by any suitable technique.
  • In a first step of one technique, a plurality of locations 4020′ is generated. The locations 4020′ are a series of coordinates that may comprise a non-uniform pattern or a regular pattern. The locations 4020′ may be randomly generated or may be related by a mathematical relationship (e.g., separated by a fixed spacing or by an amount that can be mathematically defined). In one embodiment, the locations are selected to be separated by a constant pitch or spacing and may be hex packed.
  • In a second step, a subset of the locations among the plurality of locations 4020′ is modified to maintain a performance characteristic of the mask. The performance characteristic may be any performance characteristic of the mask. For example, the performance characteristic may relate to the structural integrity of the mask. Where the plurality of locations 4020′ is selected at random, the process of modifying the subset of locations may make the resulting pattern of holes in the mask a “pseudo-random” pattern.
  • Where a hex packed pattern of locations (such as the locations 3020′ of FIG. 62A) is selected in, the first step, the subset of locations may be moved with respect to their initial positions as selected in the first step. In one embodiment, each of the locations in the subset of locations is moved by an amount equal to a fraction of the hole spacing. For example, each of the locations in the subset of locations may be moved by an amount equal to one-quarter of the hole spacing. Where the subset of locations is moved by a constant amount, the locations that are moved preferably are randomly or pseudo-randomly selected. In another embodiment, the subset of location is moved by a random or a pseudo-random amount.
  • In one technique, an outer peripheral region is defined that extends between the outer periphery of the mask and a selected radial distance of about 0.05 mm from the outer periphery. In another embodiment, an inner peripheral region is defined that extends between an aperture of the mask and a selected radial distance of about 0.05 mm from the aperture. In another embodiment, an outer peripheral region is defined that extends between the outer periphery of the mask and a selected radial distance and an inner peripheral region is defined that extends between the aperture of the mask and a selected radial distance from the aperture. In one technique, the subset of location is modified by excluding those locations that would correspond to holes formed in the inner peripheral region or the outer peripheral region. By excluding locations in at least one of the outer peripheral region and the inner peripheral region, the strength of the mask in these regions is increased. Several benefits are provided by stronger inner and outer peripheral regions. For example, the mask may be easier to handle during manufacturing or when being applied to a patient without causing damage to the mask.
  • In another embodiment, the subset of locations is modified by comparing the separation of the holes with minimum and or maximum limits. For example, it may be desirable to assure that no two locations are closer than a minimum value. In some embodiments this is important to assure that the wall thickness, which corresponds to the separation between adjacent holes, is no less than a minimum amount. As discussed above, the minimum value of separation is about 20 microns in one embodiment, thereby providing a wall thickness of no less than about 20 microns.
  • In another embodiment, the subset of locations is modified and/or the pattern of location is augmented to maintain an optical characteristic of the mask. For example, the optical characteristic may be opacity and the subset of locations may be modified to maintain the opacity of a non-transmissive portion of a mask. In another embodiment, the subset of locations may be modified by equalizing the density of holes in a first region of the body compared with the density of holes in a second region of the body. For example, the locations corresponding to the first and second regions of the non-transmissive portion of the mask may be identified. In one embodiment, the first region and the second region are arcuate regions (e.g., wedges) of substantially equal area. A first areal density of locations (e.g., locations per square inch) is calculated for the locations corresponding to the first region and a second areal density of locations is calculated for the locations corresponding to the second region. In one embodiment, at least one location is added to either the first or the second region based on the comparison of the first and second areal densities. In another embodiment, at least one location is removed based on the comparison of the first and second areal densities.
  • The subset of locations may be modified to maintain nutrient transport of the mask. In one embodiment, the subset of location is modified to maintain glucose transport.
  • In a third step, a hole is formed in a body of a mask at locations corresponding to the pattern of locations as modified, augmented, or modified and augmented. The holes are configured to substantially maintain natural nutrient flow from the first layer to the second layer without producing visible diffraction patterns.
  • VI. Further Methods of Treating a Patient
  • As discussed above in, various techniques are particularly suited for treating a patient by applying masks such as those disclosed herein to an eye. For example, in some embodiments, the surgical system 2000 of FIG. 55 employs a marking module 2024 that provides a visual cue in the form of a projected image for a surgeon during a procedure for applying a mask. In addition, some techniques for treating a patient involve positioning an implant with the aid of a marked reference point. These methods are illustrated by FIGS. 65-66B.
  • In one method, a patient is treated by placing an implant 5000 in a cornea 5004. A corneal flap 5008 is lifted to expose a surface in the cornea 5004 (e.g., an intracorneal surface). Any suitable tool or technique may be used to lift the corneal flap 5008 to expose a surface in the cornea 5004. For example, a blade (e.g., a microkeratome), a laser or an electrosurgical tool could be used to form a corneal flap. A reference point 5012 on the cornea 5004 is identified. The reference point 5012 thereafter is marked in one technique, as discussed further below. The implant 5000 is positioned on the intracorneal surface. In one embodiment, the flap 5008 is then closed to cover at least a portion of the implant 5000.
  • The surface of the cornea that is exposed is a stromal surface in one technique. The stromal surface may be on the corneal flap 5008 or on an exposed surface from which the corneal flap 5008 is removed.
  • The reference point 5012 may be identified in any suitable manner. For example, the alignment devices and methods described above may be used to identify the reference point 5012. In one technique, identifying the reference point 5012 involves illuminating a light spot (e.g., a spot of light formed by all or a discrete portion of radiant energy corresponding to visible light, e.g., red light). As discussed above, the identifying of a reference point may further include placing liquid (e.g., a fluorescein dye or other dye) on the intracorneal surface. Preferably, identifying the reference point 5012 involves alignment using any of the techniques described herein.
  • As discussed above, various techniques may be used to mark an identified reference point. In one technique the reference point is marked by applying a dye to the cornea or otherwise spreading a material with known reflective properties onto the cornea. As discussed above, the dye may be a substance that interacts with radiant energy to increase the visibility of a marking target or other visual cue. The reference point may be marked by a dye with any suitable tool. The tool is configured so that it bites into a corneal layer, e.g., an anterior layer of the epithelium, and delivers a thin ink line into the corneal layer in one embodiment. The tool may be made sharp to bite into the epithelium. In one application, the tool is configured to deliver the dye as discussed above upon being lightly pressed against the eye. This arrangement is advantageous in that it does not form a larger impression in the eye. In another technique, the reference point may be marked by making an impression (e.g., a physical depression) on a surface of the cornea with or without additional delivery of a dye. In another technique, the reference point may be marked by illuminating a light or other source of radiant energy, e.g., a marking target illuminator and projecting that light onto the cornea (e.g., by projecting a marking target).
  • Any of the foregoing techniques for marking a reference point may be combined with techniques that make a mark that indicates the location of an axis of the eye, e.g., the visual axis or line-of-sight of the eye. In one technique, a mark indicates the approximate intersection of the visual axis and a surface of the cornea. In another technique, a mark is made approximately radially symmetrically disposed about the intersection of the visual axis and a surface of the cornea.
  • As discussed above, some techniques involve making a mark on an intracorneal surface. The mark may be made by any suitable technique. In one technique a mark is made by pressing an implement against the intracorneal surface. The implement may form a depression that has a size and shape that facilitate placement of a mask. For example, in one form the implement is configured to form a circular ring (e.g., a thin line of dye, or a physical depression, or both) with a diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of a mask to be implanted. The circular ring can be formed to have a diameter between about 4 mm and about 5 mm. The intracorneal surface is on the corneal flap 5008 in one technique. In another technique, the intracorneal surface is on an exposed surface of the cornea from which the flap was removed. This exposed surface is sometimes referred to as a tissue bed.
  • In another technique, the corneal flap 5008 is lifted and thereafter is laid on an adjacent surface 5016 of the cornea 5004. In another technique, the corneal flap 5008 is laid on a removable support 5020, such as a sponge. In one technique, the removable support has a surface 5024 that is configured to maintain the native curvature of the corneal flap 5008.
  • FIG. 65 shows that the marked reference point 5012 is helpful in positioning an implant on an intracorneal surface. In particular, the marked reference point 5012 enables the implant to be positioned with respect to the visual axis of the eye. In the illustrated embodiment, the implant 5000 is positioned so that a centerline of the implant, indicated as MCL, extends through the marked reference point 5012.
  • FIG. 65A illustrates another technique wherein a reference 5012′ is a ring or other two dimensional mark. In such a case, the implant 5000 may be placed so that an outer edge of the implant and the ring correspond, e.g., such that the ring and the implant 5000 share the same or substantially the same center. Preferably, the ring and the implant 5000 are aligned so that the centerline of the implant MCL is on the line of sight of the eye, as discussed above. The ring is shown in dashed lines because in the illustrated technique, it is formed on the anterior surface of the corneal flap 5008.
  • In one technique, the corneal flap 5008 is closed by returning the corneal flap 5008 to the cornea 5004 with the implant 5000 on the corneal flap 5008. In another technique, the corneal flap 5008 is closed by returning the corneal flap 5008 to the cornea 5004 over the implant 5000, which previously was placed on the tissue bed (the exposed intracorneal surface).
  • When the intracorneal surface is a stromal surface, the implant 5000 is placed on the stromal surface. At least a portion of the implant 5000 is covered. In some techniques, the implant 5000 is covered by returning a flap with the implant 5000 thereon to the cornea 5004 to cover the stromal surface. In one technique, the stromal surface is exposed by lifting an epithelial layer to expose stroma. In another technique, the stromal surface is exposed by removing an epithelial layer to expose stroma. In some techniques, an additional step of replacing the epithelial layer to at least partially cover the implant 5000 is performed.
  • After the flap 5008 is closed to cover at least a portion of the implant 5000, the implant 5000 may be repositioned to some extent in some applications. In one technique, pressure is applied to the implant 5000 to move the implant into alignment with the reference point 5012. The pressure may be applied to the anterior surface of the cornea 5004 proximate an edge of the implant 5000 (e.g., directly above, above and outside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5000, or above and inside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5000). This may cause the implant to move slightly away from the edge proximate which pressure is applied. In another technique, pressure is applied directly to the implant. The implant 5000 may be repositioned in this manner if the reference point 5012 was marked on the flap 5008 or if the reference point 5012 was marked on the tissue bed. Preferably, pushing is accomplished by inserting a thin tool under the flap or into the pocket and directly moving the inlay.
  • FIG. 66 shows that a patient may also be treated by a method that positions an implant 5100 in a cornea 5104, e.g., in a corneal pocket 5108. Any suitable tool or technique may be used to create or form the corneal pocket 5108. For example, a blade (e.g., a microkeratome), a laser, or an electrosurgical tool could be used to create or form a pocket in the cornea 5104. A reference point 5112 is identified on the cornea 5104. The reference point may be identified by any suitable technique, such as those discussed herein. The reference point 5112 is marked by any suitable technique, such as those discussed herein. The corneal pocket 5108 is created to expose an intracorneal surface 5116. The corneal pocket 5108 may be created at any suitable depth, for example at a depth within a range of from about 50 microns to about 300 microns from the anterior surface of the cornea 5104. The implant 5100 is positioned on the intracorneal surface 5116. The marked reference point 5112 is helpful in positioning the implant 5100 on the intracorneal surface 5116. The marked reference point 5112 enables the implant 5100 to be positioned with respect to the visual axis of the eye, as discussed above. In the illustrated embodiment, the implant 5100 is positioned so that a centerline MCL of the implant 5100 extends through or adjacent to the marked reference point 5112.
  • FIG. 66A illustrates another technique wherein a reference 5112′ is a ring or other two dimensional mark. In such case, the implant 5100 may be placed so that an outer edge of the implant and the ring correspond, e.g., such that the ring and the implant 5100 share the same or substantially the same center. Preferably, the ring and the implant 5100 are aligned so that the centerline of the implant MCL is on the line of sight of the eye, as discussed above. The ring is shown in solid lines because in the illustrated embodiment, it is formed on the anterior surface of the cornea 5104 above the pocket 5108.
  • After the implant 5100 is positioned in the pocket 5108, the implant 5100 may be repositioned to some extent in some applications. In one technique, pressure is applied to the implant 5100 to move the implant into alignment with the reference point 5112. The pressure may be applied to the anterior surface of the cornea 5104 proximate an edge of the implant 5100 (e.g., directly above, above and outside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5100, or above and inside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5100). This may cause the implant 5100 to move slightly away from the edge at which pressure is applied. In another technique, pressure is applied directly to the implant 5100.
  • VII. Methods of Making an Ocular Implant
  • A variety of techniques can be used to make masks that have desirable performance characteristics and that can correct presbyopia and other vision defects in patients. As discussed above, it is desirable that the mask be at least partially opaque to visible light and UV stable in some embodiments. Also, the masks should be sufficiently biocompatible that the mask can reside adjacent or within eye tissue without harming the tissue. The masks also should be relatively thin so that they are capable of being implanted in a thin ocular structure, such as the cornea. It may also be desirable for the masks generally to blend in with adjacent ocular tissue so that the presence of the masks in the eye is not visible to others. For example, the masks can be configured with a non-reflective surface. In many embodiments, the masks are corrosion-resistant. In some embodiments, the masks are flexible and resilient, as it may be desirable for masks that are compressed during deployment to expand to an uncompressed configuration subsequent to deployment.
  • Additionally, applicants have discovered that these processes and methods can be combined with other methods and structures described herein to make a mask or implant that performs well. For example, the methods described below can be combined with techniques discussed above, such as techniques for forming nutrient transport structures. In one method the mask that is formed is a thin, micro-perforated, corneal implant that is bio-compatible and corrosion resistant in the human eye. In one technique, the mask has approximately 1000-3000 micro-perforations extending between a first, e.g., convex, surface and a second, e.g., concave, surface of the mask. The micro-perforations can have a transverse dimension of on average between about 10 microns and about 25 microns.
  • The physical dimensions of the mask can vary depending on the clinical application and individual patient. The mask is of a shape analogous to a washer, e.g., an annulus defined between an inner periphery and an outer periphery. The mask can have an inner diameter of about 1.5 mm, an outer diameter of about 4 mm, and conform to a portion of the surface of a sphere having a radius of curvature of about 8 mm. The curvature of the mask can vary, but it is generally selected to conform to the curvature of an anatomical feature, e.g., the cornea of an adult human eye. The radius of curvature of the mask can be within a range of from about 7.8 mm to about 8.2 mm in some embodiments. The radius of curvature of the mask can be within a range of from about 7.6 mm to about 8.4 mm in other embodiments. The radius of curvature of the mask can be within a range of from about 7.4 mm to about 8.6 mm in other embodiments. The radius of curvature of the mask can be within a range of from about 7.2 mm to about 8.8 mm in other embodiments. The radius of curvature of the mask can be within a range of from about 7 mm to about 9 mm in other embodiments. In some embodiments, the radius of curvature of the mask can be less than 7 mm. In other embodiments, the radius of curvature of the mask can be more than 9 mm. The mask can have a thickness between the convex and concave surfaces of about 10 microns or less or about 7 microns or less. The dimensions listed in this paragraph illustrate a variety of examples. Other dimensions and features discussed elsewhere herein could be substituted for or added to the dimensions discussed in this paragraph.
  • The color of the mask is cosmetically acceptable in one embodiment for implantation in the human cornea, e.g., having a black or a dark color appearance at least on an anterior (convex) side of the annulus.
  • The features and performance characteristics discussed above are largely a function of the materials used to form the masks, the mask design, and manufacturing techniques used. Applicants have discovered that some metals are among the materials that can be configured to exhibit many of these characteristics and that processes that form thin films (e.g., thin films of metal) are well suited for making such ocular implants. Physical vapor deposition, sputtering, electro-depositing and other similar processes discussed herein are particularly well suited for making ocular implants of thin metal films. The techniques discussed herein for forming masks of one or more metal layers can be tailored to reduce the visibility of the masks and can enhance characteristics related to longevity, e.g., corrosion resistance.
  • A. Forming a Mask Using Physical Vapor Deposition
  • FIGS. 67 a-67 d illustrate techniques that can be used to form a mask or an implant for treating presbyopia, such as one similar to the masks and implants discussed herein. These techniques involve forming layers of material, at least one of which is configured for application to a human eye. As discussed below, the layers of material can include any combination of one or more of a release layer, a mask layer, and a sacrificial layer. In some embodiments, multiple mask layers are provided. As discussed further below, one or more layer can be configured as a “cosmetic layer”, which is a broad term encompassing a layer or a surface that provides an appearance desirable to the patient or other person. A cosmetic layer can reduce the visibility of the mask in the eye of the patient. A cosmetic layer can also act as a “non-reflective” layer that reduces the amount of light reflected off the mask. The cosmetic layer can be a mask layer. As discussed below, where multiple mask layers are provided (e.g., at least one cosmetic layer), one or more of the mask layers can be configured to reduce or prevent corrosion (e.g., galvanic corrosion) of the mask. Where multiple mask layers are provided (e.g., at least one cosmetic layer), one or more of the mask layers can be configured to substantially enhance resistance to galvanic corrosion and other modes of mask degradation that would compromise the longevity of the mask. As used herein, the term “sacrificial layer” is a broad term used in its ordinary sense and includes any layer that is formed during a method for making a mask that is primarily or entirely to facilitate other aspects of the method of making and also includes layers that are entirely or substantially removed during the process or are not part of the mask. A “release layer” is a type of sacrificial layer that is intended to facilitate separating one structure from another, e.g., to separate a mask from a substrate, as discussed below. Any suitable technique for forming the layers of material can be exploited. Techniques for forming layers using thin film sputtering are discussed first. The materials for forming the mask layer(s), discussed in connection with thin film sputtering, may also be used with other techniques for forming the mask layer(s). Other techniques that can be used are discussed thereafter.
  • 1. Thin Film Sputtering
  • The applicants have discovered that thin film sputtering is a convenient technique for making a mask that is capable of being implanted in a human eye for treating presbyopia. Thin film sputtering is particularly well suited for making a corneal inlay. Many thin film sputtering techniques include three steps: 1) generating atomic or ionic species from a target comprising a metal or an alloy material; 2) transporting the species from the target to a substrate through a gas or a plasma medium; and 3) condensing the species on a surface of a substrate to form a solid thin film. As discussed below, Argon gas can be used to generate a plasma to enable these process steps. The target can comprise any metal or metal alloy and the substrate can comprise a polished silicon or glass wafer or a wafer of another suitable material. In one technique, a non-planar substrate is used to form one or more mask layer, release layer, or sacrificial layer. In another embodiment, a planar substrate is used to form a layer.
  • FIG. 67 a is a cross-sectional view of a portion of a substrate 6000 that can be used in a sputtering process to form a mask or other thin ocular implant. The substrate 6000 is provided with a top surface 6004 that includes a mask forming feature 6008. In one embodiment, the substrate 6000 also includes a planar portion 6012 that at least partially surrounds the mask forming feature 6008. The planar portion 6012 is a region of the substrate 6000 that can be located between adjacent mask forming features. Although adjacent mask forming features are not shown, such features can be located at regular or non-regular intervals across the substrate 6000. The substrate 6000 can be configured with any number of mask forming features 6008 that will fit on the substrate 6000. For example, in some methods, it is advantageous to form one or two mask forming features 6008 on a substrate. In other embodiments, it is advantageous to form at least four mask forming features 6008 on a substrate. Depending on the size of the substrate and the techniques used, four or more than four mask forming features 6008 could be formed on a substrate. Other techniques permit sixteen, thirty-two, sixty-four or more mask forming features 6008 to be formed on a substrate. In a four inch square substrate, as many as one-hundred-forty-four or more mask forming features 6008 could be formed on the substrate. The arrangement of adjacent mask forming features could use any packing method, e.g., similar to an efficient crystal packing arrangement.
  • The mask forming feature 6008 can be configured such that later process steps produce a mask shaped to conform to the portion of the ocular anatomy where the mask is to be implanted. For example, the mask forming feature 6008 can comprise a curved profile 6016 that corresponds to the curvature of a layer of the cornea, or other ocular feature. In one embodiment, the mask forming feature 6008 includes an annular surface 6020 that surrounds a central axis 6024. In the technique illustrated in FIGS. 67 a-67 d, the annular surface 6020 is substantially smooth, resulting in the formation of a smooth layer, e.g., one without discontinuities, pores, or apertures within the boundaries of the annular surface 6020. In other embodiments, the annular surface 6020 is configured to produce micro-perforations, pores, or holes that form at least a part of a nutrient transport structure similar to those discussed herein. In other embodiments, the annular surface 6020 is configured to produce a desired surface condition of a mask formed thereon that correlates to a desired blending characteristic. The mask forming feature 6008 also includes a central region 6028 which is centered on the central axis 6024 in one embodiment.
  • FIG. 67 a shows the profile of the annular surface 6020 at a section plane that extends through the center of the mask forming feature 6008 and that includes the central axis 6024. The profile of the annular surface 6020 includes a first curved profile 6016 a and a second curved profile 6016 b. The first and second curved profiles 6016 a, 6016 b have generally the same arcuate length and curvature in one embodiment. The annular surface 6020 can be configured to form micro-perforations or pores that form at least a part of a nutrient transport structure. For example, the profiles 6016 a, 6016 b can include a nutrient transport forming feature, such as one or more discontinuities, depressions, holes, or wells that are configured to prevent or substantially prevent bridging across the nutrient transport forming feature in a layer formed above the profiles. In this context, “substantially prevent” means that any bridging that occurs across the nutrient transport forming feature is removable by a later process that will not damage the layer near the feature.
  • In one technique, holes are provided that have a diameter selected to provide an appropriate aspect ratio for nutrient transport features in the mask. For example, the diameter of the holes can be any diameter that provides a ratio of hole size (e.g., diameter) divided by layer thickness that is greater than one. In another technique, the diameter of the holes is selected to provide a ratio of hole size (e.g., diameter) divided by layer thickness that is about one. Nutrient transport structures can be formed in other ways, e.g., using photolithography, as discussed below.
  • The annular surface 6020 can be configured to form a mask with an anterior surface having a selected surface condition. For example, one technique produces a mask with a surface roughness that produces a desired blending characteristic. A blending characteristic is a characteristic that makes an implant partially or completely non-observable by persons other than the patient. Some materials that can be used in the techniques discussed below to form a mask from one or more layers of thin metal can be made to appear darker by increasing the roughness of a surface that is visible when the mask is implanted, e.g., the anterior surface. In some techniques, in addition to roughening the surface of a mask, a cosmetic layer can be applied to provide a desirable visual appearance, e.g., to further reduce the visibility of the mask. As discussed further below, the cosmetic layer can have additional utility, such as providing or enhancing corrosion resistance. The roughness of an anterior surface of a mask can be increased by increasing the roughness of the annular surface 6020.
  • The mask forming feature 6008 can be configured to define one or more edges of a mask formed on the annular surface 6020 in a later process stage. In one embodiment, the annular surface 6020 has an inner periphery 6032 and an outer periphery 6036. The inner and outer periphery 6032, 6036 of the annular surface 6020 correspond to an inner and an outer periphery of a mask formed on the annular surface 6020 in a later process stage. One or both of the inner and outer peripheries 6032, 6036 can be eliminated in some techniques. For example, forming a mask on the substrate 6000 can be combined with a process for defining an inner periphery of a mask, an outer periphery of a mask, or both an inner and an outer periphery of a mask. In one technique, the inner periphery 6032 is eliminated. After a mask has been formed, an inner periphery of the mask can be formed using any suitable technique, e.g., machining, cutting, laser drilling or laser cutting. In one technique, a sheet of masks formed on a plurality of mask forming features 6008 is mounted to a fixture and a laser indexes from one mask to the next cutting out a central portion to define an inner periphery. The outer periphery 6036 can be eliminated in another technique where it is desirable to form a mask locator structure that extends from an outer periphery of a mask. After one or more masks have been formed in this manner, a laser or other machining implement can be operated to act on the mask to define an outer periphery of the mask and/or a locator structure. The outer periphery 6036 also could be modified such that a locator structure could be defined during the formation of a mask on the substrate. For example, the outer periphery 6036 could include a substantially circular portion and an elongated portion that extends outwardly from the substantially circular portion. More details of masks with locator structures that could be formed using this or a similar technique are discussed in an application filed Apr. 14, 2005 bearing the title “Ocular Inlay With Locator” (Attorney Docket No. ACUFO.024A).
  • In one embodiment, the inner periphery 6032 is a substantially circular periphery. In one embodiment, the outer periphery 6036 is a substantially circular periphery. In one embodiment, both the inner and outer periphery 6032, 6036 are substantially circular and are centered on the central axis 6024. In some embodiments, the inner and outer peripheries 6032, 6036 have different shapes, e.g., a circular inner periphery and a non-circular outer periphery, a non-circular inner periphery and a circular outer periphery, etc. In another embodiment, at least one of the inner and outer periphery 6032, 6036 is not centered on the central axis 6024. For example, in one embodiment, the inner and outer periphery are circular but at least one of the inner and outer periphery 6032, 6036 is not centered on the central axis 6024. As a result, the annular surface 6020 (and the mask formed thereon at a later stage) can be asymmetrical about the central axis 6024 in some embodiments. The inner and outer periphery 6032, 6036 can have other configurations such that the annular surface 6020 (and the mask formed thereon at a later stage) has other shapes. Other shapes for the annular surface 6020 that correspond to the mask designs described herein can be provided.
  • The substrate 6000 can comprise a wafer of silicon, a glass or Pyrex slide, a wafer of ceramic material, or any other suitable material or arrangement. The size of the substrate 6000 is not critical, and can be any size practical for processing through a sputter process chamber. A typical circular substrate wafer size is 4″ diameter, though other sizes can be used.
  • In one embodiment, the mask forming feature 6008 includes an annular inner recess 6040 and an annular outer recess 6044 formed in the substrate 6000. The inner recess 6040 is a U-shaped well or channel having a transverse dimension that extends from the inner periphery 6032 of the annular surface 6020 toward the central axis 6024 in one embodiment. The outer recess 6044 is a U-shaped well or channel having a transverse dimension that extends from the outer periphery 6036 of the annular surface 6020 away from the central axis 6024 in one embodiment. The inner recess 6040 and outer recess 6044 may be formed in any of a variety of ways such as mechanical grinding or chemical etching.
  • The width and the depth of the inner and outer recesses 6040, 6044 are selected to be large enough to prevent material layers formed in later stages from bridging or extending across the recesses 6040, 6044. One technique for preventing bridging is to provide that the width of the recesses 6040, 6044 is approximately equal to the thickness of a layer to be formed on the substrate 6000. Another technique for preventing bridging is to provide that the width of the recesses 6040, 6044 is greater than the thickness of a layer to be formed on the substrate 6000. The inner and outer recesses 6040, 6044 enable layers of material to be deposited on the substrate 6000 in the desired shape, e.g., defining the inner and outer periphery of a mask at a later stage. This arrangement enables a mask to be deposited (formed) substantially in the same shape in which it is to be implanted. This advantageously eliminates later process steps of defining the inner and outer periphery of the mask. Other processes described below employ additional steps to define at least one aspect of a mask, e.g., its inner or outer periphery or curvature.
  • The dimensions of the inner and outer periphery 6032, 6036 and the curvature of the first and second curved profiles 6016 a, 6016 b preferably are selected to correspond to the inner and outer dimensions and the curvature of a mask respectively. These dimensions are discussed above in connection with the various masks described herein. In one embodiment, the inner and outer periphery 6032, 6036 of the mask forming feature 6008 have the same dimensions as a mask to be formed thereon and the curvature of the first and second curved profiles 6016 a, 6016 b are the same as the desired curvature of the mask to be formed thereon.
  • In one embodiment, the mask forming feature 6008 protrudes from the top surface 6004 of the substrate 6000. In this arrangement, the mask forming feature 6008 presents a convex surface upon which a material layer may be formed. As discussed below, a release layer, a mask layer, a sacrificial layer, or another material layer may be formed on the convex surface of the mask forming feature 6008 or on a layer of material formed on the convex surface. FIG. 67 a shows that in one embodiment, the first and second curved profiles 6016 a, 6016 b are convex curved profiles.
  • In one variation, a mask is initially formed in a flat configuration on a planar top surface of a substrate that is otherwise similar to the substrate 6000. This variation may be used to form a mask that is sufficiently flexible to conform to an ocular structure, e.g., a corneal layer, when applied to the structure, and thus does not require any preformed shape. In some techniques, one or more further steps are performed (such as thermoforming or compression, depending upon the mask material) to shape the mask to conform to an ocular structure after the mask is formed on the planar top surface.
  • In one variation of the mask forming feature 6008, a continuous imperforate curved profile is provided by eliminating the inner recess 6040. As discussed further below, this arrangement could be used in a process wherein an inner periphery of a mask is defined after sputtering. The inner periphery of a mask can be defined by cutting a central region out of the mask. Any suitable technique can be used to cut out the central region. For example, the central region could be cut out by a laser cutting process. Laser cutting can be used to otherwise further define a mask, e.g., by separating a mask from a neighboring mask or by forming nutrient transport apertures in a portion of a mask.
  • In another variation, the mask forming feature 6008 includes a concave surface upon which a mask can be formed. In this arrangement, the mask forming feature 6008 includes a recess in the top surface 6004 of the substrate 6000. As discussed further below, a mask can be formed on the substrate 6000 with one surface of the mask exposed, e.g., with one surface of the mask not in contact with the substrate 6000 or with any layer between the substrate 6000 and the mask.
  • The substrate 6000 can be prepared using any technique that will facilitate the formation of thin film layers thereon. For example, the top surface 6004 can be cleaned and polished to facilitate sputtering processes, as described below, or other mask forming processes. In one technique, the substrate 6000 is cleaned at an elevated temperature using a cleaning solution or agent for a fixed period. For example, the substrate 6000 can be cleaned in an RCA cleaning solution (e.g., a mixture of ammonium hydroxide, hydrogen peroxide and DI water in the ratio of 1:1:5 respectively) at 80 degrees Celsius for 30 minutes to remove impurities such as grease and dust particles. Alternatively, other cleaning solutions can be used, such as Micro-90 (a commercially available mixture of salts of sodium, ammonium and acids). In another technique, discussed above, the substrate 600 is prepared by providing a roughness level that is selected to provide a desired blending characteristic.
  • As discussed above, sputtering is an advantageous method of forming thin layers of material on a substrate for forming an ocular implant. Sputtering is usually performed in a vacuum or very low pressure and so a process chamber is normally provided in which the substrate 6000 can be mounted. In one technique, the substrate 6000 is mounted on a table that is rotated during the process. Rotation of the substrate results in a more uniform deposition of material, providing a more uniform thickness, for example. The process chamber preferably also is configured to receive a target comprising a target material. In some arrangements, the process chamber is capable of accommodating multiple targets so that different materials can be sputtered, if needed. Preferably the process chamber is capable of multiple sputtering modes, for example enabling sputtering from one or all the targets in one or both of a radio frequency (RF) sputtering mode and a direct current (DC) sputtering mode.
  • In one sputtering technique, a vacuum in the range of low 10−7 torr is induced in the process chamber by one or more vacuum pumps, which can be a mechanical pump, cryo pump or turbo molecular pump. Argon gas (or other inert gas) at a low pressure (around a few millitorr) is introduced into the chamber. Thereafter a high voltage from a DC or an RF power supply is applied to the target material to create a glow discharge. The glow discharge dissociates the argon atoms into a cloud of ions called a plasma. The ions in the plasma can be accelerated toward the target material. Collision of the ions with the target causes atoms of the target material to be dislodged from the surface of the target. Thereafter, the dislodged atoms condense on the exposed surfaces of the substrate 6000. As the amount of atoms that are condensed on the substrate 6000 increases, a thin film of the material forms on the substrate 6000.
  • FIG. 67 b illustrates a later stage of a method for making a mask in which a release layer 6080 has been formed on the mask forming feature 6008 of the substrate 6000. As discussed above, a release layer is a type of sacrificial layer that facilitates the separation of a mask from the substrate 6000. The release layer 6080 can be formed using the sputtering process described above or any suitable variation thereof. In one technique, the release layer 6080 is formed by using a target comprised of a material that can be eroded away by another process, e.g., by etching, without damaging other layers that form a part of or are coupled with a mask. The material used to form the release layer 6080 may be a metal, such as chromium, aluminum, copper, TiCuAg, 90% tungsten 10% titanium (released with hydrogen peroxide), or any other metal or alloy. Other materials can be used if the release layer is to enable separation of mask layers from the substrate 6000 by a non-erosion process.
  • In one embodiment, the release layer 6080 is sputter deposited to a thickness of about 500 Å or more on the substrate 6000. The release layer 6080 can be sputter deposited using RF sputtering at argon pressure of about 2 millitorr. The thickness of the release layer 6080 can vary. For example, the release layer could have a thickness of a few hundred angstroms, a thickness less than 500 Å, a thickness of more than about 500 Å, a thickness of a thousand angstroms, or more.
  • FIG. 67 b shows that the arrangement of the mask forming feature 6008 prevents the release layer 6080 from bridging from the planar portion 6012 to the annular surface 6020 and from the annular surface 6020 to the central region 6028. This aspect of the mask forming feature 6008 facilitates separation of a mask formed at a later stage of the process from the substrate 6000 because the mask can be released from the inner periphery and from the outer periphery of the mask forming feature 6008. In some techniques, the planar portion 6012, annular surface 6020, and central region 6028 are not fully isolated from each other and the process for separating the mask from the mask forming feature 6008 operates primarily from one of the inner periphery 6032 and the outer periphery 6036.
  • FIG. 67 c shows that after the release layer 6080 is formed on the substrate 6000, a mask layer 6100 can be formed on the release layer 6080. FIG. 67 c should not be taken to suggest that no other process steps are performed between formation of the release layer 6080 and the mask layer 6100. For example, in some techniques, the release layer 6080 is modified prior to formation of the mask layer 6100. It may be desirable to modify the release layer 6080 so that it has a desired thickness, e.g., by removing a portion of the release layer 6080. For example, the average thickness of the release layer 6080 could be reduced across the entire mask forming feature 6008. In another example, the thickness of the release layer 6080 could be reduced at a selected location of the mask forming feature 6008. The mask layer 6100 can be formed by any suitable technique, such as one of the sputtering processes discussed above or a variation thereof.
  • In one technique, a mask for treating an ocular ailment, such as presbyopia or an aberration, is entirely or substantially entirely formed by a sputtering or other vapor deposition process. As used in this context, “substantially entirely formed” means that at least the entire thickness of the mask is formed by this process and that further steps do not add thickness to the mask, but may reduce the thickness, form cutouts in the mask, and form the mask. As discussed further below, in one variation, the mask layer 6100 can be a layer configured to facilitate handling of a mask formed by the processes described herein or to facilitate application of such a mask to an eye of a patient.
  • In one technique, the mask is substantially entirely formed by the process, e.g., the mask layer 6100 forms the mask. In this technique, the mask layer 6100 preferably is able to substantially improve the patient's vision. The mask layer 6100 preferably is made to be at least partially opaque. The mask layer 6100 preferably is sufficiently stable to environmental conditions, such as UV radiation. The mask layer 6100 preferably is sufficiently biocompatible so that it can be implanted in an eye of a human. A variety of metals have these properties and are capable of being formed as thin structures that can be applied to the eye, e.g., as corneal inlays. For example, nitinol or TiNi and other derivative alloys of TiNi, gold, tantalum, platinum, titanium (e.g., titanium 6 aluminum 4 vanadium), and stainless steel are believed to have these properties and to be able to perform well in ocular applications. The mask layer 6100 can be formed of any of these materials or of any other suitable biocompatible material.
  • The biocompatible material can also be selected from a class of materials that will not corrode or otherwise degrade during the useful life of the mask 6200. Selection of such a material to form the mask layer 6100 is one technique for configuring a surface of a mask to not corrode. As discussed below, such materials include noble metals generally and in particular those noble metals specifically described herein. As discussed further below, another technique for configuring a surface of a mask to not corrode involves forming a second layer, which may be a cosmetic layer, on the mask layer 6100 where the second layer is formed of a material selected to prevent corrosion or to substantially reduce the likelihood that the mask will corrode or otherwise degrade when the mask is applied to the patient.
  • As discussed above, a process chamber can be provided with multiple targets, e.g., one for a mask layer and another for a release layer. Three or more targets can be provided, e.g., a release layer target, a first mask layer target, and a second mask layer target. In one embodiment, discussed further below, the first mask layer can comprise the majority of the mask and the second layer can comprise a cosmetic layer, which can be relatively thin. In another technique, the release layer 6080 and the mask layer 6100 are formed using different modes of the chamber. For example, the mask layer 6100 can be sputtered using DC sputtering and the release layer 6080 using RF sputtering. A mask layer comprising an alloy material can be sputtered from a single alloy target or by co-sputtering from multiple targets. In another technique, the mask layer 6100 and the release layer 6080 are sputtered in separate chambers.
  • In one technique, the substrate 6000 is loaded into a process chamber and a vacuum is induced in the chamber in a low 10−7 torr range. After the release layer 6080 is formed on the substrate 6000, the mask layer 6100 is sputter deposited on top of the release layer 6080 using DC sputtering at an argon pressure of about 2 millitorr. The mask layer 6100 can be sputtered to any desirable thickness, e.g., any of the thicknesses of the mask 3000 discussed above.
  • Further description of various sputtering techniques is set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 5,061,914, issued Oct. 29, 1991, U.S. Pat. No. 6,790,298, issued Sep. 14, 2001, U.S. Pat. No. 6,533,905, issued Mar. 18, 2003, and US Patent Application Pub. No. US 2003/0059640, published Mar. 27, 2003, each of which is expressly incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • Other deposition techniques that may be used to form a mask layer, a release layer, or a sacrificial layer include vapor deposition, vacuum evaporation, molecular beam epitaxy, evaporative deposition, pulsed laser deposition, ion plating, ion implantation, and laser surface alloying. Other types of vapor deposition and other techniques for forming layers are discussed below.
  • FIG. 67 d illustrates a technique for separating a mask 6200 formed by the process discussed in connection with FIGS. 67 a-67 c from a substrate 6000. As discussed above, the release layer 6080 is a sacrificial layer, e.g., a layer that facilitates the formation of the mask 6200 and that is substantially or entirely removed from the mask 6200 during the process of making the mask 6200. The mask 6200 may be separated from the substrate 6000 by any suitable technique. In one technique, the release layer 6080 is eroded away so that a gap forms between the annular surface 6020 and the mask 6200. When the release layer 6080 is fully eroded, the mask 6200 is entirely separated from the substrate 6000. As discussed above, the inner and outer recesses 6040, 6044 enable the process of eroding the release layer 6080 to proceed from both sides of the annular surface 6020. This may significantly shorten the process time for separating the mask 6200 from the substrate 6000.
  • In one technique, the substrate 6000 with the release and mask layers 6080, 6100 formed thereon is immersed in a bath containing an agent capable of eroding the release layer 6080, as discussed above. The agent may be a chemical that will selectively etch the release layer 6080 but have no harmful effect on the mask layer 6100. Preferably, the etchant or other chemical or agent used to release the layer 6100 from the substrate 6000 does not react strongly with the layer 6100. In one technique, the release layer 6080 is formed of chromium and the mask is separated from the substrate by contacting the release layer 6080 with a chromium etchant. For example, the chromium release layer can be submerged in a chromium etching bath. Although chromium and other release layer material have been discussed herein, one skilled in the art will recognize that a wide variety of materials could be used as a release layer and an agent for separating a device layer from a substrate.
  • FIG. 67 d shows that separating the mask 6200 from the substrate 6000 generates one or more pieces of scrap material 6204, which may correspond to material deposited at the same time as the mask layer 6100. The scrap material 6204 is separated from the mask 6200 and discarded.
  • FIG. 68 illustrates a mask 6300 that can be formed by a method where the mask is configured to not corrode. FIG. 68 also illustrates a mask that can be formed by a method where the mask is configured to be inert. In one variation, the mask 6300 is formed with two or more separate layers to provide desirable characteristics. For example, as discussed further below, one layer can be formed of a material that has advantageous properties for minimally invasive implantation and a second layer can be formed as a cosmetic layer, providing a suitable visual appearance. The method for forming the mask 6300 is similar to the method illustrated in FIGS. 67 a-67 d, except as described differently below.
  • The mask 6300 includes a first mask layer 6304 and a second mask layer 6308. The first mask layer 6304 can be formed using any suitable technique, including those described herein. For example, the first mask layer 6304 can be formed on a substrate that can be similar to the substrate 6000 of FIGS. 67 a-67 d or any suitable variation thereof. Like the masks described above, the mask 6300 has an anterior surface 6312 and a posterior surface. The posterior surface is not shown, but is on the opposite side of the mask 6300 from the anterior surface 6312. In a multi-layer device, the anterior surface can be any surface or interface between layers that generally faces forward or out of the eye when applied. The anterior surface can be a surface that contacts a corneal layer when the mask 6300 is applied. In one embodiment, the anterior surface 6312 is a surface located internally in the mask 6300. For example, the anterior surface 6312 can be located at an interface between the first and second layers 6304, 6308. The anterior surface can be an external surface of the mask 6300.
  • The first and second mask layers 6304, 6308, may take any suitable form. The first and second mask layers 6304, 6308 can be formed of the same or different materials. In one embodiment, the first mask layer 6304 is formed of a first material that is selected to have any of the advantageous mask properties described above. The second mask layer 6308 can be formed of a second material selected or configured to have any of the advantageous cosmetic or visual properties described above.
  • Where the first and second materials are different materials, the combination of materials used for the first and second mask layers 6304, 6308, should be carefully selected. This is particularly true where the selection of materials could cause a potentially destabilizing reaction to occur. For example, where there is sufficient galvanic potential between the first layer 6304 and the second layer 6308, corrosion could occur along the interface.
  • To prevent mask degradation of this type, a surface of the mask 6300 can be configured to not corrode by selecting a first material for the first mask layer 6304 and a second material for the second mask layer 6308 where the first and second materials have similar galvanic potential. In another technique, a third layer (not shown) configured to prevent the material of the first mask layer 6304 from interacting chemically or otherwise with the second mask layer 6308 may be formed between the first and second mask layers 6304, 6308. For example, the third layer may be formed of an interface material that at least substantially prevents electrical communication between the first and second mask layers 6304, 6308. The interface material could be a suitable polymer or another insulating material. The third layer could provide additional functionality, such as providing mechanical coupling between the first and second mask layers 6304, 6308. Accordingly, the third layer may be a layer of adhesive. These and other techniques for configuring the mask not to corrode are discussed further below.
  • In one embodiment, the first mask layer 6304 could be formed of a biocompatible metal, as described herein. As discussed above, noble metals have some advantageous characteristics. For example, noble metals are more resistant to some processes that could degrade the mask 6300, such as galvanic reactions. Such reactions can result if additional layers of material are formed on the first mask layer 6304 where a galvanic potential between the layers is created that is sufficient to drive a galvanic reaction. Also, noble metals are generally slow to react, and in at least this sense, generally are inert. In particular, as discussed further below, combining a first layer of a noble metal and a second layer of carbon provides a mask arrangement that will be substantially resistant to corrosion due to a galvanic reaction.
  • Another class of materials that may be advantageous in some applications includes materials that have superelastic or shape memory characteristics. Such materials include nitinol and other similar alloys of nickel and titanium. Such materials are particularly well suited for implantation using less invasive techniques, such as implantation in a pocket. These materials are advantageous in that they can enable a mask to be folded, rolled, or otherwise compressed to a relatively low profile so that the mask can fit through a relatively small incision. As used herein, a “relatively small incision” is one that is substantially less than the diameter of a mask. For example, an incision that is about two-thirds or less than about two-thirds the diameter of a mask is a relatively small incision in some procedures. In other procedures, an incision that is about one-half or less than about one-half the diameter of a mask is a relatively small incision. In other procedures, an incision that is about one-third or less than about one-third the diameter of a mask is a “relatively small incision” in some procedures. By reducing the size of the incision through which a mask is inserted, the recovery time for the patient can be shortened.
  • FIG. 68 shows the second mask layer 6308 of the mask 6300, which can be formed after the first layer 6304 is formed in some processes. The second mask layer 6308 can be formed on a surface of the first layer 6304. As discussed above, the second layer 6308 can be formed to provide a desirable visual appearance to persons other than the patient. The second layer 6308 can be configured to be a non-reflective layer. A non-reflective layer is useful where the material forming the first layer 6304 is a shiny material, e.g., a shiny metal material. Forming a non-reflective second mask layer can darken the appearance of the mask 6300. By darkening the appearance of the mask 6300, the presence of the mask 6300 in a patient's eye can be made less apparent to others.
  • In some embodiments, the second layer 6308 can be formed as a cosmetic layer on the anterior surface 6312 of the mask 6300. As discussed above, a cosmetic layer can be formed to reduce the visibility of the implant within the patient's eye. The cosmetic layer may be tailored for a patient. In one embodiment, the second layer 6308 is formed as a cosmetic layer that has an appearance similar to that of the pupil. In other embodiments, a cosmetic layer can be formed that has a color similar to the color of the iris near an outer periphery of the mask and that has a color similar to the color of the pupil near the inner periphery of the mask.
  • As discussed above, another technique for cosmetically altering the mask 6300 is to roughen a surface that will be visible when the mask 6300 is applied, e.g., the anterior surface 6312. By making the surface rougher, the surface becomes less reflective and therefore less visible in the eye of the patient to others. In another technique, a mask can be made less visible by both roughening the anterior surface 6312 and by providing a cosmetic layer, e.g., on the anterior surface 6312 of a first layer.
  • The second layer 6308 may be formed by any suitable process, such as a depositing process similar to those described herein or a coating technique.
  • As discussed above, noble metals are suitable for forming the first mask layer 6304. These materials are suitable because they are relatively inert and are biocompatible. Also, these materials substantially reduce the likelihood that corrosion will occur in the presence of carbon, which is one material that can be used to form the second layer 6308. Carbon is suitable for the second layer because it blends in with the pupil and thus provides a desirable cosmetic appearance. Carbon can be formed as the second layer 6308 by any suitable process. The carbon layer should be thick enough to provide the desired cosmetic result, e.g., making the mask 6300 unobtrusive or not visible to others when implanted in the eye of a patient. In some applications, the thickness of the second layer 6308 is regulated such that it is not thicker than necessary to provide the cosmetic effect. This arrangement has the advantage of maintaining the low profile nature of the mask 6300. In a low profile configuration, the mask 6300 can be more easily folded or otherwise handled during implantation procedures. Also, in a low profile configuration, the mask 6300 will be less likely to affect the curvature of the anterior surface of the cornea so that the mask 6300 will not affect the refractive properties of the cornea in which it is applied. In other applications, the second mask layer 6308 or the mask 6300 can be thicker, but should not interfere with the implantability or wearability of the mask 6300. The thickness of the mask can vary and can be any of the thicknesses discussed herein. The thickness of the second layer 6308 can be a fraction of the overall thickness of the mask 6300, e.g., one percent or less than the thickness of the mask 6300, one to ten percent of the thickness of the mask 6300, ten to twenty percent of the thickness of the mask 6300, twenty to thirty percent of the thickness of the mask 6300, or more than thirty percent of the thickness of the mask.
  • Carbon can be co-deposited with a noble metal in a sputtering or in an electro-deposition process, for example. The carbon layer preferably is formed on a noble metal layer such that the carbon adheres to the noble metal layer. Nobel metals can be combined with other suitable materials that can provide suitable cosmetic appearance, e.g., silicon carbide.
  • As discussed above, these and other similar processes can employ a suitable substrate, e.g., one similar to the substrate 6000, to form one or more masks that are not connected to each other during the formation of the layers 6304, 6308. In other techniques, these processes can form a sheet of interconnected masks on a suitable substrate such that the masks can be separated from each other during a later processing stage. For example, a plurality of interconnected masks can be formed by the processes described herein and later separated from each other by any suitable process, such as machining, laser cutting, chemical etching, or another similar process.
  • As discussed above, masks can be made of mask layers that initially are formed flat or with a selected curvature. In one technique where the mask is made of mask layers that are initially formed flat, a curvature can be induced in the mask at a later process stage. For example, a mask can be cup-formed after one or more layers thereof have been formed in a flat configuration. In one cup-forming process, a mask is urged into contact with a shaping surface, which can have a part-spherical contour. In various embodiments, the shaping surface is a surface of a mold. In one technique a mold is provided that includes a convex surface and a concave surface. A mask that has been formed by the techniques described above can be inserted into the mold in a flat or non-formed configuration between the convex and concave surfaces. Thereafter, the convex and concave surfaces are brought into close proximity, urging the mask into the desired shape.
  • After the mask has been urged into contact with a shaping surface, the mask can be processed further such that the mask maintains the curvature of the shaping surface. For example, the mask can be heat treated while being held against one or more shaping surfaces. In one heat treating technique, the mask is placed in an elevated temperature environment for a time sufficient to cause the stress in the material of the mask to be released. This will result in the mask being in a relaxed state when in the shape of the mold. In one technique, the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 500 degrees Fahrenheit or more. In another technique, the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 500 degrees Celsius or more. In one technique, the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 300 degrees Fahrenheit or more. In another technique, the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 300 degrees Celsius or more. In one technique, the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 250 degrees Fahrenheit or more. In another technique, the mask is placed in an environment having an elevated temperature of about 250 degrees Celsius or more. After heat treating, the mask will maintain the shape of the shaping surface without significant strain.
  • As discussed above, in some applications it is desirable to form a mask with multiple layers such that at least one of the layers has with pores. The pores can be similar to those discussed above as providing nutrient transport across a mask. As discussed above, the substrate can be configured to produce porous or smooth layers for different applications. Porous layers can be produced using substrate with a pattern of protrusions, for example. In another technique, one or more process variables can be altered to produce a mask layer characteristic, such as porosity. For example, the rate or speed of layer formation, e.g., the rate of electro-deposition, can be selected to provide a more porous layer. In one technique, a relatively high rate of electro-deposition produces a more porous mask layer or mask.
  • As discussed above, nitinol and other similar materials are advantageous in some application. In some techniques, where the first mask layer 6304 is formed of nitinol, a second material is selected to form the second mask layer 6308 that will not be degraded by a chemical or biological reaction, such as galvanic corrosion. The second material can be selected such that no or an insubstantial amount of galvanic potential exists between the first and second mask layers 6304, 6308. One material that can be used for the second material is titanium oxide. In some environments, e.g., in the presence of oxygen, titanium oxide will form on an exposed surface of titanium or a titanium alloy. Thus, the second layer 6308 also can be formed by exposure to oxygen. A sufficiently thick layer of titanium oxide formed on the titanium or titanium alloy surface will passivate the titanium or titanium alloy surface, e.g., configuring the mask for little or no corrosion at that surface. Another material that can be used for the second material is silicon carbide. Other similar materials that can be combined with nitinol or similar alloys without producing galvanic corrosion can be selected as the second material.
  • In other embodiments, an anterior surface of the mask can be coated to reduce the visibility of the mask 6300 when applied to a patient. For example, the anterior surface 6312 could be coated with at least one of any of the materials discussed above in connection with the second mask layer 6308, or an organic dye, an inorganic pigment, or other compounds, such as black iron oxide. In another variation, the second mask layer 6308 can be formed of a suitable polymeric material, e.g., a polymeric material that reduces the reflectivity of the first mask layer 6304. Polymeric materials are not subject to galvanic reactions. In another variation, the second mask layer 6308 is formed of a mixture of a polymeric material and a suitable dye to provide a desirable cosmetic effect, as discussed herein.
  • In some techniques, it may be desirable to darken both the anterior and posterior surfaces of the mask 6200.
  • The process of FIGS. 67 a-67 d enables a mask to be formed in substantially the same configuration in which it is to be implanted in the eye of a patient. As discussed above, this is achieved in part by providing a substrate with a mask forming feature that is shaped to correspond to the shape of the ocular anatomy in the region of the eye where the mask is to be applied. This may be achieved by providing the mask forming feature with a shape that is similar to the shape of a layer of corneal tissue where the mask is to be implanted in the corneal. The process also facilitates application of the mask to the human eye by being capable of producing the mask with certain dimensions tightly controlled. For example, the process enables a mask to be formed that is thin enough to be implanted in the cornea without adversely affecting the adjacent corneal tissue.
  • As discussed above, one variation of the forgoing method of making a mask employs a substrate that is similar to the substrate 6000 but that is substantially planar rather than shaped. This process will form a mask that is similar to the mask 6200, but that also initially is substantially planar. In some applications, a substantially planar mask 6200 may be thin enough to be applied to an eye and to conform to the native anatomy, e.g., to the curvature of the cornea, when applied. In other applications, it may be desirable to induce a permanent shape in a mask that was initially of a planar construction. As used in this context, “induce a permanent shape” is a broad term and it is used in its ordinary meaning and it includes forming the mask to retain its shape in the absence of a force other than gravity. This shape does not prevent the mask from flexing to an extent when applied to the eye or when acted on by ocular structures.
  • Any suitable process can be used to induce a shape in a mask. One such process involves placing the mask on or in a mandrel, engaging the mask with a member to cause it to take on the desired shape, and heat treating the mask to cause it to maintain that shape. This process is discussed in more detail in U.S. Pat. No. 6,746,890, which is hereby expressly incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • As discussed above some masks are configured with nutrient transport structures that increase the acceptance of the mask by adjacent tissue. For example, the mask 4400 is formed with holes that extend from an anterior surface to a posterior surface. Such holes may be formed by depositing a plurality of layers with holes formed in them. The location of the holes in adjacent layers can be important, as discussed above. For example, the location of holes can reduce the production of diffraction patterns. The configuration and location and orientation of the holes can be adequately controlled using sacrificial layers and photolithography, as is discussed in more detail in U.S. Pat. No. 6,746,890, which is incorporated by reference herein above. Holes, sometimes referred to herein as “micro-perforations” or “perforations”, can also be formed in a process that provides a substrate with nutrient transport forming features, as discussed above.
  • As discussed above, one variation of the foregoing process provides a mask structure that enables a mask to be handled, e.g., while being manufactured, shipped, or applied by a surgeon to the patient's eye. As discussed above, some embodiments of masks configured to be applied to an eye are very thin. Stated another way, the structures have a relatively high ratio of surface area to thickness. This is particularly true where the mask is intended to be implanted in the cornea of a patient's eye. As a result, a thin mask can be damaged depending on the skill of the person handling it. Damage to the mask can include contamination on the surface of the mask, creases formed in the mask, etc. Such damage at least increases the processing time (e.g., by requiring additional cleaning steps) but can also require that the damaged mask be scrapped. To reduce the likelihood of scrapping of masks, it is desirable to provide a handling structure, e.g., a layer that is less easily damaged or that can be damaged without impairing the performance of the mask.
  • In one technique, a handling structure is formed as a removable mask support layer. The handling structure can be formed by any process. For example, any of the sputtering processes described above could be used to form the handling structure. In one embodiment, the handling structure is formed as a sacrificial layer. As discussed above, a sacrificial layer is a layer that can be removed or separated from the mask at some point during the lifecycle of the mask. The sacrificial handling layer can be made of the same material as the release layer 6080, the same material as the mask layer 6100, or another suitable material. The handling structure can be removed by any process, e.g., by eroding or etching the layer, or by otherwise separating the handling structure from the mask. The handling structure can take any suitable configuration. Preferably the handling structure is temporarily coupled with the mask or a portion thereof. For example, the handling structure can be coupled with an outer periphery of a mask. In one embodiment, the handling structure is an annular member that surrounds or partially surrounds the mask or a portion of the mask. The handling structure could be a bar or a flange of suitable configuration. The handling structure is configured to be clamped or fixed in a processing device or process chamber in one embodiment. The handling structure is able to securely hold a mask during one or more process steps in one embodiment. The handling structure is removable after the process for manufacturing the mask is complete or partially complete in one embodiment.
  • B. Forming a Mask Using Other Layer Forming Methods
  • Other techniques that do not involve sputtering to form a mask layer can be employed in other techniques or combined with methods involving physical vapor deposition.
  • 1. Chemical Vapor Deposition
  • Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) may also be used to form the mask or a portion of the mask. CVD methods include atmospheric pressure chemical vapor deposition, low pressure chemical vapor deposition, plasma assisted (enhanced) chemical vapor deposition, photochemical vapor deposition, laser chemical vapor deposition, metal-organic chemical vapor deposition, and chemical beam epitaxy.
  • 2. Precipitation Out of a Solution
  • A layer, such as a mask layer, release layer, or sacrificial layer, could be formed by precipitating a material out of a solution. This technique is analogous to the methods discussed above in connection with FIGS. 67 a-67 d, except as set forth below.
  • Mask layers, release layers, sacrificial layers, or other layers are formed by a precipitate that emerges from a solution. For example, a solution including metal ions can be prepared and placed into contact with a substrate. The substrate can be similar to the substrate 6000. In one technique a tank is provided and the substrate is placed in the bottom of the tank. A solution with metal or alloy ions or molecules is then placed in the tank in contact with the substrate. Thereafter, the solution can be acted on to cause a metal or alloy ion or molecule to no longer be soluble in the solution. For example, sufficient quantities of the desired metal ion can be added to the solution such that the solubility of that ion within the solution is exceeded. This condition will cause the metal ion to precipitate out of the solution and condense onto the substrate 6000. In another example, the solvent can be evaporated from the solution, increasing the concentration of the desired metal ion until its solubility is exceeded, thus causing the ion to precipitate out of the solution and to condense onto the substrate 6000. Other techniques, such as altering the pH of the solution can be employed to get the solute to precipitate out of the solution.
  • Once sufficient solute has formed on the substrate, the solution can be evacuated from the tank and another solution placed in the tank with the same or a different material or metal ion solute. In some methods, more than one technique can be combined, such as using precipitation out of a solution for one layer and vapor deposition for another layer.
  • 3. Electroplating and Electrodepositing
  • Other suitable techniques for forming layers that can be used to form some masks include electroplating or electrodepositing and electroforming. In one embodiment, forming a mask by electrodeposition is analogous to the method discussed above, except as set forth below.
  • Electrodeposition is the process of producing a layer or coating, which can be metallic, on a surface of an object by the action of electric current. The deposition of a metallic coating onto an object can be achieved by negatively charging the object to be coated and immersing the object into a solution that contains a salt of the metal to be deposited. In this arrangement, the object to be plated can be the cathode of an electrolytic cell. In one technique, the object to be plated is similar to the substrate 6000.
  • In one technique, the metallic ions of the salt carry a positive charge and are attracted to the substrate or object. When the metallic ions reach the negatively charged object, e.g., a substrate, the substrate provides electrons to reduce the positively charged ions to metallic form. In electrodepositing and electroforming, the substrate can be made of any suitable material, e.g., copper. The material to be plated is one that can be eroded to separate a mask from the substrate, as discussed above, or a mask layer. Where the material to be plated is intended to be a mask layer, the material is selected with the biocompatility and stability properties discussed above for long implantation life (e.g., it is opaque, inert, and does not degrade in the presence of UV radiation).
  • In one technique, a conductor is coupled with the substrate or other object and with a negative pole of a battery (or other power supply). Another conductor is connected with a positive pole of the battery (or other power supply) and with an anode of the electrolytic cell. The anode is analogous to the target, discussed above in connection with sputtering. Thereafter, a cell is filled with a solution of the metal salt to be plated. The cell can be a process chamber. It is possible to use a molten salt (e.g., when plating tungsten and other similar materials). In some techniques, the salt is dissolved in water.
  • As the substrate or other object to be plated is negatively charged, it attracts the positively charged cations from the solution, and electrons flow from the substrate or other object to the cations to neutralize them (to reduce them) to metallic form. Meanwhile, negatively charged anions in the solution are attracted to the positively charged anode. At the anode electrons are removed from the anode material, oxidizing it to the anode cations. Thus we see that the anode (analogous to the target, as discussed above) dissolves as ions into the solution. That is how replacement cations of the anode/target material are supplied to the solution for that which has been plated out and one retains a solution of appropriate composition in the cell.
  • One advantage of this technique is that it may be able to make a porous structure that would at least partially provide nutrient transport through the mask, as discussed above, without further process steps. Additional nutrient transport could be provided by forming additional nutrient transport structures in the mask using any of the techniques discussed above.
  • Although this invention has been disclosed in the context of certain preferred embodiments and examples, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that the present invention extends beyond the specifically disclosed embodiments to other alternative embodiments and/or uses of the invention and obvious modifications and equivalents thereof. In addition, while a number of variations of the invention have been shown and described in detail, other modifications, which are within the scope of this invention, will be readily apparent to those of skill in the art based upon this disclosure. It is also contemplated that various combinations or sub-combinations of the specific features and aspects of the embodiments may be made and still fall within the scope of the invention. Accordingly, it should be understood that various features and aspects of the disclosed embodiments can be combine with or substituted for one another in order to form varying modes of the disclosed invention. Thus, it is intended that the scope of the present invention herein disclosed should not be limited by the particular disclosed embodiments described above, but should be determined only by a fair reading of the claims that follow.

Claims (52)

1. A method of making a mask configured to improve the depth of focus of an eye of a patient, the method comprising:
providing a substrate with a mask forming feature comprising a forming surface extending from an outer periphery, the forming surface being centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature, the forming surface having a curved profile corresponding to the curvature of a corneal layer of the eye;
forming a mask layer of a biocompatible metal on the substrate;
configuring a surface of the mask layer to not corrode; and
separating the mask layer from the substrate.
2. The method of claim 1, further comprising forming a non-reflective layer on the mask layer to darken the appearance of the mask.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein the biocompatible metal is a noble metal and the non-reflective layer comprises a carbon layer.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein forming further comprises forming at least a portion of the mask layer of a titanium alloy.
5. The method of claim 4, wherein the titanium alloy exhibits super-elastic characteristics.
6. The method of claim 4, wherein the titanium alloy is nitinol.
7. The method of claim 4, wherein the titanium alloy comprises nickel and titanium.
8. The method of claim 4, wherein the mask layer is a first layer, and configuring further comprises forming a second mask layer of a second material that does not react chemically with the titanium alloy.
9. The method of claim 8, wherein the second material is titanium oxide.
10. The method of claim 8, wherein the second material is silicon carbide.
11. The method of claim 1, wherein the surface of the mask is configured to not corrode by forming the mask layer of a biocompatible metal that does not corrode when implanted in the body.
12. The method of claim 1, wherein forming the mask layer further comprises forming at least a portion of the mask layer of gold.
13. The method of claim 1, wherein forming the mask layer further comprises forming at least a portion of the mask layer of palladium.
14. The method of claim 1, wherein forming the mask layer further comprises forming at least a portion of the mask layer of platinum.
15. The method of claim 1, wherein forming the mask layer further comprises forming at least a portion of the mask layer of tantalum.
16. The method of claim 1, wherein forming the mask layer further comprises forming at least a portion of the mask layer of titanium.
17. The method of claim 1, wherein forming the mask layer further comprises sputtering the mask layer.
18. The method of claim 1, wherein forming the mask layer further comprises electro-depositing the mask layer.
19. The method of claim 1, wherein the forming surface is an annular surface that extends from the outer periphery to an inner periphery of the mask forming feature.
20. The method of claim 1, further comprising removing a central portion of the mask layer to form an aperture in the mask layer.
21. A method of making a mask configured to improve the depth of focus of an eye of a patient, the method comprising:
providing a substrate with a mask forming feature comprising a forming surface centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature;
forming a release layer on the forming surface;
forming a mask layer of a biocompatible metal such that the release layer is between the mask layer and the substrate;
configuring a surface of the mask layer opposite the release layer to not corrode; and
separating the mask layer from the substrate.
22. A method of making a mask configured be implanted in a cornea of an eye of a patient to improve the depth of focus of the patient, the mask being disposed about a visual axis of the eye extending through a pupil of the eye when applied, the method comprising:
providing a substrate with a mask forming feature comprising an annular surface extending between an inner periphery and an outer periphery, the annular surface being centered on a central axis of the mask forming feature;
forming at least a portion of the mask by depositing a mask layer of a biocompatible metal on the substrate;
configuring the mask to be inert; and
separating the mask layer from the substrate.
23. The method of claim 22, wherein the mask is configured to be inert by forming the mask layer of a noble metal.
24. The method of claim 22, further comprising forming a cosmetic layer on an anterior surface of the mask such that the anterior surface blends in with the pupil.
25. The method of claim 24, wherein the biocompatible metal is a noble metal and the cosmetic layer is carbon.
26. The method of claim 22, wherein the mask is configured to be inert by forming a cosmetic layer on an anterior surface of the mask layer, at least one of the mask layer and the cosmetic layer being selected such that there is substantially no galvanic potential between the mask layer and the cosmetic layer.
27. The method of claim 26, wherein the mask layer is formed of an alloy comprising nickel and titanium and the cosmetic layer is formed of silicon carbide.
28. The method of claim 26, wherein the mask layer is formed of an alloy comprising nickel and titanium and the cosmetic layer is formed of titanium oxide.
29. The method of claim 22, wherein forming the mask layer further comprises sputtering the mask layer.
30. The method of claim 22, wherein forming the mask layer further comprises electro-depositing the mask layer.
31. The method of claim 22, wherein forming comprises forming the mask layer with a plurality of pores.
32. The method of claim 31, further comprising configuring the substrate to cause pore formation when the mask layer is formed.
33. The method of claim 31, wherein the mask layer is formed by electro-deposition and the density of pores is a function of an electro-deposition rate.
34. The method of claim 22, wherein the substrate includes a plurality of mask forming features and forming the mask layer further comprises forming at least a portion of a first mask and at least a portion of a second mask.
35. The method of claim 34, further comprising separating the first mask portion from the second mask portion.
36. A mask configured to improve the depth of focus in an eye of a patient comprising:
a posterior layer formed of a biocompatible metal; and
a cosmetic layer.
37. The mask of claim 36, wherein the cosmetic layer is a non-reflective layer
38. The mask of claim 37, wherein the cosmetic layer darkens the appearance of the mask.
39. The mask of claim 36, wherein the biocompatible metal is a noble metal and the cosmetic layer comprises a carbon layer.
40. The mask of claim 36, wherein the biocompatible metal comprises a titanium alloy.
41. The mask of claim 40, wherein the titanium alloy exhibits super-elastic characteristics.
42. The mask of claim 40, wherein the titanium alloy is nitinol.
43. The mask of claim 40, wherein the titanium alloy comprises nickel and titanium.
44. The mask of claim 40, wherein the posterior layer is a first layer, and the cosmetic layer is formed of a material that does not react chemically with the titanium alloy.
45. The mask of claim 44, wherein the cosmetic layer comprises titanium oxide.
46. The mask of claim 44, wherein the cosmetic layer comprises silicon carbide.
47. The mask of claim 36, wherein the posterior layer is formed of a biocompatible metal that does not corrode when implanted in the body.
48. The mask of claim 36, wherein the posterior layer comprises gold.
49. The mask of claim 36, wherein the posterior layer comprises palladium.
50. The mask of claim 36, wherein the posterior layer comprises platinum.
51. The mask of claim 36, wherein the posterior layer tantalum.
52. The mask of claim 36, wherein the posterior layer comprises titanium.
US11/107,359 2004-12-01 2005-04-14 Method of making an ocular implant Abandoned US20060113054A1 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/107,359 US20060113054A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2005-04-14 Method of making an ocular implant
PCT/US2005/043108 WO2006060380A2 (en) 2004-12-01 2005-11-30 Method of making an ocular implant
EP05852395A EP1845896A2 (en) 2004-12-01 2005-11-30 Method of making an ocular implant
JP2007544432A JP4746052B2 (en) 2004-12-01 2005-11-30 Method for manufacturing ocular implant
CA002614510A CA2614510A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2005-11-30 Method of making an ocular implant
US11/417,656 US20060271184A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2006-05-03 Method of making an ocular implant

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/000,562 US7491350B2 (en) 2004-12-01 2004-12-01 Method of making an ocular implant
US11/107,359 US20060113054A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2005-04-14 Method of making an ocular implant

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/000,562 Continuation-In-Part US7491350B2 (en) 2004-12-01 2004-12-01 Method of making an ocular implant

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/417,656 Continuation US20060271184A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2006-05-03 Method of making an ocular implant

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20060113054A1 true US20060113054A1 (en) 2006-06-01

Family

ID=36035711

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/107,359 Abandoned US20060113054A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2005-04-14 Method of making an ocular implant
US11/417,656 Abandoned US20060271184A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2006-05-03 Method of making an ocular implant

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/417,656 Abandoned US20060271184A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2006-05-03 Method of making an ocular implant

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (2) US20060113054A1 (en)
EP (1) EP1845896A2 (en)
JP (1) JP4746052B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2614510A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2006060380A2 (en)

Cited By (36)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060118263A1 (en) * 2004-12-01 2006-06-08 Silvestrini Thomas A Method of making an ocular implant
WO2009117506A2 (en) * 2008-03-18 2009-09-24 Pixeloptics, Inc. Advanced electro-active optic device
US20090306773A1 (en) * 2008-06-04 2009-12-10 Acufocus, Inc. Opaque corneal insert for refractive correction
US20100088907A1 (en) * 2008-10-15 2010-04-15 Asia Optical Co., Inc. Electronic sight and manufacturing method thereof
US7802883B2 (en) 2007-12-20 2010-09-28 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Cosmetic contact lenses having a sparkle effect
WO2011020078A1 (en) 2009-08-13 2011-02-17 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular implants and lenses
US7976577B2 (en) 2005-04-14 2011-07-12 Acufocus, Inc. Corneal optic formed of degradation resistant polymer
US8079706B2 (en) 2003-06-17 2011-12-20 Acufocus, Inc. Method and apparatus for aligning a mask with the visual axis of an eye
USD656526S1 (en) 2009-11-10 2012-03-27 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask
US8215770B2 (en) 2007-02-23 2012-07-10 E-A Ophthalmics Ophthalmic dynamic aperture
US8343215B2 (en) 1999-03-01 2013-01-01 Acufocus, Inc. System and method for increasing the depth of focus of the human eye
US8460374B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2013-06-11 Acufocus, Inc. Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
WO2014074610A1 (en) 2012-11-09 2014-05-15 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens
US8778022B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2014-07-15 E-Vision Smart Optics Inc. Electro-active intraocular lenses
WO2014158653A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-10-02 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
WO2014164056A1 (en) 2013-03-13 2014-10-09 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US8915588B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2014-12-23 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear including a heads up display
US8950068B2 (en) 2013-03-26 2015-02-10 Google Inc. Systems and methods for encapsulating electronics in a mountable device
US8992610B2 (en) 2010-07-26 2015-03-31 Elenza, Inc. Hermetically sealed implantable ophthalmic devices and methods of making same
US9056432B2 (en) 2012-04-25 2015-06-16 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. High-density mask for three-dimensional substrates and methods for making the same
US9122083B2 (en) 2005-10-28 2015-09-01 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear docking station and electronic module
WO2015081250A3 (en) * 2013-11-27 2015-09-11 University Of Rochester Ophthalmic devices with slit-shaped apertures
US9155614B2 (en) 2007-01-22 2015-10-13 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Flexible dynamic electro-active lens
US20150309336A1 (en) * 2014-04-25 2015-10-29 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Methods of patterning and making masks for three-dimensional substrates
US20150320546A1 (en) * 2011-01-05 2015-11-12 The Manchester Metropolitan University Artificial eyes and manufacture thereof
US9427311B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2016-08-30 Acufocus, Inc. Corneal inlay with nutrient transport structures
US9545303B2 (en) 2011-12-02 2017-01-17 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask having selective spectral transmission
US9801709B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2017-10-31 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Electro-active intraocular lenses
US9943403B2 (en) 2014-11-19 2018-04-17 Acufocus, Inc. Fracturable mask for treating presbyopia
US10004593B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2018-06-26 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular lens with elastic mask
CN109907861A (en) * 2019-04-22 2019-06-21 清华大学深圳研究生院 A kind of multifunctionality corneal graft
US10687935B2 (en) 2015-10-05 2020-06-23 Acufocus, Inc. Methods of molding intraocular lenses
US10765510B2 (en) 2015-04-14 2020-09-08 Z Optics, Inc. High definition and extended depth of field intraocular lens
US11364110B2 (en) 2018-05-09 2022-06-21 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular implant with removable optic
US11464625B2 (en) 2015-11-24 2022-10-11 Acufocus, Inc. Toric small aperture intraocular lens with extended depth of focus
US11547554B2 (en) 2015-04-14 2023-01-10 Z Optics, Inc. High definition and extended depth of field intraocular lens

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7641337B2 (en) 2006-12-22 2010-01-05 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Ophthalmic lens including photochromic material
JP5205495B2 (en) * 2008-09-30 2013-06-05 洋一 三河 Intraocular lens
US8197540B2 (en) * 2010-04-26 2012-06-12 Stellar Devices Llc Ocular implant iris diaphragm
TWI588560B (en) 2012-04-05 2017-06-21 布萊恩荷登視覺協會 Lenses, devices, methods and systems for refractive error
US9201250B2 (en) 2012-10-17 2015-12-01 Brien Holden Vision Institute Lenses, devices, methods and systems for refractive error
CN104768499B (en) 2012-10-17 2017-06-23 华柏恩视觉研究中心 For ametropic eyeglass, device, method and system

Citations (95)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3034403A (en) * 1959-04-03 1962-05-15 Neefe Hamilton Res Company Contact lens of apparent variable light absorption
US3270099A (en) * 1964-12-07 1966-08-30 Richard N Camp A method for making multi-focal length contact lenses
US3507566A (en) * 1968-04-29 1970-04-21 Arthur A Knapp Contact lens and spectacle lens structure
US3578850A (en) * 1970-02-11 1971-05-18 Alan H Grant Anti-flare contact lens
US3726587A (en) * 1971-03-09 1973-04-10 C Kendall Bifocal corneal contact lens and method of making same
US3794414A (en) * 1972-05-12 1974-02-26 Jessen Inc Wesley Multiple focal contact lens
US4010496A (en) * 1975-10-01 1977-03-08 Neefe Charles W Bifocal lens which positions within the anterior chamber
US4536240A (en) * 1981-12-02 1985-08-20 Advanced Semiconductor Products, Inc. Method of forming thin optical membranes
US4607617A (en) * 1980-08-05 1986-08-26 Choyce David P Apparatus and method for improving eyesight
US4624669A (en) * 1984-09-26 1986-11-25 Surgidev Corporation Corneal inlay with holes
US4636049A (en) * 1983-09-20 1987-01-13 University Optical Products Co. Concentric bifocal contact lens
US4637697A (en) * 1982-10-27 1987-01-20 Pilkington P.E. Limited Multifocal contact lenses utilizing diffraction and refraction
US4639105A (en) * 1982-09-13 1987-01-27 Neefe Charles W Spin cast ocular cosmetic device with color separation
US4642112A (en) * 1981-04-29 1987-02-10 Pilkington P.E. Limited Artificial eye lenses
US4641934A (en) * 1982-09-29 1987-02-10 Pilkington P.E. Limited Ophthalmic lens with diffractive power
US4646720A (en) * 1985-03-12 1987-03-03 Peyman Gholam A Optical assembly permanently attached to the cornea
US4655774A (en) * 1986-01-03 1987-04-07 Choyce D Peter Intra-corneal implant for correction of aniridia
US4799931A (en) * 1986-05-14 1989-01-24 Lindstrom Richard L Intracorneal lens
US4808181A (en) * 1987-08-07 1989-02-28 Kelman Charles D Intraocular lens having roughened surface area
US4814050A (en) * 1986-10-06 1989-03-21 Aluminum Company Of America Estimation and control of alumina concentration in hall cells
US4869587A (en) * 1987-12-16 1989-09-26 Breger Joseph L Presbyopic contact lens
US4955904A (en) * 1989-08-21 1990-09-11 The Beth Israel Hospital Association Masked intraocular lens and method for treating a patient with cataracts
US4965545A (en) * 1989-08-09 1990-10-23 Tini Alloy Company Shape memory alloy rotary actuator
US4971432A (en) * 1989-12-07 1990-11-20 Koeniger Erich A Bifocal contact lens
US4994080A (en) * 1988-07-15 1991-02-19 Shepard Dennis D Optical lens having at least one stenopaeic opening located in the central area thereof
US4997268A (en) * 1989-07-24 1991-03-05 Dauvergne Hector A Corrective lens configuration
US5061914A (en) * 1989-06-27 1991-10-29 Tini Alloy Company Shape-memory alloy micro-actuator
US5067961A (en) * 1988-02-18 1991-11-26 Autogenesis Technologies, Inc. Non-biodegradable two phase corneal implant and method for preparing same
US5089024A (en) * 1988-04-19 1992-02-18 Storz Instrument Company Multi-focal intraocular lens
US5089022A (en) * 1989-04-26 1992-02-18 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Rectified intraocular lens
US5104957A (en) * 1990-02-28 1992-04-14 Autogenesis Technologies, Inc. Biologically compatible collagenous reaction product and articles useful as medical implants produced therefrom
US5119555A (en) * 1988-09-19 1992-06-09 Tini Alloy Company Non-explosive separation device
US5123921A (en) * 1987-09-14 1992-06-23 Nestle S.A. Synthetic intracorneal lines and method of manufacture
US5133745A (en) * 1988-05-26 1992-07-28 Alcon Laboratories, Inc. Ultraviolet absorbing hydrogels
US5165897A (en) * 1990-08-10 1992-11-24 Tini Alloy Company Programmable tactile stimulator array system and method of operation
US5196026A (en) * 1991-09-16 1993-03-23 Chiron Ophthalmics, Inc. Method of implanting corneal inlay lenses smaller than the optic zone
US5245738A (en) * 1988-09-19 1993-09-21 Tini Alloy Company Method for securing together and non-explosively separating multiple components
US5260727A (en) * 1990-10-22 1993-11-09 Oksman Henry C Wide depth of focus intraocular and contact lenses
US5296881A (en) * 1990-04-17 1994-03-22 Pilkington Diffractive Lenses Limited Method and contact lenses for treating presbyopia
US5302978A (en) * 1990-10-30 1994-04-12 Pilkington Visioncare, Inc. Contact lens
US5323788A (en) * 1992-09-21 1994-06-28 Keravision Overlapping split ring device for corneal curvature adjustment
US5325880A (en) * 1993-04-19 1994-07-05 Tini Alloy Company Shape memory alloy film actuated microvalve
US5354331A (en) * 1992-07-15 1994-10-11 Schachar Ronald A Treatment of presbyopia and other eye disorders
US5366499A (en) * 1992-11-19 1994-11-22 Keratos, Inc. Intraocular prosthesis
US5391201A (en) * 1992-10-02 1995-02-21 Chiron Intraoptics, Inc. Method of using a corneal ring inlay
US5480427A (en) * 1990-02-28 1996-01-02 Darby & Darby Biologically compatible collagenous reaction product and articles useful as medical implants produced therefrom
US5608471A (en) * 1995-07-03 1997-03-04 Westcon Contact Lens Co., Inc. Soft, bifocal contact lens
US5628794A (en) * 1996-03-08 1997-05-13 Lindstrom; Richard L. Multifocal corneal implant lens having a hydrogelo coating
US5631243A (en) * 1990-07-03 1997-05-20 Collagenesis Inc. Collagen-based viscoelastic solution for visco-surgery
US5662706A (en) * 1996-06-14 1997-09-02 Pbh, Inc. Variable transmissivity annular mask lens for the treatment of optical aberrations
US5713957A (en) * 1993-11-19 1998-02-03 Ciba Vision Corporation Corneal onlays
US5722971A (en) * 1995-10-20 1998-03-03 Peyman; Gholam A. Intrastromal corneal modification
US5757458A (en) * 1991-11-12 1998-05-26 Pilkington Barnes Hind, Inc. Annular mask contact lenses
US5771088A (en) * 1993-03-27 1998-06-23 Pilkington Barnes Hind, Inc. Contact lens designed to accommodate and correct for the effects of presbyopia
US5771742A (en) * 1995-09-11 1998-06-30 Tini Alloy Company Release device for retaining pin
US5806530A (en) * 1994-12-08 1998-09-15 Herrick Family Limited Partnership Method for altering the pupil of an eye
US5861486A (en) * 1992-09-09 1999-01-19 Devore; Dale P. Collagen modulators for use in photoablation eximer laser keratectomy
US5864378A (en) * 1996-05-21 1999-01-26 Allergan Enhanced monofocal IOL or contact lens
US5905561A (en) * 1996-06-14 1999-05-18 Pbh, Inc. Annular mask lens having diffraction reducing edges
US5929968A (en) * 1995-11-01 1999-07-27 Cotie; Robert L. Scleral-corneal contact lens
US5965330A (en) * 1996-12-06 1999-10-12 Pbh, Inc. Methods for fabricating annular mask lens having diffraction-reducing edges
US5964748A (en) * 1995-10-20 1999-10-12 Peyman; Gholam A. Intrastromal corneal modification
US6090141A (en) * 1993-03-05 2000-07-18 Lindstrom; Richard L. Small intracorneal lens
US6106552A (en) * 1996-01-30 2000-08-22 Corneal Industrie Corneal prosthesis device having anterior and posterior annular skirts
US6221067B1 (en) * 1995-10-20 2001-04-24 Gholam A. Peyman Corneal modification via implantation
US6283595B1 (en) * 2000-02-24 2001-09-04 Joseph L. Breger Pinhole presbyopic contact lenses
US6357875B1 (en) * 1994-12-08 2002-03-19 Herrick Family Limited Partnership Artificial lens including a lens system having eccentric axes for use in an eye having an enlarged pupil and method
US6358280B1 (en) * 1994-12-08 2002-03-19 Herrick Family Limited Partnership A California Limited Partnership Artificial lens including a lens system having eccentric axes for use in an eye having an enlarged pupil
US20020055753A1 (en) * 1997-12-18 2002-05-09 Thomas A. Silvestrini Corneal implant methods and pliable implant therefor
US20020107337A1 (en) * 1999-12-10 2002-08-08 Rosenzweig Howard S. Contact lens
US20020111677A1 (en) * 1998-12-23 2002-08-15 Alok Nigam Corneal implant and method of manufacture
US6470108B1 (en) * 2000-04-26 2002-10-22 Tini Alloy Company Optical switching device and method
US20030007122A1 (en) * 2001-06-29 2003-01-09 Streibig Daniel G. Colored contact lens and method of making same
US20030014042A1 (en) * 2001-07-13 2003-01-16 Tibor Juhasz Method of creating stromal pockets for corneal implants
US6533905B2 (en) * 2000-01-24 2003-03-18 Tini Alloy Company Method for sputtering tini shape-memory alloys
US20030071893A1 (en) * 2001-10-05 2003-04-17 David Miller System and method of providing visual documentation during surgery
US6554424B1 (en) * 1999-03-01 2003-04-29 Boston Innovative Optices, Inc. System and method for increasing the depth of focus of the human eye
US6569199B1 (en) * 1998-12-29 2003-05-27 Visioncare Ophthalmic Tech Inc Telescopic intraocular lens
US6592621B1 (en) * 2000-11-10 2003-07-15 Rudolph S. Domino Flexible intra-ocular lens of variable focus
USRE38193E1 (en) * 1995-05-19 2003-07-22 Patricia J. Bowling Contact lens utilizing Stiles-Crawford effect
US6599305B1 (en) * 1998-08-12 2003-07-29 Vladimir Feingold Intracorneal lens placement method and apparatus
US6614570B2 (en) * 2000-09-29 2003-09-02 Tini Alloy Company Shutter for fiber optic systems
US6613088B1 (en) * 1997-09-26 2003-09-02 Mark A. Babizhayev Coated ophthalmic and implantable devices and methods for producing same
US6620634B2 (en) * 2002-01-17 2003-09-16 Tini Alloy Company Method of accurately measuring compositions of thin film shape memory alloys
US6624730B2 (en) * 2000-03-28 2003-09-23 Tini Alloy Company Thin film shape memory alloy actuated microrelay
US6626941B2 (en) * 1998-12-23 2003-09-30 Anamed, Inc. Corneal implant and method of manufacture
US20040015234A1 (en) * 2002-07-19 2004-01-22 Peyman Gholam A. Gradual correction of corneal refractive error using multiple inlays
US20040014253A1 (en) * 2002-07-17 2004-01-22 Vikas Gupta Three dimensional thin film devices and methods of fabrication
US20040019379A1 (en) * 2002-07-25 2004-01-29 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Intracorneal lens with flow enhancement area for increased nutrient transport
US20040078075A1 (en) * 2001-05-11 2004-04-22 Koziol Jeffrey E. Method for producing a multifocal corneal surface using intracorneal microscopic lenses
US6729599B2 (en) * 2001-06-26 2004-05-04 Tini Alloy Company Liquid microvalve
US6742761B2 (en) * 2001-04-10 2004-06-01 Tini Alloy Company Miniature latching valve
US6786926B2 (en) * 2001-11-09 2004-09-07 Minu, L.L.C. Method and apparatus for alignment of intracorneal inlay
US6790298B2 (en) * 2000-07-10 2004-09-14 Tini Alloy Company Method of fabrication of free standing shape memory alloy thin film
US6849090B2 (en) * 2001-11-07 2005-02-01 Alok Nigam Myopic corneal ring with central accommodating portion

Family Cites Families (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB1276003A (en) * 1969-03-10 1972-06-01 Frank Auld Corneal contact device
US4976732A (en) * 1984-09-12 1990-12-11 International Financial Associates Holdings, Inc. Optical lens for the human eye
US5836313A (en) * 1993-02-08 1998-11-17 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Methods for making composite hydrogels for corneal prostheses
JP3439809B2 (en) * 1993-12-24 2003-08-25 京セラ株式会社 Artificial cornea
JP3406677B2 (en) * 1994-03-31 2003-05-12 京セラ株式会社 Artificial cornea
US6280471B1 (en) * 1999-09-16 2001-08-28 Gholam A. Peyman Glare-free intraocular lens and method for using the same
JP2004510199A (en) * 2000-09-28 2004-04-02 ノバルティス アクチエンゲゼルシャフト Perforated lens for increased tear flow and method of manufacturing the lens
US7067327B2 (en) * 2001-06-15 2006-06-27 The University Of Houston System Thin film optical detectors for retinal implantation and methods for making and using same
US7628810B2 (en) * 2003-05-28 2009-12-08 Acufocus, Inc. Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US20050033422A1 (en) * 2003-08-08 2005-02-10 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Glare reducing rough surfaces

Patent Citations (99)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3034403A (en) * 1959-04-03 1962-05-15 Neefe Hamilton Res Company Contact lens of apparent variable light absorption
US3270099A (en) * 1964-12-07 1966-08-30 Richard N Camp A method for making multi-focal length contact lenses
US3507566A (en) * 1968-04-29 1970-04-21 Arthur A Knapp Contact lens and spectacle lens structure
US3578850A (en) * 1970-02-11 1971-05-18 Alan H Grant Anti-flare contact lens
US3726587A (en) * 1971-03-09 1973-04-10 C Kendall Bifocal corneal contact lens and method of making same
US3794414A (en) * 1972-05-12 1974-02-26 Jessen Inc Wesley Multiple focal contact lens
US4010496A (en) * 1975-10-01 1977-03-08 Neefe Charles W Bifocal lens which positions within the anterior chamber
US4607617A (en) * 1980-08-05 1986-08-26 Choyce David P Apparatus and method for improving eyesight
US4642112A (en) * 1981-04-29 1987-02-10 Pilkington P.E. Limited Artificial eye lenses
US4536240A (en) * 1981-12-02 1985-08-20 Advanced Semiconductor Products, Inc. Method of forming thin optical membranes
US4639105A (en) * 1982-09-13 1987-01-27 Neefe Charles W Spin cast ocular cosmetic device with color separation
US4641934A (en) * 1982-09-29 1987-02-10 Pilkington P.E. Limited Ophthalmic lens with diffractive power
US4637697A (en) * 1982-10-27 1987-01-20 Pilkington P.E. Limited Multifocal contact lenses utilizing diffraction and refraction
US4636049A (en) * 1983-09-20 1987-01-13 University Optical Products Co. Concentric bifocal contact lens
US4624669A (en) * 1984-09-26 1986-11-25 Surgidev Corporation Corneal inlay with holes
US4646720A (en) * 1985-03-12 1987-03-03 Peyman Gholam A Optical assembly permanently attached to the cornea
US4655774A (en) * 1986-01-03 1987-04-07 Choyce D Peter Intra-corneal implant for correction of aniridia
US4799931A (en) * 1986-05-14 1989-01-24 Lindstrom Richard L Intracorneal lens
US4814050A (en) * 1986-10-06 1989-03-21 Aluminum Company Of America Estimation and control of alumina concentration in hall cells
US4808181A (en) * 1987-08-07 1989-02-28 Kelman Charles D Intraocular lens having roughened surface area
US5123921A (en) * 1987-09-14 1992-06-23 Nestle S.A. Synthetic intracorneal lines and method of manufacture
US4869587A (en) * 1987-12-16 1989-09-26 Breger Joseph L Presbyopic contact lens
US5067961A (en) * 1988-02-18 1991-11-26 Autogenesis Technologies, Inc. Non-biodegradable two phase corneal implant and method for preparing same
US5089024A (en) * 1988-04-19 1992-02-18 Storz Instrument Company Multi-focal intraocular lens
US5133745A (en) * 1988-05-26 1992-07-28 Alcon Laboratories, Inc. Ultraviolet absorbing hydrogels
US4994080A (en) * 1988-07-15 1991-02-19 Shepard Dennis D Optical lens having at least one stenopaeic opening located in the central area thereof
US5245738A (en) * 1988-09-19 1993-09-21 Tini Alloy Company Method for securing together and non-explosively separating multiple components
US5119555A (en) * 1988-09-19 1992-06-09 Tini Alloy Company Non-explosive separation device
US5089022A (en) * 1989-04-26 1992-02-18 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Rectified intraocular lens
US5061914A (en) * 1989-06-27 1991-10-29 Tini Alloy Company Shape-memory alloy micro-actuator
US4997268A (en) * 1989-07-24 1991-03-05 Dauvergne Hector A Corrective lens configuration
US4965545A (en) * 1989-08-09 1990-10-23 Tini Alloy Company Shape memory alloy rotary actuator
US4955904A (en) * 1989-08-21 1990-09-11 The Beth Israel Hospital Association Masked intraocular lens and method for treating a patient with cataracts
US4971432A (en) * 1989-12-07 1990-11-20 Koeniger Erich A Bifocal contact lens
US5104957A (en) * 1990-02-28 1992-04-14 Autogenesis Technologies, Inc. Biologically compatible collagenous reaction product and articles useful as medical implants produced therefrom
US5480427A (en) * 1990-02-28 1996-01-02 Darby & Darby Biologically compatible collagenous reaction product and articles useful as medical implants produced therefrom
US5296881A (en) * 1990-04-17 1994-03-22 Pilkington Diffractive Lenses Limited Method and contact lenses for treating presbyopia
US5631243A (en) * 1990-07-03 1997-05-20 Collagenesis Inc. Collagen-based viscoelastic solution for visco-surgery
US5165897A (en) * 1990-08-10 1992-11-24 Tini Alloy Company Programmable tactile stimulator array system and method of operation
US5260727A (en) * 1990-10-22 1993-11-09 Oksman Henry C Wide depth of focus intraocular and contact lenses
US5302978A (en) * 1990-10-30 1994-04-12 Pilkington Visioncare, Inc. Contact lens
US5336261A (en) * 1991-09-16 1994-08-09 Chiron Intraoptics, Inc. Corneal inlay lenses
US5196026A (en) * 1991-09-16 1993-03-23 Chiron Ophthalmics, Inc. Method of implanting corneal inlay lenses smaller than the optic zone
US5786883A (en) * 1991-11-12 1998-07-28 Pilkington Barnes Hind, Inc. Annular mask contact lenses
US5757458A (en) * 1991-11-12 1998-05-26 Pilkington Barnes Hind, Inc. Annular mask contact lenses
US5354331A (en) * 1992-07-15 1994-10-11 Schachar Ronald A Treatment of presbyopia and other eye disorders
US5861486A (en) * 1992-09-09 1999-01-19 Devore; Dale P. Collagen modulators for use in photoablation eximer laser keratectomy
US5323788A (en) * 1992-09-21 1994-06-28 Keravision Overlapping split ring device for corneal curvature adjustment
US5391201A (en) * 1992-10-02 1995-02-21 Chiron Intraoptics, Inc. Method of using a corneal ring inlay
US5366499A (en) * 1992-11-19 1994-11-22 Keratos, Inc. Intraocular prosthesis
US6090141A (en) * 1993-03-05 2000-07-18 Lindstrom; Richard L. Small intracorneal lens
US5771088A (en) * 1993-03-27 1998-06-23 Pilkington Barnes Hind, Inc. Contact lens designed to accommodate and correct for the effects of presbyopia
US5325880A (en) * 1993-04-19 1994-07-05 Tini Alloy Company Shape memory alloy film actuated microvalve
US5713957A (en) * 1993-11-19 1998-02-03 Ciba Vision Corporation Corneal onlays
US6358280B1 (en) * 1994-12-08 2002-03-19 Herrick Family Limited Partnership A California Limited Partnership Artificial lens including a lens system having eccentric axes for use in an eye having an enlarged pupil
US6357875B1 (en) * 1994-12-08 2002-03-19 Herrick Family Limited Partnership Artificial lens including a lens system having eccentric axes for use in an eye having an enlarged pupil and method
US5806530A (en) * 1994-12-08 1998-09-15 Herrick Family Limited Partnership Method for altering the pupil of an eye
USRE38193E1 (en) * 1995-05-19 2003-07-22 Patricia J. Bowling Contact lens utilizing Stiles-Crawford effect
US5608471A (en) * 1995-07-03 1997-03-04 Westcon Contact Lens Co., Inc. Soft, bifocal contact lens
US5771742A (en) * 1995-09-11 1998-06-30 Tini Alloy Company Release device for retaining pin
US5964748A (en) * 1995-10-20 1999-10-12 Peyman; Gholam A. Intrastromal corneal modification
US6221067B1 (en) * 1995-10-20 2001-04-24 Gholam A. Peyman Corneal modification via implantation
US5722971A (en) * 1995-10-20 1998-03-03 Peyman; Gholam A. Intrastromal corneal modification
US5929968A (en) * 1995-11-01 1999-07-27 Cotie; Robert L. Scleral-corneal contact lens
US6106552A (en) * 1996-01-30 2000-08-22 Corneal Industrie Corneal prosthesis device having anterior and posterior annular skirts
US5628794A (en) * 1996-03-08 1997-05-13 Lindstrom; Richard L. Multifocal corneal implant lens having a hydrogelo coating
US5864378A (en) * 1996-05-21 1999-01-26 Allergan Enhanced monofocal IOL or contact lens
US5905561A (en) * 1996-06-14 1999-05-18 Pbh, Inc. Annular mask lens having diffraction reducing edges
US5662706A (en) * 1996-06-14 1997-09-02 Pbh, Inc. Variable transmissivity annular mask lens for the treatment of optical aberrations
US5965330A (en) * 1996-12-06 1999-10-12 Pbh, Inc. Methods for fabricating annular mask lens having diffraction-reducing edges
US6613088B1 (en) * 1997-09-26 2003-09-02 Mark A. Babizhayev Coated ophthalmic and implantable devices and methods for producing same
US20020055753A1 (en) * 1997-12-18 2002-05-09 Thomas A. Silvestrini Corneal implant methods and pliable implant therefor
US6599305B1 (en) * 1998-08-12 2003-07-29 Vladimir Feingold Intracorneal lens placement method and apparatus
US20020111677A1 (en) * 1998-12-23 2002-08-15 Alok Nigam Corneal implant and method of manufacture
US6626941B2 (en) * 1998-12-23 2003-09-30 Anamed, Inc. Corneal implant and method of manufacture
US6569199B1 (en) * 1998-12-29 2003-05-27 Visioncare Ophthalmic Tech Inc Telescopic intraocular lens
US6554424B1 (en) * 1999-03-01 2003-04-29 Boston Innovative Optices, Inc. System and method for increasing the depth of focus of the human eye
US20020107337A1 (en) * 1999-12-10 2002-08-08 Rosenzweig Howard S. Contact lens
US20030127318A1 (en) * 2000-01-24 2003-07-10 Johnson A. David Method for sputtering TiNi shape-memory alloys
US6533905B2 (en) * 2000-01-24 2003-03-18 Tini Alloy Company Method for sputtering tini shape-memory alloys
US6283595B1 (en) * 2000-02-24 2001-09-04 Joseph L. Breger Pinhole presbyopic contact lenses
US6624730B2 (en) * 2000-03-28 2003-09-23 Tini Alloy Company Thin film shape memory alloy actuated microrelay
US6470108B1 (en) * 2000-04-26 2002-10-22 Tini Alloy Company Optical switching device and method
US6790298B2 (en) * 2000-07-10 2004-09-14 Tini Alloy Company Method of fabrication of free standing shape memory alloy thin film
US6614570B2 (en) * 2000-09-29 2003-09-02 Tini Alloy Company Shutter for fiber optic systems
US6592621B1 (en) * 2000-11-10 2003-07-15 Rudolph S. Domino Flexible intra-ocular lens of variable focus
US6742761B2 (en) * 2001-04-10 2004-06-01 Tini Alloy Company Miniature latching valve
US20040078075A1 (en) * 2001-05-11 2004-04-22 Koziol Jeffrey E. Method for producing a multifocal corneal surface using intracorneal microscopic lenses
US6729599B2 (en) * 2001-06-26 2004-05-04 Tini Alloy Company Liquid microvalve
US20030007122A1 (en) * 2001-06-29 2003-01-09 Streibig Daniel G. Colored contact lens and method of making same
US20030014042A1 (en) * 2001-07-13 2003-01-16 Tibor Juhasz Method of creating stromal pockets for corneal implants
US20030071893A1 (en) * 2001-10-05 2003-04-17 David Miller System and method of providing visual documentation during surgery
US6849090B2 (en) * 2001-11-07 2005-02-01 Alok Nigam Myopic corneal ring with central accommodating portion
US6786926B2 (en) * 2001-11-09 2004-09-07 Minu, L.L.C. Method and apparatus for alignment of intracorneal inlay
US6620634B2 (en) * 2002-01-17 2003-09-16 Tini Alloy Company Method of accurately measuring compositions of thin film shape memory alloys
US6746890B2 (en) * 2002-07-17 2004-06-08 Tini Alloy Company Three dimensional thin film devices and methods of fabrication
US20040014253A1 (en) * 2002-07-17 2004-01-22 Vikas Gupta Three dimensional thin film devices and methods of fabrication
US20040015234A1 (en) * 2002-07-19 2004-01-22 Peyman Gholam A. Gradual correction of corneal refractive error using multiple inlays
US20040019379A1 (en) * 2002-07-25 2004-01-29 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Intracorneal lens with flow enhancement area for increased nutrient transport

Cited By (92)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8752958B2 (en) 1999-03-01 2014-06-17 Boston Innovative Optics, Inc. System and method for increasing the depth of focus of the human eye
US8343215B2 (en) 1999-03-01 2013-01-01 Acufocus, Inc. System and method for increasing the depth of focus of the human eye
US10869752B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2020-12-22 Acufocus, Inc. Mask for increasing depth of focus
US9138142B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2015-09-22 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular devices
US8858624B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2014-10-14 Acufocus, Inc. Method for increasing the depth of focus of a patient
US8460374B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2013-06-11 Acufocus, Inc. Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US8079706B2 (en) 2003-06-17 2011-12-20 Acufocus, Inc. Method and apparatus for aligning a mask with the visual axis of an eye
US8864824B2 (en) 2003-06-17 2014-10-21 Acufocus, Inc. Method and apparatus for aligning a mask with the visual axis of an eye
US10729539B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2020-08-04 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Electro-chromic ophthalmic devices
US9124796B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2015-09-01 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear including a remote control camera
US10092395B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2018-10-09 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Electro-active lens with crossed linear electrodes
US10126569B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2018-11-13 E-Vision Smart Optics Inc. Flexible electro-active lens
US10159563B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2018-12-25 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear including a detachable power supply and a display
US9801709B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2017-10-31 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Electro-active intraocular lenses
US10172704B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2019-01-08 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Methods and apparatus for actuating an ophthalmic lens in response to ciliary muscle motion
US10379575B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2019-08-13 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear including a remote control camera and a docking station
US10795411B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2020-10-06 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear including a remote control camera and a docking station
US10852766B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2020-12-01 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Electro-active elements with crossed linear electrodes
US11822155B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2023-11-21 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear including a remote control camera
US11144090B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2021-10-12 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear including a camera or display
US8778022B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2014-07-15 E-Vision Smart Optics Inc. Electro-active intraocular lenses
US11262796B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2022-03-01 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear including a detachable power supply and display
US11422389B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2022-08-23 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear including a remote control camera
US8931896B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2015-01-13 E-Vision Smart Optics Inc. Eyewear including a docking station
US8915588B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2014-12-23 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear including a heads up display
US20060118263A1 (en) * 2004-12-01 2006-06-08 Silvestrini Thomas A Method of making an ocular implant
US7976577B2 (en) 2005-04-14 2011-07-12 Acufocus, Inc. Corneal optic formed of degradation resistant polymer
US8287592B2 (en) 2005-04-14 2012-10-16 Acufocus, Inc. Ophthalmic devices having a degradation resistant polymer
US9122083B2 (en) 2005-10-28 2015-09-01 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear docking station and electronic module
US10114235B2 (en) 2005-10-28 2018-10-30 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear docking station and electronic module
US9155614B2 (en) 2007-01-22 2015-10-13 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Flexible dynamic electro-active lens
US11474380B2 (en) 2007-01-22 2022-10-18 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Flexible electro-active lens
US8215770B2 (en) 2007-02-23 2012-07-10 E-A Ophthalmics Ophthalmic dynamic aperture
US7926940B2 (en) 2007-02-23 2011-04-19 Pixeloptics, Inc. Advanced electro-active optic device
US7802883B2 (en) 2007-12-20 2010-09-28 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Cosmetic contact lenses having a sparkle effect
WO2009117506A3 (en) * 2008-03-18 2010-01-07 Pixeloptics, Inc. Advanced electro-active optic device
WO2009117506A2 (en) * 2008-03-18 2009-09-24 Pixeloptics, Inc. Advanced electro-active optic device
JP2011515157A (en) * 2008-03-18 2011-05-19 ピクセルオプティクス, インコーポレイテッド Advanced electroactive optical component devices
US20090306773A1 (en) * 2008-06-04 2009-12-10 Acufocus, Inc. Opaque corneal insert for refractive correction
US8109031B2 (en) * 2008-10-15 2012-02-07 Asia Optical Co., Inc. Electronic sight and manufacturing method thereof
US20100088907A1 (en) * 2008-10-15 2010-04-15 Asia Optical Co., Inc. Electronic sight and manufacturing method thereof
US10548717B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2020-02-04 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular lens with elastic mask
US9492272B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2016-11-15 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular implants and lenses
US10449036B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2019-10-22 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular implants and lenses
US11311371B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2022-04-26 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular lens with elastic mask
US11357617B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2022-06-14 Acufocus, Inc. Method of implanting and forming masked intraocular implants and lenses
US9427311B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2016-08-30 Acufocus, Inc. Corneal inlay with nutrient transport structures
US9005281B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2015-04-14 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular implants and lenses
US10004593B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2018-06-26 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular lens with elastic mask
WO2011020078A1 (en) 2009-08-13 2011-02-17 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular implants and lenses
EP3290003A1 (en) 2009-08-13 2018-03-07 AcuFocus, Inc. Method of manufacturing masked intraocular implants and lenses
USD681086S1 (en) 2009-11-10 2013-04-30 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask
USD656526S1 (en) 2009-11-10 2012-03-27 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask
US9675444B2 (en) 2010-07-26 2017-06-13 Elenza, Inc. Hermetically sealed implantable ophthalmic devices and methods of making same
US8992610B2 (en) 2010-07-26 2015-03-31 Elenza, Inc. Hermetically sealed implantable ophthalmic devices and methods of making same
US20150320546A1 (en) * 2011-01-05 2015-11-12 The Manchester Metropolitan University Artificial eyes and manufacture thereof
US9545303B2 (en) 2011-12-02 2017-01-17 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask having selective spectral transmission
US9848979B2 (en) 2011-12-02 2017-12-26 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask having selective spectral transmission
US10765508B2 (en) 2011-12-02 2020-09-08 AcFocus, Inc. Ocular mask having selective spectral transmission
US10342656B2 (en) 2011-12-02 2019-07-09 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask having selective spectral transmission
US11487138B2 (en) 2012-01-06 2022-11-01 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear docking station and electronic module
US10598960B2 (en) 2012-01-06 2020-03-24 E-Vision Smart Optics, Inc. Eyewear docking station and electronic module
US9056432B2 (en) 2012-04-25 2015-06-16 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. High-density mask for three-dimensional substrates and methods for making the same
WO2014074610A1 (en) 2012-11-09 2014-05-15 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens
US10350058B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2019-07-16 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US10939995B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2021-03-09 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US11771552B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2023-10-03 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
WO2014164056A1 (en) 2013-03-13 2014-10-09 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
EP3378441A1 (en) 2013-03-13 2018-09-26 AcuFocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US9603704B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2017-03-28 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US9204962B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2015-12-08 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US9573328B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-02-21 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
US9427922B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-08-30 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
WO2014158653A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-10-02 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
US10183453B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2019-01-22 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
US10583619B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2020-03-10 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
US9844919B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-12-19 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
US8950068B2 (en) 2013-03-26 2015-02-10 Google Inc. Systems and methods for encapsulating electronics in a mountable device
US9161712B2 (en) 2013-03-26 2015-10-20 Google Inc. Systems and methods for encapsulating electronics in a mountable device
WO2015081250A3 (en) * 2013-11-27 2015-09-11 University Of Rochester Ophthalmic devices with slit-shaped apertures
US9995951B2 (en) * 2014-04-25 2018-06-12 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Methods of patterning and making masks for three-dimensional substrates
US10718962B2 (en) 2014-04-25 2020-07-21 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Methods of patterning and making masks for three-dimensional substrates
US20150309336A1 (en) * 2014-04-25 2015-10-29 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Methods of patterning and making masks for three-dimensional substrates
US9943403B2 (en) 2014-11-19 2018-04-17 Acufocus, Inc. Fracturable mask for treating presbyopia
US11547554B2 (en) 2015-04-14 2023-01-10 Z Optics, Inc. High definition and extended depth of field intraocular lens
US10765510B2 (en) 2015-04-14 2020-09-08 Z Optics, Inc. High definition and extended depth of field intraocular lens
US11696823B2 (en) 2015-04-14 2023-07-11 Z Optics, Inc. High definition and extended depth of field intraocular lens
US11690707B2 (en) 2015-10-05 2023-07-04 Acufocus, Inc. Methods of molding intraocular lenses
US10687935B2 (en) 2015-10-05 2020-06-23 Acufocus, Inc. Methods of molding intraocular lenses
US11464625B2 (en) 2015-11-24 2022-10-11 Acufocus, Inc. Toric small aperture intraocular lens with extended depth of focus
US11364110B2 (en) 2018-05-09 2022-06-21 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular implant with removable optic
CN109907861A (en) * 2019-04-22 2019-06-21 清华大学深圳研究生院 A kind of multifunctionality corneal graft

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2008521558A (en) 2008-06-26
JP4746052B2 (en) 2011-08-10
CA2614510A1 (en) 2006-06-08
US20060271184A1 (en) 2006-11-30
WO2006060380A3 (en) 2006-12-07
WO2006060380A2 (en) 2006-06-08
EP1845896A2 (en) 2007-10-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7491350B2 (en) Method of making an ocular implant
US20060113054A1 (en) Method of making an ocular implant
US20210154002A1 (en) Mask for increasing depth of focus
US8864824B2 (en) Method and apparatus for aligning a mask with the visual axis of an eye
US20060184243A1 (en) System and method for aligning an optic with an axis of an eye

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: ACUFOCUS, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:SILVESTRINI, THOMAS A.;REEL/FRAME:016461/0591

Effective date: 20050627

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION